M i lest on e Sy st em s

XProtect® Sm art Client 2021 R1

User m anual
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Contents
Copyright, tradem arks, and disclaim er 19

Overview 20

About this manual 20

Over view 20

Licensing 20

Requir ements and consider ations 20

Installation 20

Configur ation 20

Optimization 20

Oper ation 21

Tr oubleshooting 21

Upgr ade 21

FAQ 21

XPr otect Smar t Client (explained) 21

Additional functionality 22

What's new? 22

In XPr otect Smar t Client 2021 R1 22

Add-on pr oducts 25

XPr otect Smar t Wall (explained) 25

XPr otect Access (explained) 26

XPr otect LPR (explained) 26

XPr otect Tr ansact (explained) 26

Licensing 28

XPr otect Smar t Client licensing 28

Licenses for your add-ons 28

Requirem ents and considerations 29

Minimum system r equir ements 29

Sur veillance system differ ences 29

2 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

I nstallation 30

Install XPr otect Smar t Client 30

Configuration 31

User r ights (explained) 31

Setup mode (over view) 31

Settings in XPr otect Smar t Client 33

Application settings 33

Panes settings 36

Functions settings 36

Timeline settings 38

Expor t settings 38

Smar t map settings 39

Keyboar d settings 40

Sear ch settings 41

Joystick settings 42

Access contr ol settings 43

Alar m Manager settings 44

Advanced settings 44

Language settings 49

Right-to-left languages (explained) 49

Disable the help 49

Views (configur ation) 50

Views and view gr oups (explained) 50

What can views contain? 51

Cr eate view gr oups 53

Cr eate views 53

Copy, r ename, or delete views or gr oups 54

Add camer as and other items to views 55

Assign shor tcut number s to views 56

Adding content to views (in detail) 56

3 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Web page pr oper ties 63

Camer as (configur ation) 64

Camer a settings 65

Fr ame r ate effect (explained) 70

Bounding boxes (explained) 70

Bounding box pr ovider s (explained) 71

Over lay buttons (explained) 71

Sound notifications (explained) 71

Audio (configur ation) 72

Audio settings 72

Bookmar ks (configur ation) 73

Enable detailed bookmar ks 73

Camer a navigator s (configur ation) 74

Add camer a navigator s to views 74

Camer a navigator settings 75

Car ousels (configur ation) 75

Add car ousels to views 76

Car ousel settings 76

Hotspots (configur ation) 76

Add hotspots to views 76

Hotspot settings 77

PTZ pr esets (configur ation) 77

Add PTZ pr esets 77

Edit PTZ pr esets 78

Delete PTZ pr esets 79

Patr olling pr ofiles (configur ation) 79

Add patr olling pr ofile 79

Delete patr olling pr ofile 80

Edit patr olling pr ofile 80

Alar ms and events (configur ation) 82

4 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Add alar ms to views 82

Alar m list settings 82

Alar m pr eview settings 83

Smar t map (configur ation) 84

Differ ences between maps and smar t maps (explained) 84

Add smar t map to views 85

Change geogr aphic backgr ounds on smar t maps 85

Geogr aphic backgr ounds (explained) 86

Types of geogr aphic backgr ounds (explained) 86

Enable Milestone Map Ser vice 87

OpenStr eetMap tile ser ver (explained) 88

Change OpenStr eetMap tile ser ver 89

Showing or hiding layer s on smar t map 90

Layer s on smar t map (explained) 90

Or der of layer s (explained) 90

Show or hide layer s on smar t map 91

Specify default settings for smar t map 91

Adding, deleting, or editing custom over lays 92

Custom over lays (explained) 92

Custom over lays and locations (explained) 92

Add custom over lay on smar t map 93

Add locations to custom over lays (smar t map) 94

Delete custom over lay on smar t map 94

Make ar eas in shapefiles mor e visible (smar t map) 95

Adjust position, size, or alignment of custom over lay 95

Adding, deleting, or editing devices on smar t map 96

Add devices to smar t map 97

Change field of view and dir ection of camer a 101

Select or change device icon 101

Show or hide device infor mation 102

5 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Listen to audio fr om micr ophone on smar t map 102

Remove devices fr om smar t map 102

Adding, deleting, or editing links on smar t map 104

Links on smar t map (explained) 104

Add link to smar t map location or map 104

Edit or delete link on smar t map 105

Adding, deleting, or editing locations on smar t map 105

Locations on smar t map (explained) 105

Home locations for smar t map (explained) 106

Add location to smar t map 106

Edit or delete location on smar t map 107

Linking between locations (explained) 107

Adding, deleting, or editing buildings on smar t map 107

Buildings on smar t map (explained) 107

Add buildings to smar t map 108

Edit buildings on smar t map 108

Delete buildings on smar t map 109

Managing levels and devices in buildings (smar t map) 110

Devices and levels in buildings (explained) 110

Floor plans and devices in buildings (explained) 110

Add or r emove levels fr om buildings (smar t map) 110

Change or der of levels in buildings (smar t map) 111

Set default level for buildings (smar t map) 111

Add floor plans to levels (smar t map) 112

Delete floor plans on levels (smar t map) 113

Add devices to buildings (smar t map) 114

Maps (configur ation) 114

Add maps to views 114

Map settings 115

Map toolbox (explained) 117

6 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Maps - the r ight-click menu (explained) 117

Change the backgr ound of a map 117

Remove the map 117

Add and r emove elements fr om maps 117

Add a hot zone to a map 118

Change the appear ance of map elements 119

Edit and r otate labels on a map 121

Add/edit text on a map 122

Matr ix (configur ation) 122

Add Matr ix to views 122

Matr ix settings 123

XPr otect Smar t Wall (configur ation) 123

Add Smar t Wall over view to views 124

Change the layout of Smar t Wall monitor s 125

XPr otect Smar t Client – Player (configur ation) 127

Managing views in XPr otect Smar t Client – Player 127

Pr oject pane (explained) 127

Views pane (explained) 128

Over view pane (explained) 128

Digital signatur es (explained) 129

XPr otect Access (configur ation) 129

Add Access Monitor s to views 129

Access Monitor Settings 130

Modify Access Monitor settings 131

Customize your view 131

Manage car dholder infor mation 131

Tur n access r equest notifications on or off 132

XPr otect LPR (configur ation) 132

Add LPR camer as to views 132

Adjust LPR view settings 132

7 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Enable LPR ser ver status on maps 133

Enable LPR-specific elements 133

XPr otect Tr ansact (configur ation) 135

Getting star ted with XPr otect Tr ansact 135

XPr otect Tr ansact tr ial license 136

Set up views for tr ansactions 136

Adjust settings for tr ansaction view items 138

Scr ipting 139

Scr ipting for log in (explained) 139

Scr ipting for log in - par ameter s 139

Scr ipting HTML page for navigation 143

Simplified mode 147

Simplified mode (over view) 148

Add or edit views in simplified mode 149

Optim ization 150

Enabling har dwar e acceler ation 150

Har dwar e acceler ation (explained) 150

Check har dwar e acceler ation settings 150

Ver ify your oper ating system 151

Check CPU Quick Sync suppor t 151

Examine the Device Manager 152

Check NVIDIA har dwar e acceler ation suppor t 153

Enable the Intel display adapter in the BIOS 154

Update the video dr iver 154

Check memor y modules configur ation 155

Enabling adaptive str eaming 155

Adaptive str eaming (explained) 155

Check adaptive str eaming settings 157

Check available live video str eams 158

Monitor your system 159

8 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Monitor client r esour ces 159

System Monitor tab with Milestone Feder ated Ar chitectur e (explained) 160

Operation 161

Logging in 161

Log in and out 161

Login author ization (explained) 162

Logging into access contr ol systems (explained) 162

Change passwor d in XPr otect Smar t Client 163

Allow connections that use an older secur ity model (HTTP) 164

Clear setting that allows connections 165

Wor kspaces in XPr otect Smar t Client 165

Standar d tabs (over view) 165

Add-on tabs (over view) 166

All tabs (in detail) 166

Live tab (explained) 166

Playback tab (explained) 166

Sear ch tab (explained) 167

Alar m Manager tab (explained) 167

System Monitor tab (explained) 167

Access Contr ol tab (explained) 168

LPR tab (explained) 168

Tr ansact tab (explained) 169

Buttons in XPr otect Smar t Client (over view) 169

Managing views 171

Sear ching for views and camer as (explained) 171

Change individual camer as tempor ar ily 173

Swap camer as 174

Send video between open views 174

Send views between displays 175

Multiple windows or displays (explained) 175

9 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Navigating your camer as and views 178

Hotspots (explained) 179

Use hotspots 179

Camer a navigator (explained) 179

Use camer a navigator s 180

Car ousels (explained) 181

Use car ousels 181

Digital zoom (explained) 182

Use digital zoom 182

Vir tual joystick and PTZ over lay buttons (explained) 184

Views and shor tcuts (explained) 184

Keyboar d shor tcuts (over view) 185

Viewing live video 186

Live video (explained) 186

Live tab (over view) 187

Camer a toolbar (over view) 188

Hide camer a toolbar 189

Camer a indicator s (explained) 189

Recor d video manually 190

Take single snapshots 190

Investigating incidents 191

Viewing r ecor ded video (explained) 191

On the Playback tab 192

On the Live tab 193

On the Sear ch tab 193

Playback tab (over view) 194

Timeline (explained) 195

Bookmar ks in the timeline (explained) 196

Time navigation contr ols (over view) 196

View r ecor ded video independently of timeline 198

10 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Investigate your sear ch r esults 199

Cr eating video evidence 199

Expor t video, audio, and still images 199

Mask ar eas in r ecor dings dur ing expor t 200

Stor yboar ds (explained) 201

Expor t stor yboar ds 201

Expor t locked video evidence 202

View expor ted video 202

Pr inting or cr eating sur veillance r epor ts 204

Pr int r epor t fr om single camer as 204

Cr eate r epor ts fr om sear ch r esults 205

Copy images to clipboar d 206

Video expor t settings 207

XPr otect for mat settings 208

Media player for mat settings 209

Locking video evidence 210

Evidence locks (explained) 210

Cr eate evidence locks 210

View evidence locks 212

Edit evidence locks 213

Play back video with evidence locks 213

Expor t locked video evidence 213

Delete evidence locks 214

Evidence lock settings 214

Evidence lock filter s 215

Evidence lock status messages 216

Sear ching for video data 218

Sear ch for video 218

Sear ch for motion (smar t sear ch) 223

Motion sear ch thr eshold (explained) 225

11 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Sear ch for bookmar ks 225

Sear ch for alar ms 227

Sear ch for events 227

Sear ch for people 227

Sear ch for vehicles 228

Sear ch for video at location 229

Sear ch r esults, settings, and actions 229

Timeline on Sear ch tab (explained) 229

Actions available fr om sear ch r esults (over view) 230

MIP-r elated actions 231

Mer ged sear ch r esults (explained) 231

Match any or all sear ch cr iter ia (explained) 232

Star t sear ch fr om camer as or views 233

Open sear ch r esults in separ ate windows 233

Pr eview video fr om sear ch r esults 234

Show or hide bounding boxes dur ing sear ch 236

Sor ting options 236

Locate camer as while sear ching 237

Camer a icons (explained) 240

Bookmar k sear ch r esults 241

Edit bookmar ks fr om sear ch r esults 243

Take snapshots fr om sear ch r esults 244

Tr ansfer the sear ch time to the playback timeline 245

Managing your sear ches 245

Save sear ches 246

Find and open saved sear ches 247

Edit or delete saved sear ches 249

Bookmar ks (usage) 250

Bookmar ks (explained) 250

Bookmar k window 251

12 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Add or edit bookmar ks 254

Delete bookmar ks 255

Alar ms and events (usage) 256

Alar ms (explained) 256

Alar m list (explained) 256

Ser ver s in alar m list (explained) 257

Alar m states (explained) 257

Filter alar ms 257

Responding to alar ms 258

Viewing and editing details of an alar m 258

Acknowledge alar ms 259

Disable all new alar ms on selected event types 259

Ignor e alar ms on maps 262

Close alar ms 262

Pr int alar m r epor ts 262

Get statistics on alar ms 263

Alar ms on maps (explained) 263

Alar ms on smar t maps (explained) 264

Events (explained) 264

Manually activate events 264

Pr ivacy masking (usage) 265

Pr ivacy masking (explained) 265

Lift and apply pr ivacy masks 266

PTZ and fisheye lenses (usage) 268

Fisheye lens images (explained) 268

Define a favor ite fisheye lens position 269

PTZ and fisheye lens images (explained) 269

PTZ images (explained) 270

Move camer as to PTZ pr eset positions 270

Locked PTZ pr esets (explained) 270

13 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Star ting, stopping, or pausing PTZ patr olling 271

Stop PTZ patr olling 271

Manual patr olling (explained) 271

Star t and stop manual patr olling 272

Pause patr olling 273

Reser ved PTZ sessions (explained) 275

Reser ve PTZ sessions 275

Release PTZ sessions 275

Vir tual joystick and PTZ over lay buttons (explained) 276

Audio (usage) 276

Audio (explained) 276

Talk to an audience 277

Smar t map (usage) 277

Smar t map (explained) 277

Smar t map and alar ms (explained) 278

Smar t map and sear ch (explained) 278

Gr ouping of devices (explained) 280

Get over view of gr ouped devices 283

Zoom in and out 283

Pr eview live video fr om one camer a 284

Pr eview live video fr om multiple camer as 285

Use hotspot to view video fr om camer as on smar t map 286

Go to smar t map locations 287

Jump to device on smar t map 287

Jump to custom over lays on smar t map 288

Backtr acking to pr evious locations (explained) 289

Maps (usage) 289

Maps (explained) 289

How elements inter act with maps 290

Map Over view window (explained) 294

14 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Send camer as fr om a map to a floating window 294

View r ecor ded video fr om camer as on a map 294

View status details 295

Zoom and auto maximize 295

Matr ix (usage) 296

Matr ix (explained) 296

Viewing Matr ix content (explained) 296

Manually send video to Matr ix r ecipients 296

Milestone Inter connect (usage) 297

Timeline and Milestone Inter connect (explained) 297

Retr ieve data fr om Milestone Inter connect 297

XPr otect Smar t Wall (usage) 298

Smar t Wall over view (explained) 298

View Smar t Wall content 299

Disconnect Smar t Wall monitor s 300

Smar t Wall display options 300

Displaying content on Smar t Wall 301

Add or change camer as on Smar t Wall 301

Add entir e views to Smar t Wall 304

Add or change other types of content on Smar t Wall 305

Display text on Smar t Wall 307

Alar ms on Smar t Wall (explained) 308

Send bookmar ks to Smar t Wall 309

Smar t map and Smar t Wall (explained) 310

Dr ag camer as fr om maps or smar t maps to Smar t Wall 311

Stop displaying content on Smar t Wall 311

XPr otect Smar t Client – Player (usage) 313

XPr otect Smar t Client – Player (over view) 314

Sear ch in XPr otect Smar t Client – Player 315

Ver ify digital signatur es 316

15 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

View database or pr eviously expor ted evidence 318

XPr otect Access (usage) 318

Access contr ol on the Live tab (explained) 318

Monitor door s via maps 319

Investigating access contr ol events 319

Sear ch and filter access contr ol events 319

Events list (explained) 320

Expor t an access r epor t 320

Switch to or fr om live update mode of the Events list 321

Monitor and contr ol door states 321

Door s list (explained) 322

Investigate car dholder s 323

Access r equest notifications (explained) 323

Managing access r equest notifications (explained) 324

Respond to access r equests 324

XPr otect LPR (usage) 324

LPR on the Live tab (explained) 324

LPR on the Sear ch tab (explained) 325

LPR tab (explained) 325

LPR event list (explained) 325

Filter ing LPR events (explained) 326

Edit license plate match lists 326

Impor t or expor t license plate match lists 327

Expor t LPR events as a r epor t 327

LPR on the Alar m Manager tab 328

View LPR r ecognitions 328

XPr otect Tr ansact (usage) 329

XPr otect Tr ansact (over view) 329

Obser ve live tr ansactions 330

Investigating tr ansactions 331

16 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Investigate tr ansactions in a view 331

Investigate tr ansactions using sear ch and filter s 333

Investigate tr ansactions fr om a disabled sour ce 334

Investigate tr ansaction events 334

Investigate tr ansaction alar ms 335

Pr int tr ansactions 336

Maintenance 337

Check the status of your ser ver connection 337

Status window (explained) 337

Status window - Login infor mation 338

Status window - Jobs 338

Status window - Evidence lock list 338

Troubleshooting 339

Installation (tr oubleshooting) 339

Er r or messages and war nings 339

Logging in (tr oubleshooting) 339

Er r or messages and war nings 339

Milestone Feder ated Ar chitectur e 341

Expor ting (tr oubleshooting) 341

Er r or messages and war nings 342

Sear ching (tr oubleshooting) 343

Er r or messages and war nings 343

Smar t map (tr oubleshooting) 343

Er r or messages and war nings 344

Web pages (tr oubleshooting) 344

XPr otect Smar t Wall (tr oubleshooting) 345

XPr otect Tr ansact (tr oubleshooting) 345

Er r or messages and war nings 345

Upgrade 347

Upgr ading XPr otect Smar t Client 347

17 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

View ver sion and plug-in infor mation 347

FAQ 348

FAQ: alar ms 348

FAQ: audio 348

FAQ: bookmar ks 349

FAQ: camer as 349

FAQ: digital zoom 350

FAQ: displays and windows 350

FAQ: expor ting 351

FAQ: maps 352

FAQ: notifications 352

FAQ: sear ching 353

FAQ: smar t map 356

FAQ: views 358

Glossary 361

18 | Contents
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Copyright, trademarks, and disclaimer

Copyright © 2021 Milestone Systems A/S

Tradem arks

XProtect is a registered trademark of Milestone Systems A/S.

Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. App Store is a service mark of
Apple Inc. Android is a trademark of Google Inc.

All other trademarks mentioned in this document are trademarks of their respective owners.

Disclaim er

This text is intended for general information purposes only, and due care has been taken in its preparation.

Any risk arising from the use of this information rests with the recipient, and nothing herein should be construed
as constituting any kind of warranty.

Milestone Systems A/S reserves the right to make adjustments without prior notification.

All names of people and organizations used in the examples in this text are fictitious. Any resemblance to any
actual organization or person, living or dead, is purely coincidental and unintended.

This product may make use of third-party software for which specific terms and conditions may apply. When that
is the case, you can find more information in the file 3rd_party_software_terms_and_conditions.txt located in your
Milestone system installation folder.

19 | Copyright, trademarks, and disclaimer

User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Overview

About this manual

This user manual is mainly for XProtect Smart Client operators, but also for system administrators and
integrators responsible for configuring, maintaining, and troubleshooting XProtect Smart Client. Most of the
configuration, however, takes place in XProtect Management Client. For more information, see the administrator
manual for XProtect VMS.

In this manual, references made to the positioning of user interface elements presume that you are using a
visual left-to-right interface. See also Right-to-left languages (explained) on page 49.

What will you find in the different sections of the manual?

Overview
Overview information about XProtect Smart Client and its features, including what is new in the current release,
and add-on products.

Licensing
Everything you need to know about licensing in XProtect Smart Client.

Requirements and considerations

Things you should be aware of before installing XProtect Smart Client, for example system requirements.

Installation
Information about how to install XProtect Smart Client.

Configuration
Most of the configuration is done by your system administrator in XProtect Management Client, but there are
some elements that you can configure yourself in XProtect Smart Client, for example views and application
settings.

Optimization
Things you can do to optimize the user experience, for example enabling hardware acceleration.

20 | Overview
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Operation
This section is all about how to use the features in XProtect Smart Client, for example how to play back recorded
video, perform advanced searches, and export video recordings and still images.

Troubleshooting
Sometimes you run into problems, for example you may receive error messages. Try the Troubleshooting
section if you cannot make things work - before contacting support.

Upgrade
Information about when an upgrade is required.

FAQ
Here you can find answers to some of the most frequently answered questions.

XProtect Smart Client (explained)

XProtect Smart Client is a desktop application designed to help you manage and view video from the cameras
that are connected to your XProtect VMS system. It gives you access to live and recorded video, instant control of
cameras and connected security devices, and allows you to perform advanced searches to find video data and
metadata - if any - that is stored on the server.

Available in multiple local languages, XProtect Smart Client has an adaptable user interface that can be
optimized for individual operators’ tasks and adjusted according to specific skills and authority levels.

21 | Overview
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Additional functionality
Depending on the XProtect add-ons installed on your XProtect VMS system, you can:

l combine video with integrated access control systems, including restricting or allowing access to
buildings

l read license plate information from vehicles and view the live or recorded video that shows the vehicles

l view and investigate transactional data from POS systems in combination with video from cameras that
monitor the POS systems

By using the MIP SDK, users can integrate various types of security and business systems, and video analytics
applications, which you manage through XProtect Smart Client.

What's new?

In XProt ect Sm art Client 2021 R1

Searching:

22 | Overview
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l Sort your search results by Relevance. See also Sorting options on page 236

l Administrators can control the number of cameras that are allowed in one search

Smart map:

l Use Milestone Map Service as the geographic background of your smart map. After you enable
Milestone Map Service, there is no further setup you need to do.. See Enable Milestone Map Service

l Get an overview of grouped devices. When you are zoomed out, click a cluster to see the types and
number of devices within a specific area. See also Get overview of grouped devices on page 283

l Add different types of devices to your smart map. In addition to cameras, you can also use input devices,
microphones, and elements added through the MIP SDK. See also Adding, deleting, or editing devices on
smart map on page 96

l Improved zoom capability. Double-click a cluster to zoom in on grouped devices. See also Zoom in and
out on page 283

Security:

l Basic users can change their password, either on their own initiative or if an administrator enforces the
need for change. See also Change password in XProtect Smart Client on page 163

In XProtect Smart Client 2020 R3

Multi-category search:

l When you apply multiple search categories, match all or any of the search categories to narrow down or
broaden your search results. See also Match any or all search criteria (explained) on page 232

l Overlapping search results are combined into one search result, making the list of search results shorter

l Merged search results contain multiple event times, all of which have clear indication of the related
search category, for example Motion event tim e 1 and Motion event tim e 2

The multi-category search is available if you are using XProtect Corporate or XProtect
Expert.

Bounding boxes appear both in the search result thumbnails and in the preview area. See also Show or hide
bounding boxes during search on page 236.

Stronger encryption during the export process:

l When you export video data using the XProtect form at, the encryption standard 256-bit AES is used by
default

XProtect Smart Client is now available in Ukrainian. See also Language settings on page 49.

In XProtect Smart Client 2020 R2

Searching:

23 | Overview
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l New search categories: In addition to the existing search categories, now you can also search for alarms,
events, people, vehicles, and video recorded at specific locations. See Searching for video data on page 218

l Search activities in XProtect Smart Client are logged in the Audit log available in XProtect Management
Client

Geographical awareness of search results:

l If you are using smart map, you can view the geographic location of cameras while investigating your
search results. See Locate cameras while searching on page 237

l If a camera is positioned inside a multi-story building, you will see where in the building and on which
floor the camera is located

Remove cameras from your smart map and clear the geographic positioning information stored on the server.
See Remove devices from smart map on page 102

View management: When you send a view to a secondary display or monitor, the primary monitor is highlighted
with a blue border to prevent you from sending the view to the wrong display or monitor.

In XProtect Smart Client 2020 R1

Saving searches:

l When you save a search, the selected cameras and timescope are always included. See Save searches
on page 246

l System administrators can specify per role who can save, edit, and delete searches

l One window for finding and managing saved searches. See Find and open saved searches on page 247
and Edit or delete saved searches on page 249

Desktop notifications for alarms:

l If enabled server-side, desktop notifications appear whenever alarms with certain priority levels occur in
your VMS system

l Clicking a desktop notification takes you directly to the alarm window allowing you to quickly respond to
the alarm. See Responding to alarms on page 258 and FAQ: notifications on page 352

Improved camera indicators:

l The video stream indicators have been improved to more clearly indicate the type or status of a video
stream

l The changed indicators help people with color blindness distinguish between the different indicators

See Camera indicators (explained) on page 189

Help system is linked to the new Milestone documentation portal:

l If your VMS system is online, the help system is linked directly to our new documentation portal. Here you
can access all Milestone software manuals and guides, supported in multiple languages

l If your VMS system is disconnected from the Internet, the help system will open in offline mode

24 | Overview
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l To visit the portal, go to https://doc.milestonesys.com/

Security:

l Only system administrators can enable HTML scripting to prevent or have better control of operators'
access to content that is potentially malicious

Add-on products
Milestone has developed add-on products that fully integrate with XProtect to give you extra functionality. Access
to add-on products are controlled by your software license code (SLC).

XProt ect Sm art Wall (explained)

Available functionality depends on the system you are using. See

https://www.milestonesys.com/solutions/platform/product-index/ for more information.

XProtect Smart Wall is an advanced add-on tool that enables organizations to create video walls that meet their
specific security demands. Smart Wall provides an overview of all the video data in the VMS system and can be
shared between multiple operators.

With Smart Wall, operators can share almost any type of content available in XProtect Smart Client, for example
video, images, text, alarms, and smart maps.

Initially, XProtect Smart Wall is configured by a system administrator in XProtect Management Client. This
includes presets that control the layout of the Smart Wall and how cameras are distributed across the different
monitors. In XProtect Smart Client, operators can change what is being displayed on the Smart Wall by applying
different presets or cameras. Display changes can also be controlled by rules that automatically change the
presets.

With the Smart Wall overview, operators can add specific content or whole views to Smart Wall monitors through
simple drag-and-drop operations.

25 | Overview
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

XProt ect Access (explained)

You can use XProtect Access with access control systems from vendors where a vendor-
specific plug-in for XProtect Access exists.

XProtect Access integrates events from one or more access control systems with the features of the XProtect
video management software. The incidents from an access control system generates events in the XProtect
system.

l On the Live tab, you can monitor access control events in real time from the cameras associated with a
door. In setup mode, you can customize your Access Monitor view items with overlay buttons. In a map
view item you can drag access control units onto the map

l On the Access Control tab, you can view and investigate events, door states, or cardholders. You can
search or filter on events and review any related footage. You can create a report of the events for
exporting

l When a person requests access and if your system is configured for it, a separate notification pops up
with a list of related information next to the camera feed. You can trigger access control commands, such
as locking and unlocking of doors. Available commands depend on your system configuration

XProt ect LPR (explained)

On the LPR tab, you can investigate LPR events from all your LPR cameras, and view the associated video
recordings and license plate recognition data. Keep match lists updated and create reports.

The tab includes an LPR event list, and an LPR camera preview for previewing video associated with individual
LPR events. Below the preview, information about the license plate appears together with details from the
license plate match list it is associated with.

You can filter the event list according to the period, country module, LPR camera, or license plate match list. Use
the Search field to search for a particular license plate number. By default, this list shows LPR events from the
last hour.

You can specify and export a report of relevant events as PDF.

You can make updates to the existing match lists by using the License Plate Match List function.

XProt ect Transact (explained)

XProtect Transact is an add-on to Milestone's IP video surveillance solutions that lets you observe ongoing
transactions and investigating transactions in the past. The transactions are linked with the digital surveillance
video monitoring the transactions, for example to help you prove fraud or provide evidence against a
perpetrator. There is a 1-to-1 relationship between the transaction lines and video images.

26 | Overview
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

The transaction data may originate from different types of transaction sources, typically point of sales (PoS)
systems or automated teller machines (ATM). When selecting a transaction line, a video still frame from each of
the associated cameras is displayed in a preview area that allows you to review the recordings. Below the
preview area, the transaction associated with the selected line is displayed as a receipt.

27 | Overview
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Licensing

XProtect Smart Client licensing

No license is required for installing and using XProtect Smart Client. Registering and activating licenses is done
by your system administrator during installation of the XProtect® VMS system.

Licenses for your add-ons

The XProtect add-ons require additional licenses that must be activated in XProtect Management Client. Most
often, this is a task for your system administrator.

28 | Licensing
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Requirements and considerations

Minimum system requirements

For information about the system requirements for the various components of your system, go to the Milestone
website (https://www.milestonesys.com/systemrequirements/).

View information about your system

To view information about your system, for example the operating system and version of DirectX, and the
devices and drivers installed:

1. Open the Start menu and type dxdiag.

2. Click the dxdiag text to open the DirectX Diagnostic Tool window.

3. On the System tab, view the system information.

Surveillance system differences

Most of the features are available in all versions of the XProtect VMS products, but there are exceptions
depending on what product you are using. For more information, see:

l Key feature overview: https://www.milestonesys.com/solutions/platform/product-index/

l Detailed product comparison chart: https://content.milestonesys.com/media

29 | Requirements and considerations

User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Installation

Install XProtect Smart Client

You must install XProtect Smart Client on your computer before you can use it. You download XProtect Smart
Client from the surveillance system server and install it on your computer.

Milestone recommends that you always use the latest version of the XProtect Smart Client
to ensure that you have access to all the new features and functions included in your
XProtect surveillance system.

1. Open your browser and connect to the management server using the URL or IP address of the server.

2. Enter one of the following:

l Local server (http://localhost/installation)

l IP address of the remote server (http://[IP_address]/installation)

3. On the Welcom e page, click Language and select the language you want to use. The XProtect Sm art
Client setup wizard starts.

4. In the wizard, follow the installation instructions. The wizard suggests an installation path. Normally, you
can use the suggested installation path. However, if you have previously used add-on products, this path
might not be valid anymore.

30 | Installation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Configuration

User rights (explained)

Your user rights are specified centrally by your system administrator and these determine your ability to use
particular XProtect Smart Client features.

Basically, your system administrator can restrict your rights to:

l Access XProtect Smart Client

l Access each of the tabs: Live, Playback, Alarm Manager, and Search

l Setup mode

l Use specific features

l Create views that typically contain video from one or more cameras

l View video from specific cameras

The ability to use features of XProtect Smart Client can vary considerably from user to user.

User rights may even vary depending on the time of day, day of the week, and so on. For example, you may be
able to view video from a particular camera during certain hours Monday-Friday, but not outside these hours.

Setup mode (overview)

In setup mode, you can create views for your devices and other types of content, you can add overlay buttons,
and set the properties for the cameras and other types of devices.

31 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N um ber Description

1 When you enter setup mode, parts of the user interface are highlighted.

Create views and groups for your views. See also Create view groups on page 53 or Create
2
views on page 53.

Add cameras and other types of devices and content to your views. See also Add cameras
3
and other items to views on page 55.

Add overlay buttons to cameras to trigger auxiliary commands. See also Overlay buttons
4
(explained) on page 71.

5 Set the camera properties. See also Camera settings on page 65.

32 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Settings in XProtect Smart Client

The Settings window lets you control which features and elements, for example, language selection, joystick
setup and keyboard shortcut setup, you want to use on each of the tabs.

Open the Settings window from the application toolbar:

Application settings
Application settings let you customize the general behavior and look of your XProtect Smart Client.

If available, the Follow Server column lets you specify that you want your XProtect Smart Client to follow the
recommended settings of the server. Certain settings are server-controlled, in which case, configuration on the
server decides whether you can override the settings.

N am e Description

Specify how the XProtect Smart Client reacts when you maximize it by clicking the
Toggle full screen m ode button in the application toolbar. If you select Maxim ize to
full screen, the XProtect Smart Client will cover any Windows taskbar on your screen
Application when maximized.
m axim ization

Maximization is not the same as full screen viewing.

Specify how the XProtect Smart Client displays camera-related error messages. These
can be displayed as an overlay on top of the camera image or on a black background,
or hidden completely.
Cam era error
m essages If you Hide the camera error messages, there is a risk that the
operator overlooks that the connection to a camera has been
lost.

33 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

Server error Specify how the XProtect Smart Client displays server-related message texts. These
m essages can be displayed as an overlay or hidden completely.

Specify whether to show or hide the green video indicator on the camera title bar.
Lights up when connection to the camera is established.
Default for video
indicator You can override this setting on individual cameras by adjusting
camera properties in setup mode.

Select whether to show or hide the camera title bar. The title bar displays the name of
the camera and the colored indicators signifying events, detected motion, and video
recordings.
Default for
cam era title bar
You can override this setting on individual cameras by adjusting
camera properties for the camera(s) in setup mode.

Show current Specify whether to show or hide the current time and date (of the computer running
tim e in title bar the XProtect Smart Client) in the title bar.

Show in em pty Specify what to show if there are empty positions in views, for example, you can select
view positions a logo or have just a black background displayed.

View grid spacer Specify the thickness of the border between camera positions in views.

Specifying a default quality of video viewed in XProtect Smart

Client is only relevant if you are viewing JPEG streams. If you a
viewing other codecs like H264 or H265 and reduce the quality,
you will increase the bandwith, CPU, and GPU usage when re-
Default im age coding to JPEG.
quality

Note that image quality also affects bandwidth usage. If your XProtect Smart Client is
used over the internet, over a slow network connection, or if for other reasons you
need to limit bandwidth use, image quality can be reduced on the server by selecting
Low or Medium .

34 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

You can override this setting on individual cameras by adjusting

camera properties for the camera(s) in setup mode.

Select a default frame rate for video viewed in the XProtect Smart Client.

Default fram e
rate You can override this setting on individual cameras by adjusting
camera properties for the camera(s) in setup mode.

Specify a default PTZ click mode for your PTZ cameras. Options are click-to-center or
PTZ click m ode virtual joystick. You can override this setting on individual cameras by selecting a
different default PTZ click mode for the camera.

Specify how the XProtect Smart Client opens after you have logged in. Options are full-
Start m ode
screen mode, window mode or your last used mode.

Specify whether the XProtect Smart Client displays a view immediately after you have
logged in. Options are:

Start view l The view you last used

l No view

l You decide after you have logged in

Lets you specify whether you want the mouse pointer to be hidden after a period of
inactivity. You can specify how much time you want to elapse before hiding the mouse
pointer. The default option is after 5 seconds. Options are:

l Never

Hide m ouse l After 5 seconds

pointer
l After 10 seconds

l After 20 seconds

l After 30 seconds

If you move the mouse after a period of inactivity, it is enabled immediately.

Snapshot Specify whether you want the snapshot feature to be available or unavailable. A

35 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

snapshot is an instant capture of a frame of video from a camera at a given time.

Path to
Specify the path indicating where you want your snapshots to be saved to.
snapshots

Specify whether the help should be available or not in XProtect Smart Client. If you
Online help disable the help, nothing happens when you press F1, and the context-sensitive links
and Help buttons are no longer visible.

Specify whether video tutorials about the XProtect products can be accessed when you
Video tutorials
click .

Panes settings
The Panes settings let you specify whether you want a pane to appear on a particular tab.

Some panes may contain functionality which may not be available to you, either because
of your user rights or the surveillance system (see Surveillance system differences on
page 29) you are connected to.

The Mode column displays where the pane is available, the Function column lists the name of the pane, and the
Setting column lets you specify whether you want the pane to be available or unavailable.

If available, the Follow Server column lets you specify that you want your XProtect Smart Client to follow the
recommended settings of the server. Certain settings may already be server-controlled, in which case
configuration on the server decides whether you can override the settings.

Functions settings
The Functions settings let you specify the functions (for example, playback on the Live tab) that you want to
display on a particular XProtect Smart Client tab.

The Mode column displays where the pane is available, the Function column displays the name of the function,
and the Setting column lets you specify whether or not you want the pane to be available.

If available, the Follow Server column lets you specify that you want your XProtect Smart Client to follow the
recommended settings of the server. Certain settings are server-controlled, in which case configuration on the
server decides whether or not you can override the settings.

36 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

Live > Cam era

The ability to play back recorded video from individual cameras on the Live tab.
playback

Live > Overlay The ability to view and use overlay buttons on the Live tab for activating speakers,
buttons events, output, moving PTZ cameras, clearing indicators from cameras, etc.

Select whether you want to add quick or detailed bookmarks from the view position
toolbar or through ready-made overlay buttons on the Live or the Playback tab.
Enabling or disabling this option on the Playback tab will control whether or not the
Live and
corresponding button is enabled on the Search tab.
Playback >
Bookm ark
Depending on your user rights, access to adding bookmarks
from some cameras may be restricted.

The ability to print from the Live and Playback tab. Enabling or disabling this option on
Live and
the Playback tab will control whether or not the corresponding button is enabled on the
Playback > Print
Search tab.

The ability to show bounding boxes on live video on the Live tab or on recorded video
on the Playback tab on all cameras. Bounding boxes are used for, for example,
tracking objects.
Live and
Playback > The bounding box feature is only available if connected to
Bounding boxes certain surveillance systems and to cameras that support
metadata. Depending on your user rights, access to bounding
boxes from some cameras may be restricted.

Playback > The ability to play back recorded video from individual cameras independently on the
Independent Playback tab, where all cameras in a view otherwise by default display recordings from
playback the same point in time (the playback time).

The ability to add new or edit existing overlay buttons in setup mode. To add overlay
Setup > Edit
buttons, the Overlay Buttons list must be set to Available (you manage this on the
overlay buttons
Panes tab in the Settings window).

The ability to edit video buffering is part of the camera properties in setup mode. To
Setup > Edit
edit video buffering, the Setup tab's Properties pane must also be made available (you
video buffering
manage this on the Settings window's Panes tab).

37 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Timeline settings
The Tim eline settings let you specify your general timeline settings.

If available, the Follow Server column lets you specify that you want your XProtect Smart Client to follow the
recommended settings of the server. Certain settings are server-controlled, in which case, configuration on the
server decides whether you can override the settings.

N am e Description

Incom ing audio Select to show or hide incoming audio on the timeline

Outgoing audio Select to show or hide outgoing audio on the timeline.

Additional data Select to show or hide additional data from other sources.

Additional m arkers Select to show or hide additional markers from other sources.

Bookm arks Select whether to show or hide bookmarks on the timeline.

Motion indication Select whether to show or hide motion indication on the timeline.

All cam eras tim eline Select whether to show or hide the timeline for all cameras.

Playback Select whether or not to skip gaps during playback.

Export settings
The Export settings let you specify general export settings.

If available, the Follow Server column lets you specify that you want XProtect Smart Client to follow the
recommended settings of the server. Certain settings may already be server-controlled, in which case,
configuration on the server decides whether you can override the settings.

N am e Description

Export to Select the path you want to export to.

38 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

Select if you want to cover areas with privacy masks in the exported video.

The privacy masks that you add here only apply to the current export and for the selected
Privacy m ask video. The export may already include video with privacy masks configured by your
system administrator. These privacy masks are configured in the Management Client, on
the Privacy m asking tab.

Media player
Select whether or not you can export in media player format.
form at

Media player Select whether you want video texts to be optional, required or unavailable when you
form at - Video export in media player format. With video texts, the user can add overlay text on the
texts exported recordings.

Media player
Select if you want codec configuration to be available or not when you export in media
form at - Video
player format. The codec properties depend on the selected codec. Not all codecs support
codec
this option.
properties

XProtect
Select whether or not you can export in XProtect format.
form at

XProtect
form at - Select whether you want project comments to be optional, required or unavailable when
Project you export in XProtect format.
com m ents

XProtect
form at - Select whether you want device comments to be optional, required or unavailable when
Device you export in XProtect format.
com m ents

Still im age
Select whether or not you can export still images.
export

Smart map settings

Enter the Bing Maps key or Google Maps client ID or key for the Bing Maps API or Google Maps API that you use.

39 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

You can edit these settings only if your administrator has allowed you to in XProtect
Management Client.

N am e Description

Milestone Map Specify whether Milestone Map Service can be used as a geographic background. If
Service you select Unavailable, XProtect Smart Client does not display it as an option.

OpenStreetMap To use a different tile server (see Change OpenStreetMap tile server on page 89)
server than the one specified by your system administrator, enter the server address here.

Create location
Specify whether to create a location when a user adds a custom overlay. For more
when layer is
information, see Adding, deleting, or editing custom overlays on page 92.
added

Enter or edit the private cryptographic key that you generated for the Bing Maps
Bing Maps key
API.

Client ID for Google

Enter or edit the client ID that you generated for the Google Static Maps API.
Maps

Private key for Enter or edit the private cryptographic key that you generated for the Google Static
Google Maps Maps API.

If you are using Google Maps as your geographic

background, files are not cached.
Rem ove cached
sm art m ap files

Smart map saves to the cache folder on your local computer so that it can load
faster. Use this setting to specify how often you want to remove the cached files.

Keyboard settings
Keyboard settings let you assign your own shortcut key combinations to particular actions in the XProtect Smart
Client. The XProtect Smart Client also features a small number of standard keyboard shortcuts (see Keyboard
shortcuts (overview) on page 185), immediately ready for use.

40 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

Press
Enter the key combination you want to use as a shortcut to a particular action.
shortcut key

Select to define how you want to apply the shortcut:

l Global: On all of the XProtect Smart Client tabs

Use new
l Playback m ode: Only on the Playback tab
shortcut in
l Live m ode: Only on the Live tab

l Setup m ode: Only in setup mode

Select a command category and then select one of the associated commands. If you want
all your views listed to allow you to create keyboard shortcuts for individual views, select
the Views.All category.

Categories
Some commands only work when the keyboard shortcut is used in
certain contexts. For example, a keyboard shortcut with a PTZ-
related command will only work when using a PTZ camera.

If relevant, specify a parameter for the command or action. For example, if you want to
specify the window and view position for the Copy the selected cam era view item
Param eter
parameter, enter 2;1 to have the camera copied to the floating window (window 2), in the
first view position (view position 1).

Search settings
The search settings let you customize the behavior of parts of the search functionality, mainly on the Search tab.

N am e Description

Auto-play video By default, when you select a search result, video in the preview area is paused at
clip in preview area the event time. To make it start playing automatically, select Yes.

Loop video clip in By default, when you preview video from a search result, the video clip is played
preview area back only once. To make it loop, select Yes.

41 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Joystick settings

Even though joystick control is supported for a large number of PTZ cameras, not all PTZ
cameras may be joystick-controlled.

When a new joystick is detected by the XProtect Smart Client, a default pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) configuration for the
joystick is added automatically. However, the Joystick settings let you customize the setup for all your XProtect
Smart Client joysticks.

N am e Description

Select joystick Select from the list of available joysticks.

There are three axes:

Axis setup: l X-axis (horizontal)

N am e l Y-axis (vertical)

l Z-axis (the depth or zoom level)

Select to change the default direction the camera moves in when you move the joystick.
Axis setup:
For example, select to move a PTZ camera to the left when you move the joystick to the
Invert
right and move down when you move the joystick towards you.

Axis setup: Select to use a fixed rather than a relative positioning scheme (moving the joystick moves
Absolute the joystick-controlled object based on the object's current position).

Select the function for an axis:

l Camera PTZ Pan

Axis setup:
l Camera PTZ Tilt
Action
l Camera PTZ Zoom

l No action

Test the effect of your selections. When you have selected a function for the axis you want
Axis setup:
to test, move the joystick along the required axis to view the effect, indicated by a
Preview
movement of the blue bar.

42 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

Specify the dead zone for the joystick's pan and tilt functions. The further you drag the
Dead zone slider to the right, the larger the dead zone becomes, and the more you will have to move
setup: the joystick handle before information is sent to the camera. Dragging the slider to the far
Pan/ Tilt left disables the dead zone (only recommended for high-precision joysticks). Use the Axis
setup preview to test the effect of your dead zone settings.

Specify dead zone for the joystick's zoom function. The further you drag the slider to the
right, the larger the dead zone becomes, and the more you will have to move the joystick
Dead zone
handle before information is sent to the camera. Dragging the slider to the far left
setup: Zoom
disables the dead zone (only recommended for high-precision joysticks). Use the Axis
setup preview to test the effect of your dead zone settings.

Button setup:
The name of the button.
N am e

Button setup:
Select one of the available actions for the required joystick button.
Action

If relevant, specify a parameter for the command or action. For example, if you want to
Button setup: specify the window and view position for the Copy the selected cam era view item
Param eter parameter, enter 2;1 to have the camera copied to the floating window (window 2), in the
first view position (view position 1).

Button setup: Verify that you are configuring the right button, press the corresponding button on the
Preview joystick. The relevant button will display in blue in the Preview column.

Access control settings

Select whether or not you want access request notifications to pop up in XProtect Smart Client.

If the Follow Server field is selected, your system administrator controls the setting of
Show Access Control N otifications.

43 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Alarm M anager settings

N am e Description

Start video
playback Start video playback some time before the alarm was triggered. This is useful when, for
second(s) example, you want to see the moments before a door was opened.
before alarm .

Preview the When this check box is selected, the selection in the alarms list will change to the most
m ost recent recent list item when a new alarm is triggered. If the check box is not selected, the
alarm selection in the alarms list will stay unchanged when a new alarm is triggered.

Play sound
Specify whether you want alarms to play sound notifications.
notification

Specify whether you want desktop notifications for alarms to be displayed. They will only
appear when XProtect Smart Client is running.
Show desktop
notifications for
alarm s If the field is grayed out, it is has been locked by your system
administrator in XProtect Management Client.

Use server Select this check box to use the settings specified by your system administrator in
settings XProtect Management Client.

Advanced settings
The Advanced settings let you customize advanced XProtect Smart Client settings. If you are not familiar with
the advanced settings and how they work, just keep their default settings. If you connect to some surveillance
systems (see Surveillance system differences on page 29), you may see Follow Server column. You can use this
column to make XProtect Smart Client follow the recommended settings of the server as set up in the Smart
Client profiles. You may experience that certain settings are already server-controlled, in which case
configuration on the server decides whether or not you are able to override those settings.

44 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

Your system supports multicasting of live streams from recording servers to clients. If
multiple XProtect Smart Client users want to view live video from the same camera,
multicasting helps saving considerable system resources. Multicasting is particularly
useful if you use the Matrix functionality, where multiple clients require live video from
the same camera.
Multicast Multicasting is only possible for live streams, not for recorded video/audio.

Enabled: is the default setting. In the XProtect Management Client, the recording
servers and cameras must also have the functionality enabled to make multicasting
from servers to clients available.

Disabled: multicasting is not available.

Controls if hardware-accelerated decoding is in use. The load on the CPU is high in a

view with many cameras. Hardware acceleration moves some of the CPU load to the
Graphics Processing Unit (GPU). This improves the decoding capability and
performance of the computer. This is useful, mainly if you view multiple H.264/H.265
Hardware
video streams with a high frame rate and a high resolution.
acceleration
Auto is the default setting. It scans the computer for decoding resources and always
enables hardware acceleration if available.

Off disables hardware acceleration. Only the CPU processes the decoding.

Controls how many decoding threads are used to decode video streams. This option
can help you improve performance on multi-core computers in live as well as playback
mode. The exact performance improvement depends on the video stream. This setting
is mainly relevant if using heavily coded high-resolution video streams like
H.264/H.265—for which the performance improvement potential can be significant—
and less relevant if using, for example, JPEG or MPEG-4. Note that multi-threaded
decoding generally is memory-intensive. The ideal setting depends on the type of
Maxim um
computer you use, the number of cameras you need to view, and on their resolution
decoding
and frame rate.
threads
N orm al means that no matter how many cores your computer has, it will only use one
core per camera position.

Auto is the default setting. Auto means that the computer uses as many threads per
camera position as it has cores. However, the maximum number of threads is eight,
and the number of threads actually used may be lower, depending on which codec
(compression/decompression technology) is used.

45 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

Advanced users can manually select the number of threads used, with a maximum of
eight. The number you select represents a maximum; the number of threads actually
used may be lower, depending on the codec (compression/decompression
technology).

This setting affects all camera positions, in all views, in live as

well as playback mode. You cannot specify the setting for
individual camera positions or views. Because this setting may
not be equally ideal for all of your camera positions and views,
we recommend that you monitor the effects and, if required, re-
adjust the setting to achieve the optimum balance between
performance improvement and memory use.

Controls if adaptive streaming is in use. The load on the CPU and the GPU is high in a
view with many cameras. Adaptive streaming enables XProtect Smart Client to
automatically select the live video streams with the best match in resolution to the
streams requested by the view items. This decreases the load on the CPU and the GPU
and thereby improves the decoding capability and performance of the computer.

Disabled is the default setting. No automatic stream selection is done.

Enabled scans the XProtect system configuration for available streams and selects the
best matching ones for the selected view.
Adaptive
stream ing
Even though adaptive streaming can be enabled when only one
stream is available, you must have at least two streams per
camera with different resolutions to take advantage of adaptive
streaming.

This setting affects all views in live mode.

Interlacing determines how an image is refreshed on a screen. The image is refreshed

by first scanning the odd lines in the image, then scanning every even line. This allows
Deinterlacing a faster refresh rate because less information is processed during each scan.
However, interlacing may cause flickering, or the changes in half of the image's lines
may be noticeable. With Deinterlacing, you convert video into a non-interlaced format.

46 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

Most cameras do not produce interlaced video, and this option will not impact quality
or performance of non-interlaced video.

N o filter is the default setting. No deinterlacing is applied, so the characteristic jagged

edges may show up in images if objects are moving. This is because the even and odd
lines of the full image are weaved together to compose the full resolution picture.
However, these are not captured at the same time by the camera, so objects in motion
will not be aligned between the two sets of lines, causing the jagged-edge effect.
Performance impact: None.

Vertical stretch top field: This option only uses the even lines. Each odd line will be
“copied” from the previous (even) line. The effect is that jagged edges do not appear,
but this is at the expense of reduced vertical resolution. Performance impact: Less
expensive than the N o filter option because only half the number of lines will need
post-processing.

Vertical stretch bottom field: This option only uses the odd lines. Each even line will
be “copied” from the following (odd) line. The effect is that jagged edges do not appear,
but this is at the expense of reduced vertical resolution. Performance impact: Less
expensive than the N o filter option because only half the number of lines will need
post-processing.

Content adaptive: This option applies a filter to areas of the image where jagged
edges would otherwise show up. Where no jagged edges are detected, the image is
left untouched. The effect is that jagged edges are removed and full vertical resolution
is preserved in the areas of the image where no jagged edges are perceived.
Performance impact: More expensive than the N o filter option because the total CPU
cost per decoded and rendered frame is increased by around 10%.

View the settings and performance level of the video stream in the selected view. This
is helpful when you must verify settings or diagnose a problem.

Select between these options:

Video Hide: No video diagnostics overlay. Default setting.

diagnostics Level 1: Frames per second, video codec, and video resolution.
overlay
Level 2: Frames per second, video codec, video resolution, multicast, and hardware
acceleration status.

Level 3: Debug level. Mainly for system administrators to troubleshoot or optimize

system performance.

47 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

Select a predefined time zone or a custom time zone. The available options are:

Local: the time zone of the computer running the XProtect Smart Client

Tim e zone Server tim e zone: the time zone of the server
UTC

Custom tim e zone: if you want a particular time zone, select this option and then
select from the list of available time zones in the Custom tim e zone field.

If you have selected Custom in the Tim e zone field, you can select any time zone
Custom tim e known by the computer. This is useful if two users in different time zones need to view
zone an incident—having the same time zone makes it easier to identify and establish that
they are watching the same incident.

PDF report
Select A4 or letter format for your PDF reports. You can create reports of events.
form at

PDF report font Select a font to be used in your PDF reports.

Enable the logging of application events, for example when alarms are triggered. This
is mainly to help technical support troubleshoot issues that may occur in XProtect
Smart Client.

There are three different log files:

l ClientLogger.log

Logging (for l MIPLogger.log

technical
l MetadataLogger.log
support)
The logs are located here on the machine where XProtect Smart Client is installed:

C:\ProgramData\Milestone\XProtect Management Client\Logs.

These logs are different from the System logs in XProtect

Management Client.

48 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Language settings
Specify the language version of your XProtect Smart Client, including whether you want the user interface
elements to be displayed right-to-left. Select from the list of available languages and then restart the XProtect
Smart Client for the change to take effect.

Right-to-left languages (explained)

For some of the languages available in XProtect Smart Client, a visual right-to-left user interface is supported.
The languages are:

l Arabic

l Farsi

l Hebrew

You can change this setting in the Settings window > Language tab. If you set the interface to right-to-left,
buttons, toolbars, and panes are reversed.

Disable the help

To prevent operators from accessing the help function, you can disable the help. Then nothing happens when
you press F1, and the context-sensitive links and Help buttons are no longer visible. If required, you can enable
the help again.

Requirements

The availability of the help can also be controlled server-side by your system administrator. You can only disable
or enable the help if the system administrator has not locked this setting.

Steps:

1. Open the Settings window. It opens on the Application tab.

2. In the Online help list, select Unavailable.

3. Close the dialog.

4. To test that the help has been disabled, press F1. Nothing should happen.

49 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Views (configuration)
In setup mode, you can create views and specify which cameras or other types of content should be included in
each view. To organize your views, you must create at least one view group. This is often done by your system
administrator.

Your ability to edit views and groups depends on your user rights. If you can create the
view or group, you can also edit it.

Views and view groups (explained)

The way video is displayed in XProtect Smart Client is called a view. XProtect Smart Client can handle an
unrestricted number of views, allowing you to switch between video from various groups of cameras. Views can
hold between one and hundred cameras, but can also contain other types of content, for example images and
text.

Views must be contained inside view groups that help you organize your views.

Views are available on the Live and Playback tabs. Views can be private or shared:

l Private views can only be accessed by the user who created them. To make the view private, create it
inside the Private folder

l Shared views allow multiple operators to share the same views. Depending on your XProtect VMS
system:

l There may be a default folder for shared views named Shared or Default group

l Shared views can be shared by all operators, or access to selected shared views can be given to
certain operators. Typically, only a few people in an organization can create and edit shared
views, for example the system administrators

Not all users may have access to all cameras on the XProtect VMS system. Some of the
features you include in your shared view may not be supported in earlier versions of
XProtect Smart Client. Always make sure that the users you want to share with have the
necessary rights and are running the same XProtect Smart Client version as yourself.

Your user settings, including information about your views, are stored centrally on the XProtect VMS server, so
you can use your views on any computer that has XProtect Smart Client installed.

Example of a 2x2 view

50 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

What can views contain?

In setup mode in the System Overview pane, you can see the items that you can add to your views:

51 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Item Description

Allows you to show a list of alarms or an alarm preview. Both items are also available
Alarms
on the Alarm Manager tab.

Access Monitor - with XProtect® Access installed, you can show access monitors in
Access Monitor
your views, for example for a specific door.

Allows you to show video feed from a live camera or video played back. The cameras
Cameras
appear under the site name, which is defined by your system administrator.

Camera Allows you to navigate cameras according to how they are laid out on a map, for
navigators example a floorplan.

Carousels Allows you to shift between cameras at a pace that you define.

Hotspots Allows you to show whatever camera is in focus in a high resolution or frame rate.

HTML pages Allows you to show a webpage, for example an online news channel.

Allows you to show an image, for example if you want to distribute a picture of a
Images
suspect.

LPR With XProtect® LPR installed, you can add LPR cameras to views.

Maps Allows you to show a floor plan or a geographical area.

Matrix Allows you to show a Matrix position. See also Matrix (explained) on page 296.

Allows you to navigate your cameras on a geographical map of the world based on
one of these online map services:

l Bing Maps
Smart maps
l Google Maps

l Milestone Map Service

l OpenStreetMap

Smart Wall If XProtect Smart Wall has been configured by your system administrator, Smart Wall
overviews overviews allow you to control the contents of your video walls.

52 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Item Description

Allows you to show text, for example if you want to provide instructions for other
Text
operators.

Transact If XProtect Transact has been installed in your system, you can add point-of-sales
systems together with cameras.

Create view groups

Your XProtect Smart Client may be preconfigured to display view groups that you can add your views to.
However, you can create your own view groups to help you organize your views.

Example

Imagine that you have cameras installed on ten different levels in a multi-story building. You decide to create a
view group for each level and name them accordingly: Ground floor, First floor, Second floor, and so on.

Steps:

1. In setup mode, in the Views pane, select the Private or Shared top-level folder you want to add a group to.

2. Click Create N ew Group:

A new group is created named N ew Group.

3. Select and click the N ew Group to overwrite the name.

4. You can now create views within this group.

Create views
To view or play back video in XProtect Smart Client, first you must create a view, where you add the cameras you
need.

Requirements

Before creating the view, you need a group that you can add the view to. See also Create view groups on page 53.

Steps:

53 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. In the right corner, click Setup to enter setup mode.

2. In the Views pane, select the group you want to add the view to.

3. Click to create a new view.

4. Select a layout. The layouts are grouped according to their aspect ratio, and according to whether they
are optimized for regular content or content in portrait mode (where the height is greater than the width).

5. Enter a name for the view by overwriting the default N ew View name.

6. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

Copy, rename, or delete views or groups

If you have a view and you want to reuse it, you can copy it. You can also copy a group of views or a private view
to a shared view.

Steps:

1. In setup mode, in the navigation pane, select the view.

2. Click Copy, or press CTRL+C

3. Browse to where you want to copy the view and select Paste, or press CTRL+V

Alternatively, you can select and drag the view to another folder.

4. The copied view is by default named the same as the original followed by (2). To change the name, right-
click and select Renam e

54 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

5. To delete a view, right-click and select Delete

Add cameras and other items to views

Basic steps:

1. Open the view that you want to modify.

2. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

3. In the System Overview pane, drag the required item into a position within the view.

4. Fill out any additional information about the item.

5. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

55 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

For detailed information, see Adding content to views (in detail) on page 56.

Assign shortcut numbers to views

You can assign shortcut numbers to views to let users select views using standard keyboard shortcuts (see
Keyboard shortcuts (overview) on page 185).

1. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

2. In the Views pane, select the view you want to assign a shortcut to.

3. In the Shortcut field, specify a shortcut number, and then press ENTER. The shortcut number appears in
parentheses in front of the view name.

4. Repeat as necessary for other views.

5. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

Adding content to views (in detail)

As described in Add cameras and other items to views on page 55, you can add cameras and other types of
items to your views. This section provides more detailed how-tos:

Add alarms to views

Add alarms to views on page 82

Add cameras to views

To view video from a camera, first you must add the camera to a view.

1. In setup mode, select the view you want to add a camera to.

2. In the Overview pane, expand the required server to view a list of available cameras from that server.

If a server is listed with a red icon, it is unavailable, in which case you will not be
able to view cameras from that server.

3. Select the camera from the list and drag it to a view item inside the view. An image from the camera
appears in the selected view item.

If areas in the video are blurred or grayed out, it is because your system
administrator has covered these areas with privacy masks (see Privacy masking
(explained) on page 265).

56 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. You can specify the camera properties (such as quality, frame rate and more) in the Properties pane. For
more information, see Camera settings on page 65.

5. For each camera you want to add, repeat the steps above.

6. To add multiple cameras to a view, for example all of the cameras from a camera folder, drag the folder
to the view. Make sure a sufficient number of view items are available in the view.

You can easily change which cameras are included in your view by dragging a different
camera to the view item.

Add carousels to views

Add carousels to views on page 76

Add camera navigators to views

Add camera navigators to views on page 74

Add images to views

You can display static images in a view. For example, this is useful when you want to share a snapshot of a
suspect, or a diagram of emergency exits.

Steps:

57 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

58 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

2. In the System Overview pane, drag the Im age item to a view item. A window appears.

59 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

60 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

3. Locate and then select the image file that you want to add.

4. Click Open. The image now appears inside the view item.

5. To make the image available to others who cannot access the location of the image file, on the
Properties pane, click Em bed. The file is stored in the system.

6. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

Add hotspots to views

Add hotspots to views on page 76

Add maps to views

Add maps to views on page 114

Add smart maps to views

Add smart map to views on page 85

Add text to views

You can add text to one or more a view items inside a view. For example, this is useful when you want to send a
message or instructions to operators, or post a work schedule for security personnel. You can use up to 1,000
characters.

Steps:

1. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

2. On the System Overview pane, drag the Text item to the view item, where you want the text to appear. A
window appears.

3. Enter the text.

4. Click Save.

5. To change your text after you save it, in setup mode, click Edit text in the Properties pane.

You can insert tables from products such as Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel, but you
cannot make changes to the tables.

Add web pages to views

You can add web pages to views, for example HTML, PHP, or ASP pages. This is useful, for example, for providing
online instructions or showing company web pages in combination with cameras or other types of content.

61 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Steps:

1. Open the view that you want to modify.

2. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

3. In the System Overview pane, click and drag the HTML Page item to one of the view items. A window
appears.

4. In the Open field, enter the web address of the web page.

To use a web page stored on your local computer, network, or on an FTP server,
make sure that the display mode is set to Com patibility in the properties of the
web page. See Web page properties on page 63. Otherwise, you will get an error
message. See Web pages (troubleshooting) on page 344.

62 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

5. Click OK.

6. To set the properties, expand the Properties pane.

7. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

You cannot navigate the web page in setup mode.

Web p ag e p rop ert ies

N am e Description

Edit Specify a new URL or file location of the web page.

Select the browser engine to render the web page. There are
two options:

l Standard - this setting uses Microsoft Edge. Choose

Standard if the web page is located on a web server,
and the network protocol used is either HTTP or HTTPS

l Com patibility - this setting uses Internet Explorer.

Display Choose Com patibility if the web page:
m ode
l is stored locally

l uses other network protocols than HTTP and

HTTPS

l contains scripts designed to interact with

XProtect Smart Client

l uses an older version of HTML

Select the scaling of the web page. The optimal scaling depends
on the content of the imported web page and how you want to
display it
Scaling
This setting is only available in
Com patibility mode.

Select the check box to hide the navigation toolbar that gets
Hide inserted above each imported web page.
toolbar

63 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Add overlay buttons to views

You can activate speakers, events, output, and more through overlay buttons which appear when you move your
mouse over individual camera positions in views on the Live tab.

You can add as many buttons as needed.

1. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

2. In the Overlay Buttons pane, select and drag the action onto the camera view item.

3. When you release the mouse, the overlay button appears. To resize the button, drag the handles that
appear.

4. To change the text of the overlay button, double-click the text, overwrite it, and then select the check box

to save. To undo, click the cancel button . When you save, the text scales to the largest possible
size on the button.

5. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

Cameras (configuration)
The settings in this section pertain to the Overlay Buttons and Properties panes. To access these panes, click
the Setup button and make sure that the navigation pane on the left-hand side is visible.

64 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Camera settings
In Setup mode, in the Properties pane, you can view and edit properties for the selected camera (the selected
camera is indicated by a bold border in the view).

N am e Description

Displays the name of the selected camera.

Cam era nam e To change the camera, click the ellipsis button to open the Select Cam era window and
select a different camera. This can be useful if you want to change the camera but keep
the settings.

If available, select the live stream that you want to display in the view. If multiple streams
have been set up on the server, you can select either Default or one of the available
Live Stream
stream options. If you select another option than Default, you will not be able to edit
Im age quality or Fram e rate settings.

Specifying image quality of video viewed in XProtect Smart Client is

only relevant if you are viewing JPEG streams. If you a viewing
Im age quality other codecs like H264 or H265 and set the quality to lower than
Full, you will increase the bandwidth, CPU, and GPU usage when
re-encoding to JPEG.

65 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

Determines the quality of video when viewed, but also affects bandwidth usage. If your
XProtect Smart Client is used over the internet, over a slow network connection, or if for
other reasons you need to limit bandwidth use, image quality can be reduced on the
server side by selecting Low or Medium .

When selecting a reduced image quality, images from the selected camera are re-
encoded to a JPEG format on the surveillance system server before being sent to the
XProtect Smart Client. Re-encoding takes place along the following lines:

Full: The default setting, providing the full quality of the original video.

Super high (for m egapixel): Re-encoding to an output width of 640 pixels (VGA) and a
JPEG quality level of 25%.

High: Re-encoding to an output width of 320 pixels (QVGA) and a JPEG quality level of
25%.

Medium : Re-encoding to an output width of 200 pixels and a JPEG quality level of 25%.

Low: Re-encoding to an output width of 160 pixels and a JPEG quality level of 20%.

Height will scale according to the width and the aspect ratio of the original video.

Your image quality selection will apply for live as well as recorded video, and for JPEG as
well as MPEG. For MPEG, however, only keyframes will be re-encoded when viewing live
video, whereas all frames will be re-encoded when viewing recorded video.

While using a reduced image quality helps limit bandwidth use, it will—due to the need for
re-encoding images—use additional resources on the surveillance system server.

You can quickly reduce the bandwidth usage for all cameras in the
view by reducing the image quality for a single camera, then
clicking the Apply To All button.

When you view live or recorded video, you can double-click a particular camera position
in a view to maximize it. When you do this, video from the camera is by default displayed
Keep when in full quality, regardless of your image quality selection.
m axim ized If you want to make sure that the selected image quality also applies when video is
enlarged, select the Keep when m axim ized box, located immediately below the Im age
quality setting.

Fram e rate Select a frame rate for the selected camera. Select between Unrestricted (default),

66 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

Medium , or Low. The combination of the frame rate you select and the way your
surveillance system is set up (see Frame rate effect (explained) on page 70) affects the
quality of your video.

Select a default PTZ click mode for your PTZ cameras. Options are click-to-center or
PTZ click
virtual joystick. You can override this setting on individual cameras by selecting a
m ode
different default PTZ click mode for the camera.

Available only if the selected camera is a fisheye camera. Fisheye technology allows the
creation and viewing of 360º panoramic images. The XProtect Smart Client supports up to
four different viewpoints from a single fisheye camera. The Fisheye split m ode list lets
you select the required split mode:

N o split lets you view a single viewpoint.

Two by two lets you view four different viewpoints at a time.

Fisheye split
m ode When viewed on any of the XProtect Smart Client's tabs, the fisheye camera will appear
as specified, with either one or four viewpoints from the same image.

When you view different viewpoints from a fisheye camera, you

can navigate each viewpoint independently by clicking inside each
viewpoint, or by using the PTZ presets menu on the camera
toolbar.

If selected, video will not be stretched to fit the size of the camera position. Rather, video
will be displayed with the aspect ratio (height/width relationship) with which it has been
recorded.
Maintain
Im age Aspect This may result in horizontal or vertical black bars appearing around the images from
Ratio some cameras.

If check box is cleared, video will be stretched to fit the position in the view; this may lead
to slightly distorted video, but you will avoid any black bars appearing around the video.

If selected, video from the selected camera will only be updated on the XProtect Smart
Client's Live tab when motion is detected. Depending on the motion detection sensitivity
Update on configured for the camera on the surveillance system server this can help reduce CPU
m otion usage significantly.

When video is only updated on motion, users will see the message N o m otion together

67 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

with a still image in the camera's position in the view until motion is detected. The still
image will have a gray overlay, making it easy to identify which cameras have no motion.

When video from the camera is viewed on the Live tab, it is possible to get a simple
sound notification when motion is detected.

Sound notifications only work if video from the camera is actually displayed in your
Sound on XProtect Smart Client. Sound notifications will therefore not work if you minimize the
m otion window containing the camera in question. Likewise, if you maximize a camera in a view
detection so only that camera is displayed, it will not be possible to hear sound notifications
regarding other cameras.

Always off: Do not use sound notifications on detected motion.

Always on: Play a sound notification each time motion is detected on the camera.

This feature is only available in certain XProtect VMS systems. For

information about the features in your system, see Surveillance
system differences on page 29.

Being able to use this feature requires that notifications on events have been configured
on the surveillance system server.

Sound on Sound notifications only work if video from the camera is actually displayed in your
event XProtect Smart Client. Sound notifications will thus not work if you minimize the window
containing the camera in question. Likewise, if you maximize a camera in a view so only
that camera is displayed, it will not be possible to hear sound notifications regarding
other cameras.

When video from the camera is viewed on the Live tab, it is possible to get a simple
sound alert when events related to the selected camera occur.

Always off: Do not use sound alerts when events related to the camera occur.

Always on: Play a sound alert each time an event related to the camera occurs.

Use default display settings: Use default settings, as defined in the Settings window, for
Display showing title bar and video indicator for the selected camera. If you want a non-default
settings behavior for the selected camera, clear the check box and select whether you want title
bar and/or video indicator.

68 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

Show title bar: Displays a title bar at the top of each camera position. The title bar helps
users quickly identify cameras. When displayed on the Live tab, the title bar displays
information about detected motion and events, whether the camera is recording, etc. See
Camera indicators (explained) on page 189.

If you choose not to display the title bar, you will not be able to see
the visual indicators for motion and events. As an alternative, you
can use sound notification.

Show bounding box layer: Displays bounding boxes on individual cameras. Open the
Bounding Box Providers (see Bounding box providers (explained) on page 71) dialog box
to specify the metadata devices to provide data to the camera.

This part of the Properties pane may not be visible. To view it, go to the Settings
window's (see Settings in XProtect Smart Client on page 33) Functions tab, and ensure
that Setup > Edit video buffering is set to Available.

If you require very smooth display of live video, without any jitter, it is possible to build up
a video buffer.

If possible, avoid using video buffering. Video buffering can significantly increase memory
usage for each camera displayed in a view. If you do need to use video buffering, keep
the buffering level as low as possible.

Video When live video is stored in a buffer, it will display smoothly without any jitter, but the
buffering building up of the buffer will lead to a small delay in the display of live video. Such a delay
is often not a problem for the person viewing the video. However, the delay may become
very evident if the camera is a pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) camera, and especially if you use a
joystick to operate the camera.

Being able to control the amount of video buffering lets you decide whether you want to
prioritize smoothly displayed live video (requires buffering and leads to a small delay) or
instant PTZ and joystick operation (requires no buffer, but may—due to the lack of a
buffer—lead to a slight jitter in live video).

To use video buffering, select Use default video buffer, then select the required buffer,
from N one to Maxim um 2 seconds.

The Apply to All button lets you quickly apply the camera settings for the selected
Apply to All
camera to all cameras in the view.

69 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Frame rate effect (explained)

The effect of the frame rate selection can be illustrated as follows:

Effect Unrestricted Medium Low

JPEG Send all frames Send every 4th frame Send every 20th frame

MPEG/H.264/H.265 Send all frames Send key frames only Send key frames only

Example:

If you set the Fram e rate option to Low in your XProtect Smart Client, and your system administrator has
configured the camera to feed JPEG images at a frame rate of 20 frames per second, you will experience an
average of 1 frame per second when viewing video from the camera. If your system administrator then
configures the camera with a feed as low as 4 frames per second, you will experience an average of 0,2 frames
per second when viewing video from the camera.

Bounding boxes (explained)

A bounding box is the rectangular border that encloses, for example, an object in a camera image. In the
XProtect Smart Client, a bounding box displays as a yellow border in video.

70 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

The color may vary depending on how your VMS system is configured.

You can show or hide bounding boxes from individual cameras in Display settings in the camera properties.

If bounding boxes are displayed on your screen, they also appear when you export (see XProtect format settings
on page 208) video in the XProtect format or print (see Printing or creating surveillance reports on page 204) still
images.

Bounding box providers (explained)

Requires that Show bounding box layer is selected. In the dialog box, enable the metadata devices that you
want to provide data for the bounding boxes in videos from this camera. The list of devices is defined by your
system administrator.

Overlay buttons (explained)

You can add overlay buttons to the camera positions in the view to trigger auxiliary commands (commands
defined by the camera). The overlay buttons may vary depending on your surveillance system (see Surveillance
system differences on page 29). Auxiliary commands differ from camera to camera. For more information, see
the documentation for the camera.

Sound notifications (explained)

Your XProtect Smart Client may have been configured to notify you with a sound notification when:

l Motion is detected on one or more specific cameras

l Events (see Events (explained) on page 264) related to one or more specific cameras occur

When you hear a sound notification, special attention may be required. If in doubt about whether or how sound
notifications are used in your organization, contact your system administrator.

You can temporarily mute sound notifications for a specific camera: on the camera toolbar, click More > Sound
N otifications > Mute.

When you minimize the XProtect Smart Client window, sound notification is disabled.

To turn on sound notifications for the camera again, click More > Sound N otifications > Mute again.

The ability to mute sound notifications is not available for hotspots, carousels, or Matrix
(see Matrix) positions.

71 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Audio (configuration)

Audio settings

You can listen to recorded audio independently of the views or cameras that you are
watching. You must specify a time in the Playback tab's navigation feature to determine
what recorded audio to hear.

N am e Description

Select the microphone you want to listen to audio from.

If the Microphones list displays No microphone hardware, your computer does not
Microphones have the required hardware for playing audio from the surveillance system. Typically,
this occurs because your computer does not have an audio card installed. If the list
displays N o m icrophone sources, no microphones attached to cameras are available.

Select to mute either microphones or speakers (muting speakers is only available on

Mute
the Playback tab).

Select the speaker you want to talk through.

If the Speakers list displays N o speaker hardware, your computer does not have the
required hardware for playing audio from the surveillance system. Typically, this occurs
because your computer does not have an audio card installed. If the list displays N o
Speakers
speaker sources, no speakers attached to cameras are available.

If your surveillance system has speakers attached to multiple cameras (and you have
the necessary rights to access them), you can talk through all the speakers
simultaneously by selecting All speakers from the Speakers list.

Talk Click and hold down the mouse button for as long as you want to talk.

The Level Meter indicates the level of your voice. If the level is very low, you may need
to move closer to your microphone or adjust your audio settings in Windows. If the
Level Meter
Level Meter shows no level at all, check that the microphone is connected and correctly
set up.

Lock to selected When you select a camera or view, the corresponding microphone and/or speaker is
audio devices also selected by default. However, if you want audio for a specific camera regardless of

72 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

the ones you are viewing, you can select Lock to selected audio devices.

Exam ple: You need to listen and talk to a crime victim through microphones and
speakers attached to camera A, but you also urgently need to view cameras X, Y and Z,
some of which are displayed in different positions in the view. By selecting Lock to
selected audio devices, you can communicate with the victim on camera A while
viewing the other cameras at the same time.

If your surveillance system contains large numbers of microphones and/or speakers,

the lists from which you select microphones and speakers in the Audio pane can be
very long. To avoid this, you can limit the lists to only contain microphones and
List only devices speakers relevant to your current view by selecting List only devices from current
from current view.
view
In this context, current view also includes any views you have open as floating windows
and on primary and secondary displays (see Multiple windows or displays (explained)
on page 175).

Bookmarks (configuration)

This feature is only available in certain XProtect VMS systems. For information about the
features in your system, see Surveillance system differences on page 29.

Enable detailed bookmarks

To be able to give bookmarks a name and a description and changing the default time span, you must enable
details.

Steps:

73 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Open the Settings window.

2. Select the Functions tab.

3. To enable detailed bookmarks for live video, select Add bookm ark details in the Bookm ark list for the
Live tab.

4. To enable detailed bookmarks for recorded video, select Add bookm ark details in the Bookm ark list for
the Playback tab.

5. Click Close.

Camera navigators (configuration)

Before you can use the camera navigator, you must:

1. Set up a map. See Add maps to views on page 114.

2. Add cameras to the map.

3. Add the camera navigator to a view.

4. (optional) Define the properties for how you want the camera navigator to display the views. See Camera
navigator settings on page 75.

Add camera navigators to views

Camera navigators let you set up a complete overview of an area by adding all cameras that cover the area in a
single view. For example, this is useful if you want to be able to follow someone around a building. As the person
moves, you can switch to the next camera. For more information, see Camera navigator (explained) on page 179.

Steps:

1. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

To get the most out of the camera navigator and to be able to see the camera
views in the pane on the right, select a 1 x 1 view.

2. From the System Overview pane, drag the Cam era N avigator to your view.

3. In the Select Hom e Map and Cam era window, select the map that you want to base your navigation on.

74 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. Click the camera that you want to select as the default camera whenever you open the Cam era
N avigator, and then click OK.

5. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

Camera navigator settings

In the Properties (see Camera settings on page 65) pane, you can specify these settings for the camera
navigator .

N am e Description

Displays the map and default camera that your camera navigator is based on. You can
Hom e m ap
change these settings, by clicking the button to open the Select Hom e Map and
and cam era
Cam era window.

Maxim um Select the maximum number of cameras that you want to include in your main view. Each
cam era camera is shown with a camera icon . You can display an unrestricted number of
indicators cameras.

Select Relative to selected cam era if you want to display the location and orientation of
the cameras as seen from the camera's perspective
Cam era or
indicator Select Relative to m ap if you want the location and orientation of the cameras to always
orientation reflect the layout of the map as seen from above.

The selected camera is always the centered one.

Select the maximum number of cameras that you want to display in your preview pane.
Only the cameras that are visible on the screen will use your system's resources. The
Maxim um maximum number of cameras that you can display is 20.
preview
cam eras The more cameras that you preview, the more of your system
resources they will take up.

Carousels (configuration)
Before you can use the carousel, you must:

1. Add the carousel to a view.

2. Specify the cameras you want to include in the carousel.

75 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Add carousels to views

Carousels let you constantly browse between the cameras of the carousel at a speed you define.

1. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

2. In the System Overview pane, drag the Carousel item to a view item.

3. In the Carousel Setup window:

1. Go to the Cam eras section.

2. Locate and double-click each camera you want to add to the carousel.

4. To define the sequence the cameras appear in the carousel, in the Selected cam eras list, move the
cameras up or down.

5. Enter the number of seconds each camera appears in the carousel. You can specify a value for all
cameras, or for each camera.

6. Click OK to close the Carousel Setup window.

7. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

8. (optional) To change settings for the carousel, in the setup mode, go the Properties pane and click
Carousel Setup.

Carousel settings
In the Properties pane (see Camera settings on page 65), you can specify the settings for the carousel. The Live
Stream , Im age Quality, Fram e Rate, and Maintain im age aspect ratio settings apply to all cameras in the
carousel.

To make the properties appear, you must select the view item and then click Setup.

Hotspots (configuration)
Before you can use the hotspot, you must:

1. Add the hotspot to a view. See Add hotspots to views on page 76.

2. Specify the hotspot settings. See Hotspot settings on page 77.

Add hotspots to views

If your view contains a hotspot, and you click a camera, the video feed from the camera is displayed in a high
resolution in the hotspot view item.

Steps:

76 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

2. In the System Overview pane, click and drag the Hotspot item to the required position in the view. The
position displays a hotspot icon: .

3. Click Setup again to exit the setup mode.

4. (optional) To set the properties for the hotspot, in setup mode, go to the Properties pane.

To save bandwidth, you can specify a low image quality for the other positions in your view
and a high quality for the hotspot.

Hotspot settings
In the Properties (see Camera settings on page 65) pane, you can specify the settings for the hotspot. The Live
Stream , Im age Quality, Fram e Rate, and Maintain Im age Aspect Ratio settings apply to all cameras in the
hotspot.

To make the properties appear, you must select the view item and then click Setup.

PTZ presets (configuration)

Depending on your surveillance system (see Surveillance system differences on page 29), you can create, edit
and delete PTZ presets.

Add PTZ presets

You can define additional PTZ presets:

77 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. In the view, select the relevant PTZ camera that you want to give a new PTZ preset.

2. On the camera toolbar, click the PTZ icon to open the PTZ menu.

3. Click Manage PTZ presets to open the window.

4. Click to add a new preset entry.

5. Select the PTZ preset entry and enter a new name for the PTZ preset.

6. Use the PTZ buttons to navigate to the relevant position and click Update preset to save.

7. Use the arrows to move a PTZ preset up or down in the list. This can be useful if your list contains many
presets.

Edit PTZ presets

You can make changes to existing PTZ presets, such as renaming or changing the preset position:

1. In the view, select the PTZ camera with the PTZ preset you want to modify.

2. On the camera toolbar, click the PTZ icon to open the PTZ menu.

3. Click Manage PTZ presets and in the dialog box, select the PTZ preset.

78 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. To edit the name of the preset, ensure the name of the PTZ preset is highlighted. Click the text and
overwrite the existing name.

5. If the camera is not in the correct position, use the PTZ buttons to navigate to the required position and
then click Update preset to save.

6. Use the up or down arrows to arrange the PTZ presets on the list.

7. Click Close.

Delete PTZ presets

To delete an existing preset, select it and click .

Patrolling profiles (configuration)

Depending on your surveillance system (see Surveillance system differences on page 29), you can create, edit
and delete patrolling profiles.

Add patrolling profile

When you add a patrolling profile, you and other users can see the new patrolling profile in the PTZ menu.

79 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. In the view, select the relevant PTZ camera where you want to add a new patrolling profile.

2. On the camera toolbar, click the PTZ icon to open the PTZ menu.

3. Click Manage patrolling profiles to open the dialog box.

4. Follow the steps below and click OK to close the Manage patrolling profiles window.

5. Click below the Patrolling profiles list to add a new patrolling profile.

6. Enter a name for the profile and press Enter. You can always rename it later.

The new patrolling profile is added to the Patrolling profiles list. You can now specify the positions and
other settings for the patrolling profile.

Delete patrolling profile

To delete an existing profile, select the profile and click .

Edit patrolling profile

Specify positions in a patrolling profile

1. Select the patrolling profile:

2. Click below the Positions list to add a PTZ preset.

PTZ presets are defined by your system administrator, but - depending on user rights - you can define
PTZ presets by clicking the Manage PTZ presets (see PTZ presets (configuration) on page 77) button.

3. In the list, select a PTZ preset.

80 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. Repeat adding presets until you have selected all necessary positions in the patrolling profile:

5. Use the up or down arrows to move a PTZ preset in the list.

The camera uses the PTZ preset at the top of the list as the first stop when it patrols according to the
patrolling profile. The PTZ preset in the second position from the top is the second stop, and so forth.

Specify the time on each position

When patrolling, the PTZ camera by default remains for five seconds on each position specified in the patrolling
profile.

To change the number of seconds:

1. Select the patrolling profile in the Patrolling profiles list.

2. Select the PTZ preset that you want to change the time for in the Positions list:

3. Specify the time in the Tim e on position (sec) field.

4. If required, repeat for other presets.

Specify an end position

You can specify that the camera should move to a specific position when patrolling ends. You do that by selecting
an end position on the patrolling profile.

81 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Select the patrolling profile in the Patrolling profile list.

2. Below On finish, go to, select one of the presets from the drop-down list as the end position.

You can select any of the camera's PTZ presets as the end position, you are not
limited to the presets used in the patrolling profile. You can also choose not to
specify an end position at all, but to keep the default setting: N o end position.

Alarms and events (configuration)

Add alarms to views

By adding the following items to your views, you can share a list of prioritized alarms allowing operators to put
focus on and respond to alarm-related incidents. Typically, you would add both of the following to the same view:

l The Alarm List shows a prioritized list of alarms and has multiple filtering options

l The Alarm Preview lets you preview video from the alarm that is selected in the Alarm List

To perform the following steps, you need a view layout with at least two positions.

Steps:

1. On the Views pane, select the view where you want to add the Alarm List and the Alarm Preview.

2. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

3. On the System Overview pane, expand Alarm s and drag the Alarm List to a view item.

4. Drag the Alarm Preview to a different view item.

5. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

Alarm list settings

In setup mode, you can select whether or not you want to see the alarms or events grouped by servers in a
navigation tree and how many alarms or events you want the list to display at a time. This is also where you
specify whether you want the alarm list to display alarms or events.

82 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

Show
Select to display the navigation tree on the left of the alarm list. The navigation tree lets
navigation
you view alarms or events grouped by server and filter for alarms with different states.
tree

Controls the maximum number of lines to fetch and display in the alarm list. By default,
the alarm list displays up to 100 alarms or events at a time. This provides a good
response time because retrieving and displaying larger numbers of alarms or events can

Max. rows to take time. If there are more than 100 alarms or events, click the following button to view

fetch and retrieve the next 100 alarms:

In the field, you can set the maximum numbers of rows from 1 to 999.

Select whether you want to display a list of alarms or events in the Alarm List.
Data Source The event list does not display system or user-generated events, such as motion
detection or archive failure.

Alarm preview settings

If alarms or events have video associated with them, when you select a particular alarm in the Alarm List, the
alarm preview displays the recorded video from the selected alarm or event. If there are many cameras
associated with an alarm, or if you have selected more than one alarm, the preview displays several previews. If
there is no video associated, the alarm preview will be gray. You can change the alarm preview's properties in
setup mode.

N am e Description

Select to display video from duplicate cameras several times in the alarm preview. The
Show
alarm preview reflects what is selected in the alarm list. Because you can select multiple
duplicate
alarms or events, video from the same camera may appear several times in the alarm
cam eras
preview if some of the selected alarms or events relate to the same camera.

Show event Select to display video (if any) from the camera for which the alarm or event has been set

83 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

up on the surveillance system server.

source
cam eras We do not recommend clearing this field.

Select to display video from related cameras in the alarm preview. You can display
Show
associated video from up to 16 related cameras for a single alarm or event. You cannot
related
determine the number of related cameras in the XProtect Smart Client; the number may
cam eras
vary from alarm to alarm, and is specified as part of the surveillance system configuration.

Only relevant if using the alarm preview together with a plug-in capable of displaying
Show
overlay information, such as lines tracking the paths of moving objects, or similar. This is
overlay
not standard functionality in the XProtect Smart Client.

Smart map (configuration)

Before you can take advantage of the smart map features, you must go through certain configuration tasks in
XProtect Smart Client.

You can only view your smart map if it has been added to a view. See also Add smart map to views on page 85.

For more information, see Smart map (explained) on page 277.

Differences between maps and smart maps (explained)

XProtect Smart Client offers map features that can help you visualize your surveillance system and quickly
respond to incidents.

l Maps - these maps are based on still images that do not contain geographical references. You can add
devices such as cameras, microphones, and recording servers. You can also add alarms, events, and
access controls that let you interact with your surveillance system directly from the map. You must
manually position device and feature elements on the map. For more information, see Maps (explained)
on page 289

84 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l Sm art m ap - this type of map uses a geographic information system to accurately reflect geography in
the real world. This can give you a more exact overview of your cameras in multiple locations. You can
also:

l Use the Bing Maps and the Google Maps services

l Use the Milestone Map Service as geographic backgrounds

l Use the OpenStreetMap map project as geographic backgrounds

l Add computer-aided design (CAD) drawings, shapefiles, and images as overlays

For more information, see Smart map (explained) on page 277

Maps and smart maps are not interchangeable. If you are using maps, you can use the
image file as a smart map, but you must add the devices again. You cannot transfer maps
with devices to a smart map. You can, however, link a smart map to maps. For more
information, see Adding, deleting, or editing links on smart map on page 104.

Add smart map to views

Start using a smart map by adding it to a view. By default, the basic world map is displayed. After you add the
smart map, you can change the geographical background.

Steps:

1. On the Live or Playback tab, select the view that you want to add to the smart map.

2. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

3. Expand the System Overview pane, and then drag the Sm art m ap item to the relevant position within
the view.

4. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

5. Now you can change the geographic background.

Change geographic backgrounds on smart maps

By default, the basic world map displays when you add a smart map to a view. After you have added the smart
map to a view, you can select a different geographic background. Every user who uses the smart map sees the
new background the next time that they display this view.

Requirements

The Bing Maps and Google Maps geographic backgrounds are available only if your system administrator has
made them available in XProtect Management Client.

Steps:

85 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Select the view that contains the smart map.

2. In the toolbar, click Show or hide layers and custom overlays.

3. Under Geographic backgrounds, select the background and the type of detail that you want to display.
For example, if you want to see topographical information, select Terrain. If you want to see roads, select
Road.

Geographic backgrounds (explained)

You can use the following services as the geographic backgrounds of your smart map:

l Bing Maps

l Google Maps

l Milestone Map Service

l OpenStreetMap

After you have selected the geographic background, you then add the devices, for example cameras, and
custom overlays, for example shapefiles. For more information, see Custom overlays (explained) on page 92.

Types of geographic backgrounds (explained)

After you have added a smart map to a view, you can use one of the following geographic backgrounds:

l Basic world m ap - use the standard geographic background provided in XProtect Smart Client. This map is
intended for use as a general reference, and it does not contain features such as country boundaries, cities,
or other details. However, like the other geographic backgrounds, it does contain geo-reference data

l Bing Maps - connect to Bing Maps

l Google Maps - connect to Google Maps

The Bing Maps and Google Maps options require access to the internet, and you
must purchase a key from Microsoft or Google.

l Milestone Map Service - connect to a free map provider. After you enable Milestone Map Service, no
further setup is needed.

See Enable Milestone Map Service

86 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l OpenStreetMap - connect to:

l A commercial tile server of your own choice

l Your own, online or local tile server

See Change OpenStreetMap tile servers

l N one - this option hides the geographic background. Note that the geo-reference data remains there.
See also Layers on smart map (explained) on page 90

By default, Bing Maps and Google Maps display satellite imagery. You can change the imagery, for example to
aerial or terrain, to see different details.

Enable M ilest one M ap Service

Milestone Map Service is an online service with which you can connect to a tile server of Milestone Systems. This
tile server uses a free, commercially available map service.

After you enable Milestone Map Service on your smart map, the smart map uses Milestone Map Service as its
geographic background.

Requirements

If the Milestone Map Service field is grayed out, you don't have the necessary user rights to enable or disable
the service. Contact your system administrator to help you enable the feature in XProtect Management Client.

Milestone Map Service requires internet access.

Steps:

87 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. In the upper right corner, click and then Settings to open the Settings window.

2. In the left section, click Sm art m ap.

3. In the Milestone Map Service field, select Available.

4. Click Close. Next time you load your smart map, it uses Milestone Map Service as the geographic
background.

OpenStreetM ap tile server (explained)

If you use OpenStreetMap as the geographic background for your smart map, you need to specify a tile server.
You can specify a local tile server, for example if your organization has its own maps for areas such as airports
or harbors, or you can use a commercial tile server.

To use a local tile server, you do not need internet access.

The tile server address can be specified in two ways:

88 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l In XProtect Management Client - you set the tile server address on the Smart Client profiles. The server
address applies to all XProtect Smart Client users assigned to the Smart Client profiles

l In XProtect Smart Client - you set the tile server address in the Settings dialog. The server address
applies only to that installation

Change OpenStreetM ap tile server

Requirements

If the tile server specified server-side has been locked for editing, the field is grayed out and you cannot change
the server address. Please contact your system administrator to help you enable the feature in XProtect
Management Client.

Steps:

1. In the upper right corner, click and then Settings to open the Settings window.

2. In the left section, click Sm art m ap.

89 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

3. In the OpenStreetMap server field, do one of the following:

l Enter the server address. If the field is grayed out, it has been locked server-side

l To use the server specified server-side, if any, select the Follow Server check box

4. Click Close. Next time you load your smart map, it will use the OpenStreetMap server that you have
specified.

If no server address is specified, or the server address is invalid, then OpenStreetMap is

not available as a geographic background.

Showing or hiding layers on smart map

You can turn layers on and off on your smart map depending on what you want to see.

Layers on sm art m ap (exp lain ed )

Use layers to filter the information that the smart map displays. There are three types of layers on a smart map:

l System elem ents - include cameras, links, and locations

l Custom overlays - bitmap images, CAD drawings, and shapefiles

l Geographic backgrounds - the basic world map or one of the following services:

l Bing Maps

l Google Maps

l Milestone Map Service

l OpenStreetMap

Bing Maps and Google Maps are available as geographic backgrounds only if your system
administrator has enabled them in XProtect Management Client. For more information,
see Geographic backgrounds (explained) on page 86.

Ord er of layers (exp lain ed )

All system elements of each type are on the same layer. For example, all cameras are on the same layer. If you
hide the camera layer, all cameras are hidden. From top to bottom, layers for system elements are arranged in
the following order: locations, cameras, links, and geographic background. You cannot change this order.

The geographic background is always the lowest layer on a smart map. You can switch between geographic
backgrounds, but you can select only one geographic background at a time.

90 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Custom overlays are added as separate layers, and are stacked in the order in which they were added to the
smart map. You rearrange the order by configuring default settings for the map.

Example

A city planner has a shapefile that shows the city boundaries, and a shapefile that includes all major roads within
the city. The planner can arrange the order of layers so that the roads display on top of the city boundaries. This
gives a general view of where cameras are in the city, and the ability to zoom in to see the name of the street
that a particular camera is on.

Sh ow or h id e layers on sm art m ap

You can show or hide layers on your smart map, including the geographical background. For example, this is
useful when you want to focus on a particular element, or just simplify the content that the smart map is
displaying.

Steps:

1. On the toolbar, click Show or hide layers and custom overlays.

2. To show or hide system elements and custom overlays, select or clear the check boxes.

3. To hide the geographic background, select N one.

Selecting N one hides the geographic background, but the geo-references still apply to the
smart map. For example, if you add a new shapefile that contains spatial reference, the
system still uses the spatial reference to place the file on the map.

Hiding microphones will mute the currently unmuted microphone until you show
microphones again.

Sp ecify d efau lt set t in g s for sm art m ap

After adding a smart map to a view, and you have added the overlays, cameras, and links, you can specify the
default settings for the custom overlays. You can also delete custom overlays to clean up.

Steps:

91 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Click Setup.

2. Click Manage default settings.

3. Do any of the following:

l To show or hide an overlay, select or clear the check box

l To rearrange the order, use the drag handle in front of the overlay to drag it to a new position in
the list. Layers are ordered from top to bottom in the list

l To delete an overlay, hover the pointer over the overlay, and then click Delete

4. Click Save.

Adding, deleting, or editing custom overlays

Cu st om overlays (exp lain ed )

You can add the following types of files as custom overlays on a smart map in XProtect Smart Client:

l Shapefile - can contain geo-spatial vector data, such as points, lines, polygons, and attributes that
represent objects on a map, such as walls, roads, or geographical features like rivers or lakes. For
example, city planning and administration offices often use shapefiles because they scale well when you
zoom in and out, and their file size is often smaller than CAD drawings or bitmap images

l CAD - a computer-aided design (CAD) drawing is useful as an overlay because, like shapefiles, CAD data
can use a coordinate system and spatial reference to provide accurate geographical context. For
example, you can use a detailed ariel map or a road map of a location

l Im age - if you have an image file, such as the floor plan of a building, you can add it as an overlay on the
smart map. You can use the following types of image files: PNG, BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PHG, TIF, and TIFF

To put custom overlays into focus, you can temporarily hide other types of layers. See
Layers on smart map (explained) on page 90.

Cu st om overlays an d locat ion s (exp lain ed )

You can quickly jump to custom overlays that you have added to your smart map as described in Jump to custom
overlays on smart map on page 288. However, in the settings, you can establish a connection between custom
overlays and locations. This means that whenever you add a new custom overlay, XProtect Smart Client creates
a location with the same name as the overlay on the exact same spot on the map. The location of the custom
overlay now becomes available in the Select a location list.

92 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

The overlay and location are not linked. For example, you can delete or rename the location without changing
the overlay, and vice versa.

To turn on this feature, see Add locations to custom overlays (smart map) on page 94.

Ad d cu st om overlay on sm art m ap

Increase the level of detail on your smart map by adding custom overlays. When you add a custom overlay,
XProtect Smart Client creates a location with the same name as the overlay.

Steps:

1. Select the view that contains the smart map, and then click Setup.

2. Click Add a custom overlay:

l If the overlay is geo-referenced, click anywhere on the smart map. XProtect Smart Client uses the
geo-reference information to place the overlay in the correct geographic location. Additionally, the
smart map will center on the overlay at a default zoom level

l If the overlay is not geo-referenced, go to the point on the map where you want to add the
element, and then click the point on the smart map

Before you add an overlay, it's a good idea to zoom in to the place on the
map where you want to put it. This makes it easier to accurately position
the overlay.

3. Enter a name for the overlay.

93 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. Depending on the file type you select:

l Im age - select the image file, and then click OK

l Shapefile - select the SHP file. If you have a PRJfile, XProtect Smart Client will find it, and you can
just click OK. If you do not have a PRJfile, you can reposition the overlay manually after you add it.
You can also apply a color. For example, adding a color can make the shapefile stand out more on
the smart map

l CAD - select the DWG file. If you have a PRJfile, click OK. If you do not have a PRJfile, and you want
to use geo-referencing to position the file on the smart map, enter the spatial reference identifier
(SRID), and then click OK. If you do not have a PRJfile or an SRID, you can reposition the overlay
manually after you add it

For more information about the types of overlays, see Custom overlays
(explained) on page 92.

Ad d locat ion s t o cu st om overlays (sm art m ap )

You can configure XProtect Smart Client to automatically add locations to custom overlays on your smart map.
This allows you to jump to the custom overlays through the Select a location list.

Steps:

1. In the application toolbar, click and then Settings to open the Settings window.

2. Go to the Sm art m ap tab.

3. In the Create location when layer is added list, select Yes.

4. Close the dialog to save the changes.

For more information, see Custom overlays and locations (explained) on page 92.

Delet e cu st om overlay on sm art m ap

1. Select the view that contains the smart map, and then click Setup.

2. In the toolbar, click Manage default settings.

3. Hover the pointer over the custom overlay, and then click Delete.

4. Click Save to delete the custom overlay.

5. Optional: If a location was created for the custom overlay, you might want to delete that as well. For more
information, see Adding, deleting, or editing locations on smart map on page 105.

94 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Make areas in sh ap efiles m ore visib le (sm art m ap )

This topic is relevant only if you are using shapefiles with polygons.

If you want to use a shapefile on your smart map that consists of polygons in close proximity, you may need to
distinguish the individual polygons from each other. You do that by decreasing the opacity of the color you pick
for the shapefile. The borders of the polygons will stand out.

Steps:

1. Follow the steps described in Add custom overlay on smart map on page 93.

2. When selecting the color, drag the Opacity slider to the left until you are ok with the level of
transparency.

3. Click Save.

Ad ju st p osit ion , size, or alig n m en t of cu st om overlay

You can move an overlay to a different place on the map, make it larger or smaller, and rotate it. For example,
this is useful if your overlay is not geo-referenced, or the overlay is geo-referenced but for some reason does
not align exactly with the geographic background.

Steps:

95 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Select the view that contains the smart map, and then click Setup.

2. Right-click the overlay, and select Edit position.

3. To resize or rotate the overlay:

l Click and drag a corner handle

l To rotate the overlay around a specific point, move the pivot point to that place on the map. Then
click and drag a corner handle

4. To move the overlay on the map, click and drag the overlay.

5. To save the change, click Save.

Adding, deleting, or editing devices on smart map

You can add devices to a smart map in their actual positions in your environment. This gives you a good
overview of your surveillance system, and can help you respond to a situation. For example, if you want to follow
a suspect during an ongoing incident, you can click the cameras on the map to view their footage.

After you add a camera to a smart map, you can adjust the field of view for the camera icon so that it reflects the
field of view of the actual camera. This makes it easy to find the camera that is covering a particular area.
Additionally, you can select an icon to represent the camera on the map, which can help you identify the type of
camera on the map.

You can work with the following device types on smart maps:

l Cameras

l Input devices

l Microphones

96 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Ad d d evices t o sm art m ap

If the geo coordinates of the device have been specified in XProtect Management Client by your system
administrator, the device will automatically be positioned on the smart map when you add it. If not, you must
position the device yourself in its exact geographic location.

97 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Select the view that contains the smart map, and then click Setup.

98 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

2. To add a device or a group of devices:

Before you add the device, it's a good idea to zoom in to the location on the map.
This makes it easier to accurately position the device.

l Expand the System Overview pane, find the device or device group, and then drag it to the point
on the smart map where you want to display it. You can drag devices afterward to reposition them

l On the smart map toolbar, select Add a device > select the device type.

l Example: In the case of a camera, select Add a cam era, and then select the camera.

99 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l Drag the device to the smart map

3. To save the change, click Setup to exit setup mode.

100 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Ch an g e field of view an d d irect ion of cam era

Once the camera has been added to the smart map, you can change field of view and direction by adjusting the
camera icon.

If you are zoomed out on the map, you may have to zoom in until the field of view is
displayed.

1. Select the view that contains the smart map that you want to work with.

2. Click Setup to edit the camera icon.

3. Click the camera icon.

4. Use the rotate handle to point the camera in the right direction.

5. To adjust the width, length, and angle of the field of view, click and drag the handles at the front edge of
the field of view.

6. To save your changes, click Setup to exit setup mode.

Select or ch an g e d evice icon

You can choose a device icon that matches the type of device that you are using.

1. Select the view that contains the smart map that you want to work with.

2. Click Setup, and then double-click the device icon on the map.

101 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

3. Click Pick icon, and then select the icon for the device.

4. Click Setup again to save the change.

Sh ow or h id e d evice in form at ion

You can show or hide information about devices on a smart map. This is useful, for example, when you want to
increase or reduce the amount of content on your smart map.

1. Select the view that contains the smart map that you want to work with.

2. Click Show or hide layers and custom overlays.

3. Select or clear the check boxes for the information to show or hide.

List en t o au d io from m icrop h on e on sm art m ap

After you add microphones to a smart map, you can listen to audio from one microphone at a time on the Live
tab.

Steps:

1. On the Live tab, navigate to the place on the smart map where the microphone is placed.

2. Double-click the microphone to mute or unmute it.

Alternatively, right-click the microphone and select Mute m icrophone or Unm ute.

Rem ove d evices from sm art m ap

You can remove devices, for example if devices have been physically removed or were added by mistake. By
removing a device, the positioning information of the device, for example the geo coordinates, are removed
from your VMS system.

Requirements

These user rights must be enabled in XProtect Management Client:

l Editing of smart maps

l Editing of devices

Steps:

102 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Navigate to the device that you want to remove.

2. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

3. To remove a single device, right-click the device and click Rem ove.

Example: In the case of a camera, click Rem ove cam era.

4. To remove several cameras:

1. On the smart map toolbar, click Select m ultiple cam eras.

2. Click and drag to select multiple cameras. Other types of devices, for example input devices, are
not included in the selection.

3. Right-click and select Rem ove cam eras.

103 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

5. To remove several devices that are not cameras:

1. On the smart map, press and hold Ctrl.

2. While holding down Ctrl, click the devices that you want to remove.

3. Right-click one of the selected devices and select Remove.

6. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

You can also delete a single device by selecting it and then pressing DELETE on your
keyboard.

Adding, deleting, or editing links on smart map

Lin ks on sm art m ap (exp lain ed )

You can add links that go to locations on your smart map, or go to the static maps in XProtect Smart Client. This
lets you quickly visit locations, or display another type of map without changing to another view. You cannot link
to another smart map. For more information, see Differences between maps and smart maps (explained) on
page 84.

Links display locations and maps as follows:

l A link to a location displays the location in the current view. To return to a location that you previously

viewed, click Back on the smart map toolbar

l A link to a map displays the map in a floating window. This lets you access both types of maps at the
same time. You can view and interact with the map but you cannot make changes in the floating window,
such as adding cameras

If you color code links, or want to make them more visible on the map, you can specify a
color for the link. By default, links to smart map locations are blue, and links to legacy
maps are red. If you use a different color, it is a good idea to use the same color for each
type of link. For example, this can make it easier to distinguish between links when you
use layers to filter items on the map.

Ad d lin k t o sm art m ap locat ion or m ap

Adding links to your smart map lets you quickly visit locations, or display another type of map without changing
to another view.

Steps:

104 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Select the view that contains the smart map, and then click Setup.

2. Go to the point on the map where you want to add the link.

3. In the map toolbar, click Add a link, and then click the point on the map where you want the link to be.

4. Specify whether you want to link to a smart map location, or a map, and then click Add.

5. Enter a name for the link.

You can display the title of the link on the smart map if you select Icon and text as
the display style. Typically, names indicate where the link takes you.

6. In the Destination field, select the map or location that the link goes to.

7. In the Display style field, specify whether to display the name and link icon, or only the link icon on the map.

8. Optional: Click Color to specify a color for your link.

Ed it or d elet e lin k on sm art m ap

Once you have added a link on your smart map, you can edit or delete it.

Steps:

1. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

2. To edit the link, right-click the link and select Edit link.

3. To delete the link, do one of the following:

l Right-click the link and select Delete link

l Select the link and press DELETE on your keyboard

Adding, deleting, or editing locations on smart map

Locat ion s on sm art m ap (exp lain ed )

You can create locations at the points on the smart map that are of interest to you. For example, you can create
locations for your home office, and satellite offices. Not only do locations give you a full picture of your
environment, they are also useful for navigating the smart map.

105 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Depending on your configuration, when you add a custom overlay, XProtect Smart Client
may add a location with the same name as the overlay. For example, this makes it easier
to go to the overlay on the smart map when you are zoomed out. The overlay and location
are not, however, linked. For example, you can delete or rename the location without
changing the overlay, and vice versa. For more information, see Adding, deleting, or
editing custom overlays on page 92.

Hom e locat ion s for sm art m ap (exp lain ed )

Home locations are specific to the view item they are set in. You can have different home locations in different
view items. If a home location is not specified for a view item, the view item displays the whole world, regardless
of the type of background you are using. This is also the case if you delete the home location.

While you are working with the smart map, you can click Hom e to return to the home location. This is similar
to resetting the smart map in the view. You return to the default settings for the view item, and the system
deletes the history of the locations you visited.

Selecting a new home location affects everyone who uses the view item. If someone else
had set another location as home, you are changing their setting.

Ad d locat ion t o sm art m ap

To keep track of the places that are of interest to you, you can add locations that allow you to quickly navigate to
those places on the smart map.

Steps:

1. Select the view that contains the smart map, and click Setup.

2. If needed, pan and zoom in to the point on the smart map where you want to add the location.

3. In the toolbar, click Add a location, and then click the point on the smart map.

4. Give the location a name, and then add the following optional details:

l Specify a zoom level to apply when someone goes to the location on the smart map

l Select a color for the location icon. Color-coding locations is useful, for example, for distinguishing
between types of locations. This could be based on the function of the location or its type, or
indicate the location's priority

l Optional: Make the location your home location. The smart map centers on this location, and

applies the default zoom level setting for it, when you click Hom e

106 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Ed it or d elet e locat ion on sm art m ap

Once you have added locations on your smart map, you can delete them or edit the settings, for example
deleting the home location.

Steps:

1. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

2. To edit a location, right-click the location and select Edit location.

3. To delete a location, do one of the following:

l Right-click the location and select Delete location

l Select the location and press DELETE on your keyboard

Lin kin g b et w een locat ion s (exp lain ed )

For example, you can create a patrol route by creating a series of links between locations. Create a link at
location A that goes to location B, and a link at location B that goes to location C, and so on. For more
information, see Adding, deleting, or editing links on smart map on page 104.

Adding, deleting, or editing buildings on smart map

Bu ild in g s on sm art m ap (exp lain ed )

Buildings on the smart map are depicted as polygons with four edges. Once added, you can adjust the
dimensions, angles, and size to match the actual shape and position of the building.

If the building is a multistory building, you can start adding levels and add cameras to the individual levels. This
allows you to navigate the cameras inside the building, level by level.

To help you illustrate the interior of a level, you can add custom overlays to levels, for example an image
illustrating a floorplan. For more information, see Add floorplans to levels (smart map) on page 112.

Buildings are automatically given a name, for example Building 4. Milestone recommends that you change the
name. This makes it easier for you to distinguish buildings from one another.

107 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Ad d b u ild in g s t o sm art m ap

Instead of using images or shapefiles to illustrate buildings, you can add an outline of a building. Afterwards, you
can change the dimensions, angles, and size to match the shape and position of the actual building.

Requirements

Smart map editing has been enabled on your Smart Client profile in XProtect Management Client.

Steps:

1. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

2. Navigate to the place on the smart map, where you want to position the building.

3. Click and place the cursor in the relevant position on the smart map.

4. Click again. A rectangle is added to the smart map. If zoomed out, the zoom level automatically
increases.

5. If necessary, use the corner handles to adjust the shape and position of the actual building.

6. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

Ed it b u ild in g s on sm art m ap

Once a building has been added to the smart map, you can change the name of the building, and adjust the
position, the size, dimensions, and angles. You can also add, remove, or reorder levels.

Requirements

Smart map editing has been enabled on your Smart Client profile in XProtect Management Client.

Steps:

108 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Navigate to the building on your smart map. If necessary, zoom in.

2. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

3. Click anywhere inside the building. A blue-ridged border indicates that you can edit the building.

4. To rename the building, go to the top of the right-side pane and click . Change the name and click
. To cancel, press Esc.

5. To adjust the corners, click and drag them to a new position.

6. To add or remove levels, see Add or remove levels from buildings (smart map) on page 110.

7. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

Delet e b u ild in g s on sm art m ap

If a building is no longer needed, you can delete it. Next time someone logs into XProtect Smart Client or reloads,
the building is gone.

Requirements

Smart map editing has been enabled on your Smart Client profile in XProtect Management Client.

Steps:

1. Open the smart map.

2. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

3. Do one of the following:

l Right-click the building and select Delete

l Select the building, and press DELETE on your keyboard

109 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

An alternate way of deleting a building: In the Manage default settings, scroll down
to the Buildings section, hover on the building, click Delete and then Save.

M anaging levels and devices in buildings (smart map)

Devices an d levels in b u ild in g s (exp lain ed )

When you add a device to a building, by default, the device is associated with the default level if one has been
specified. Otherwise, the device is assigned to the first level. However, you can change this and associate the
device with any other level, or several levels at the same time.

More facts:

l If no levels are selected, the device is visible on all levels

l If you add a building on top of a device that is already positioned, by default, the device is associated with
all levels

l If you expand the boundaries of a building so that it covers a device that is already positioned, the device
is associated only with the level that is selected

If you readjust the boundaries of the building so that it no longer covers the device, the
device is no longer associated with the building.

Floorp lan s an d d evices in b u ild in g s (exp lain ed )

To help you visualize the interior of the levels in a building, you can add floorplans as custom overlays. With a
floorplan in place, it is easier to precisely position the device. For more information, see Add floorplans to levels
(smart map) on page 112.

The devices that you position are associated with levels, not custom overlays. If you delete a level inside a
building with devices and a custom overlay, the devices stay in their geographical position, but are no longer
associated with the level. However, the custom overlay is deleted together with the level.

If you reorder a level, both the devices and the custom overlay stay with the level. The devices maintain their
geographical position.

Ad d or rem ove levels from b u ild in g s (sm art m ap )

After adding a building to your smart map, you can add any number of levels. The first level is assigned the
number 1, the next 2, and so forth. Afterwards, you can rename and reorder the individual levels.

Requirements

Smart map editing has been enabled on your Smart Client profile in XProtect Management Client.

110 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Steps:

1. Navigate to the building on your smart map. If necessary, zoom in.

2. Select the building. A pane appears on the right-hand side.

3. Click the Setup button to enter setup mode.

4. Click Add level .

5. To edit the level name:

1. Click the dots and select Renam e.

2. Enter a new name.

6. To delete a level, click the dots and select Delete. Devices on this level stay
in their geographical position, but they are no longer associated with the level.

7. Click Setup to exit setup mode.

Ch an g e ord er of levels in b u ild in g s (sm art m ap )

Requirements

Smart map editing has been enabled on your Smart Client profile in XProtect Management Client.

Steps:

1. Navigate to the building on your smart map. If necessary, zoom in.

2. Select the building. A pane appears on the right-hand side showing you the levels of the building.

3. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

4. Click and drag the dotted area to the correct position. Any associated
devices and custom overlays stay with the level.

5. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

Set d efau lt level for b u ild in g s (sm art m ap )

If a particular level in a building is more relevant than others, for example the ground floor, you can set that level
as the default level. When you open your smart map and go to the building, automatically the default level is
selected.

If you navigate away from the building and back, XProtect Smart Client brings you to the level where you left off.

Requirements

Smart map editing has been enabled on your Smart Client profile in XProtect Management Client.

111 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Steps:

1. Navigate to the building on your smart map. If necessary, zoom in.

2. Select the building. A pane appears on the right-hand side showing you the levels of the building. The
default level is highlighted.

3. Click Setup to enter setup mode. Notice the asterisk . It indicates where the
current default level is.

4. On the level you want to set as the default level, click the dots .

5. Select Set as default.

6. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

Ad d floorp lan s t o levels (sm art m ap )

You can add custom overlays, for example floorplan images, to the levels in your building to help you illustrate
the interior of a level inside a building. As you navigate the levels, automatically the associated floorplans are
displayed.

Requirements

Smart map editing has been enabled on your Smart Client profile in XProtect Management Client.

Steps:

1. Navigate to the building on your smart map. If necessary, zoom in.

2. Select the building. A pane appears on the right-hand side showing you the levels of the building.

3. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

4. Select the level where you want to add the custom overlay.

5. In the upper left corner, click Add a custom overlay, and then click anywhere inside the building
outline. A window appears.

6. Select the type of custom overlay. For more information, see Custom overlays (explained) on page 92.

112 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

7. Select the location on your computer where the file is stored and click Continue. The custom overlay is
displayed as a blue outline.

8. Drag it onto the outline of the building and use the pivot point and corner handles to rotate and reposition
the custom overlay.

9. In the bar at the top, click Save.

10. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

Delet e floorp lan s on levels (sm art m ap )

If a floorplan on a level inside a building has changed, you may need to replace the custom overlay illustrating
the floorplan. Milestone recommends that you delete the old floorplan, before adding a new one.

Requirements

Smart map editing has been enabled on your Smart Client profile in Management Client.

Steps:

1. Navigate to the building on your smart map. If necessary, zoom in.

2. Select the building. A pane appears on the right-hand side showing you the levels of the building.

3. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

4. Select the level where the custom overlay is.

5. Right-click anywhere on the custom overlay and select Delete custom overlay.

6. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

113 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

To edit the position or size of the floorplan, right-click the custom overlay and select Edit
position. Now you can move, rotate, and change the size of the custom overlay.

Ad d d evices t o b u ild in g s (sm art m ap )

After creating a building and adding levels, you can add devices to the building. If a default level has been
specified, the devices are associated with it. Otherwise, the devices are associated with the first level. You can
change this and associate the device with any of the levels in the building.

Requirements

Smart map editing has been enabled on your Smart Client profile in XProtect Management Client.

Steps:

1. Navigate to the building on your smart map. If necessary, zoom in.

2. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

3. To add a device, click its icon.

Example: In the case of a camera, click Add a cam era.

4. Click again on the location where you want to position the device. A dialog appears.

5. Select the device and click OK. For each device that you want to add, repeat steps 3-5.

6. To associate a device with one or more levels, right-click the device and select the required levels.

7. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

If no levels are selected, the device is visible on all levels.

Maps (configuration)

Add maps to views

You can add existing maps to views or create new ones.

1. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

2. In the System Overview pane, drag the Map item to a position in the view. A window appears.

3. Select either Create new m ap or Use existing m ap. A triangle next to a map name indicates that the
map might have one or more sub-maps. Sub-maps and the elements they contain are also added.

114 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. In the N am e field, enter a name for the map. The name will be displayed in the title bar of the position.

If you leave the N am e field blank and click Browse., the N am e field displays the
name of the image file you select.

5. Click Browse to browse for the image file to use as a map.

6. Click Open to select image file.

7. Click OK.

8. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

M ap settings
In setup mode, you can use the Properties pane to adjust a number of settings for individual maps.

N am e Description

Displays the map that forms the basis of the particular map view. The field is read-
Hom e m ap only, but you can change the map by clicking the selection button to open the Map
Setup window.

Change Change the map, but keep the elements on the map in their relative positions to each
Background other.

Renam e Map Edit the name of your map.

The Icon size drop-down list lets you select the size of new elements added to the
Icon size map, ranging from Tiny to Very large. You can re-size icons on the map by pulling the
sizing handles in the corners of the icons.

The N am e check box lets you enable/disable whether names of elements are
Show nam e
displayed when adding new elements.

115 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

If you have added an element to the map and the element

name is not displayed on the map, right-click the required
element and select N am e. If you do not want the element name
displayed, right-click the name and select Delete Text. Icon size
drop-down list lets you select the size of new elements added to
the map, ranging from Tiny to Very large. You can re-size icons
on the map by pulling the sizing handles in the corners of the
icons.

Allow pan &

Select to allow pan and zoom on the map in live mode.
zoom

Select to automatically maximize the map to full screen in Live mode when the
Auto m axim ize
XProtect Smart Client has not been used for the number of seconds defined in
m ap
Tim eout. The maximum number of timeout seconds is 99999.

On m ouse over Select to display a live video preview when you move the mouse over a camera.

Select to define that the preview window looks the same as your other views. Clearing
this check box lets you define the Title bar and Video indicator settings for previews.

Use default Title bar: select to display a title bar with the name of the camera.
display settings
Video indicator: select to display the video indicator (see Camera indicators
(explained) on page 189), which flashes green when the image is updated. You can
only select Video indicator if you have also selected Title bar.

Status Select to graphically display the status of the elements (see Maps (explained) on page
visualization 289) added to a map.

Enable status When selected, you can see status details on cameras and servers in live and playback
details support mode.

Autom atically
Select to automatically change the map in the preview when you select an alarm to
change m ap on
display the map for the camera that the alarm relates to.
alarm

Select to only show camera view zones and PTZ presets when you move your mouse
Only show on over the camera, view zone or preset. This setting is useful if you have several
hover cameras on a map with overlapping view zones or several presets. The default value is
to show view zones and presets.

116 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

M ap toolbox (explained)
The map toolbox consists of a number of tools for configuring the map. Selecting either Cam era, Server,
Microphone, Speaker, Event, or Output opens the Elem ent Selector with a list of cameras, servers,
microphones, speakers, events, and output, allowing you to place these elements on the map.

M aps - the right-click menu (explained)

By right-clicking maps or map elements on the Setup tab, you get access to a shortcut menu.

Change the background of a map

If you need to update the map but want to keep all the information on it, you can just replace the map
background (if you have the necessary map edit rights). This allows you to keep all your cameras, and other
elements in their relative positions on a new map. Select Change m ap background, by right-clicking the map or
in the Properties pane.

Remove the map

Right-click the map in the view, and select Rem ove Map. This will remove the entire map, including added
elements representing cameras, microphones, speakers, etc. The map is only removed from the view. The
image file will still exist on the surveillance system, and can thus be used for creating a new map.

You can also remove a map through the Map Overview.

Add and remove elements from maps

1. In setup mode, right-click the map and select Toolbox.

2. In the toolbox, click the required element icon to open the Elem ent Selector window.

3. You can use the filter to quickly find a required element: enter a search criterion to narrow down the list
of displayed elements to fit your search criterion.

4. Select the element and drag it onto the map.

5. To remove an element, right-click the unwanted element (camera, hot zone, server, event, output,
microphone, or speaker) and select Rem ove [elem ent].

6. To move an element, click and drag it to a new position on the map.

117 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

7. To change the orientation of an element, select it and place your mouse over one of the element's sizing
handles. When the mouse pointer changes appearance to a curved arrow, click and drag the element to
rotate it.

You can use the selector tool from the toolbox to select and move elements on a map, or
to pan the map.

If your map has a color that makes it difficult to see the elements on the map, try creating
a text box and fill it with a color that makes it stand out from the map. Add the required
elements to the map, then drag them into the text box.

Add a hot zone to a map

1. In setup mode, right-click the map and select Toolbox (see Map toolbox (explained) on page 117).

2. In the toolbox, select the Hot zone tool:

118 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

3. Move the mouse pointer onto the map. The mouse pointer now displays the hot zone icon and a small
white cross to indicate that hot zone drawing is enabled.

To draw the hot zone, click the map where you want to start drawing the hot zone. The starting point is
now indicated by a large blue dot—also known as an anchor—on the map:

The hot zone drawing tool makes straight lines only; if you want a rounded hot zone border, you must use
several small straight lines.

4. Click the hot zone starting point to complete drawing the hot zone. The hot zone is now outlined with a
dotted line, indicating that no sub-map has been attached to the hot zone.

You can alter the outline of a hot zone by pulling the hot zone anchors.

5. To attach a sub-map to the hot zone, double-click the dotted hot zone to open the Map Setup window.

You can change the color of the hot zone using the color tool. Using different colors for hot zones helps users
differentiate between adjacent hot zones.

If you are connected to a surveillance system that supports Milestone Federated

Architecture (see Surveillance system differences on page 29), a maximum of 20 hot
zones on a single map can point to maps from other surveillance system servers. There is
no such limit for hot zones pointing to maps belonging on the server to which you are
logged in.

Change the appearance of map elements

1. You can change the color of texts, backgrounds, hot zones, etc. on maps to differentiate map elements
from each other. In setup mode, right-click the map and select Toolbox.

2. Select the element that you want to change.

3. In the toolbox, select the color fill tool . This will open the Color Selection window.

Use the color picker tool to use an existing color from the map.

119 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. Only relevant for text elements: Select whether you want the color change to apply to text or background.

5. Select the color from the color palette—you can see a preview of the selected color in the EXAMPLE box.

6. Click the map element to fill it with the new color.

Adjusting Gradient

Use the Gradient slider to adjust how the element color fades from left to right.

Dragging the slider to the far right will make the element color fade instantly. Dragging the slider to the far left
will make the element color almost not fade at all.

Drag the Gradient slider to the required level, then click the map element to apply color and gradient.

Adjusting Opacity

Use the Opacity slider to adjust the transparency of the color fill.

Dragging the Opacity slider to the far right will make the color completely transparent, while dragging the
Opacity slider to the far left makes the color completely solid.

Drag the Opacity slider to the required level, then click the map element to apply color and opacity.

120 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Advanced Color Change

You can fill map elements with any color you like. Click the Color Selection window's Advanced button to access
the advanced color selection options. Do one of the following:

l Use the color slider to select the main color shade, then drag the color circle to select the required tone.

l Enter the hexadecimal color code in the Hexadecim al notation field.

Edit and rotate labels on a map

All elements on a map have a label, making it easy to identify them.

If you have a great number of elements on a map, it can be difficult to have enough room for all the labels. You
can edit the name of the devices, by selecting the label and then entering a new (shorter) name for the device.

When you rename a label, you are only changing the label on the map, not the name of
the camera or element in the system.

You can also make sure your labels don't overlap by rotating them. To rotate a label on a map:

l Select the label and place your mouse over one of the sizing handles. When the mouse pointer changes
appearance to a curved arrow, click and drag the label to rotate it

Another way to save space on a map is to select only to show view zones and PTZ presets
on hover (see Map settings on page 115).

121 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Add/edit text on a map

You can insert text anywhere on the map, for example, to inform users of maintenance situations.

1. In setup mode, right-click the map and select Toolbox.

2. In the toolbox, select the text tool:

3. In the Font Selection window, edit your text settings.

You can always edit your text settings; click the required text box and select the
text tool from the toolbox, then change the text settings for the selected text box.

4. On the map, click where you want to place the text.

5. Enter your text. Press EN TER on your keyboard to make the text box expand downwards.

You can use the color fill tool to change the text color and background.

You can move the text box around; select the selector tool, grab the text box on the map
and move the text box.

Matrix (configuration)

Add M at rix to views

To be able to send live video to a Matrix-recipient, first you must add the Matrix item to a view. Only from within
the view, can the operator send the video to a Matrix-recipient.

1. In setup mode, in the System Overview pane, drag the Matrix item to the position in the view where you
want to add Matrix content. A blue border appears indicating that the position in the view has Matrix
content.

122 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

2. When you select a Matrix position, you can specify its properties in the Properties pane.

When viewing live or recorded video, you can double-click a Matrix position (or any
other camera position in a view) to maximize it. When maximized, video from
cameras in the Matrix position is displayed in full quality by default, regardless of
your image quality selection. If you want to make sure that the selected image
quality also applies when maximized, select Keep when m axim ized.

3. Repeat for each Matrix position you want to add.

M at rix settings
In setup mode, in the Properties (see Camera settings on page 65) pane, you can specify the settings for Matrix
positions.

N am e Description

Change the ranking of the Matrix position by choosing a different number. You can only
choose a number in the range that corresponds to the number of Matrix positions in your
Window index view. 1 is the primary position in which video from the newest event is always shown, 2
displays video from the previously detected event, 3 displays video from the event
detected before the event in position 2, and so on.

Lets you specify the TCP port and Password for transferring Matrix-triggered video from
XProtect VMS server to the XProtect Smart Client view. This is only available when Matrix
Connection
position 1 is selected; other Matrix positions inherit the connection settings specified for
Settings...
position 1. By default, the TCP port used for Matrix is 12345. Contact your system
administrator about which port number or password to use.

XProtect Smart Wall (configuration)

System administrators define the layout and behavior of a Smart Wall in XProtect Management Client. This
includes:

l General properties, such as the name of the Smart Wall, and whether it displays status text, a title bar, or
a live indicator

l The monitors that the Smart Wall consists of

l Presets that control the layout of the monitors, and possibly also default cameras that the monitors show
video from

123 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l The Smart Wall rights allowing operators to view, operate, add content, or play back content, and when
they are allowed to do so.

l Events that can be combined with rules to trigger system actions, for example displaying an alarm or
other content

What to configure in XProtect Sm art Client?

1. Add Smart Wall overview to views on page 124 - to dynamically control what content is displayed on the
Smart Wall, first you must add the Smart Wall overview to a view. The Smart Wall overview allows you to
drag-and-drop or send cameras and other types of content to the Smart Wall monitors.

2. Change the layout of Smart Wall monitors on page 125 - you can change the preconfigured layout of the
Smart Wall monitors by changing the view layout or applying a different preset to a monitor.

Add Sm art Wall overview to views

Before you can define what content should be displayed on your Smart Wall, first you must add the Smart Wall
overview to one or more views. The overview is a graphical presentation of the Smart Wall.

124 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

2. Select the view where you want to add the Smart Wall overview.

3. In the System Overview pane, drag the Sm art Wall element to the relevant view item.

4. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

5. Now you can start adding cameras and other types of content to your Smart Wall.

Change the layout of Sm art Wall monitors

You can change the view layout of the monitors. This is useful if you need to display additional cameras or other
types of content.

Example

An incident has been recorded on five cameras, and you even have a picture of a suspect. You want to display
the video and picture on the Smart Wall, so the security staff can view the incident and detain the suspect.
Because the current monitors in your Smart Wall are pre-configured to only show 2x2 cameras, you need to
change the view layout to 2x3 to add the fifth camera and the picture.

Change the view layout

125 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. On the Live or Playback tab, open the view that contains your Smart Wall overview.

2. Click the icon for the monitor, select Change View Layout, select the display format, for example 4:3.

3. Select the layout. In this example, select 2x3. Two grayed out view items are added to view layout.

4. Now you add additional content. See Displaying content on Smart Wall on page 301.

Change the preset

126 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

The presets defined by your system administrator are associated with individual monitors. When you change the
preset, all monitors in the Smart Wall associated with the preset are updated.

1. Open the view that contains the Smart Wall overview.

2. In the Select preset list, select the preset that you want to display. The affected monitors in the overview
change.

3. To view the content on the Smart Wall, see View Smart Wall content on page 299.

Other users can change the preset manually, or rules can change it automatically.

XProtect Smart Client – Player (configuration)

M anaging views in XProt ect Sm art Client – Player

You create and manage views by clicking Setup on the XProtect Smart Client – Player toolbar. The panes on the
left-hand side turn yellow.

Project p an e (exp lain ed )

A project in XProtect Smart Client – Player is a collection of files that are created when video is exported in
database format from XProtect Smart Client. Your user settings, including information about your views, are
stored as part of a project.

The Project pane appears when you click Setup. In setup mode, you can:

127 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l Change the name of the project.

l Create or open a project

l Assign passwords to projects - only people with permission can view a video. You can also assign
passwords to devices when you export them. To avoid having to keep track of several database
passwords, you can assign a single password to the overall project. If you do not assign an overall
password and you have databases with passwords added to your project, you will be asked to enter a
password for each database when you open the project. If you assign a password to a project, you cannot
delete it. However, you can change the password or create a new identical project in the Project pane.

View s p an e (exp lain ed )

In the Views pane in XProtect Smart Client – Player, you can add, edit, and delete views. You can also search for
views and cameras.

Overview p an e (exp lain ed )

The Overview pane in XProtect Smart Client – Player displays the cameras, microphones, speakers, webpages,
images, and plug-ins assigned to the project. When you have selected a device, you can delete it and rename it.
You can link speakers and microphones to cameras. Then associated audio is automatically selected when you
view recorded video for a particular camera.

To open a database from an archive or previously exported material, click the button. The Open Database
wizard appears.

When you delete a device, this does not delete the actual database files associated with
the device, it just removes them from the project.

128 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Digital signatures (explained)

This feature is only available in certain XProtect VMS systems. For information about the
features in your system, see Surveillance system differences on page 29.

You can use digital signatures to verify the authenticity of your recorded video. This is useful, for example if you
want to demonstrate that the video has not been tampered with.

There are two stages of verification. You can verify:

l whether the video has been modified after it was recorded. The recording server creates a digital
signature for the recording. Later when you view exported video in XProtect Smart Client – Player, you
can compare the recording signature with the one that was originally created by the recording server.

l whether video that you export in XProtect Smart Client has been modified after it was exported. During
the export process, XProtect Smart Client creates a signature for the export file. Later when you review
the exported evidence in XProtect Smart Client – Player, you can compare the export signature with the
one that was created during the export.

If you find that there is a discrepancy, there is reason to question the reliability of the video evidence.

The original digital signatures are contained in the PublicKey.xm l and Public Key Certificate.xm l files in these
locations:

l XProtect Smart Client - <export destination folder>\ <export nam e>\ Client
Files\ Data\ Mediadata\ <cam era nam e>\ <cam era nam e>\ Export signatures

l XProtect Management Client - C:\ Program Files\ Milestone\ Managem ent

Server\ Tools\ CertificateIssuer

There are two scenarios where digital signatures are excluded during the export process:

l If there are areas with privacy masks, digital signatures for the recording server will be removed in the
export.

l If the data you are exporting is very close to the current date and time, the digital signature for the
recording server might not be included for the whole sequence. In this case, only part of the export will
have digital signatures added.

The export process will complete, but when you verify the signatures, you will see that the digital signatures for
the recording server were removed or partially OK.

XProtect Access (configuration)

Add Access M onitors to views

You start by defining a view item for access control:

129 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. On the Live tab (see Live tab (explained) on page 166), in setup mode, select the view you want to use for
access control monitoring.

2. In the System Overview pane, click Access Monitor and drag it to a view item.

3. In the Access Monitor Settings (see Access Monitor Settings on page 130) dialog box that appears,
specify the settings. Once you have selected a door, you can keep the default settings or change them if
needed.

4. Click OK and the access monitor is added to the view.

When an access control incident occurs that triggers an event, it appears in the right side of the view
item.

Access M onitor Settings

Specify the following settings for access monitors:

N am e Description

Select the door you want to view access control events from. When you select a door, the
Door
remaining settings in the dialog box appear with their current values.

Select the type of access control sources that you want to receive events from. The list
can contain, for example, doors or specific access points for a door. An access point is a
point of entry, including its associated physical devices such as card readers, keypads,
Sources sensors or buttons. A door has typically two access points that control entry and exit
through the door respectively.

The list of sources is configured by your system administrator.

Select the camera from which you want to show video related to this door. By default, the
Cam era system lists the cameras that your system administrator has associated with the
selected door, but you can also select another camera in your system.

Select the type of events you want to receive. You can select events from the event
Events categories defined by your XProtect system administrator or from the list of events
defined in your access control system.

Select the command buttons that you want to have available in the access monitor, for
Com m ands example, lock and unlock doors. The list of commands depends on your system
configuration.

Order Select if you want new events to appear in the top or at the bottom of the event list.

130 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

M odify Access M onitor settings

On the Live tab, you can change the settings of your access monitor:

1. Click Setup and select the view item you want to modify.

2. In the Properties pane, click the Access Monitor Settings button.

3. In the Access Monitor Settings (see Access Monitor Settings on page 130) dialog box that appears,
specify the settings.

4. Click OK to close the dialog box and then Setup to return to live viewing.

Customize your view

With overlay buttons you can customize your interface. You can add overlay command buttons for access control
to a view item from a list of commands configured for the doors or access points.

Examples of usage:

l Have direct access to command buttons in view items other than access monitors

l Place the command buttons directly by a door in the view item

l Add other command buttons than those specified in Access Monitor Settings on page 130

Steps:

1. On the Live tab, click Setup and select the view item you want to modify.

2. In the Overlay Buttons pane, click Access Control.

3. Locate the command you want to add and drag it to your view item.

4. Click Setup to return to live viewing.

The overlay button appears when you drag the mouse over the view item.

M anage cardholder information

If your access control system is set up for it, you can go directly to a web page representation of a cardholder
record and do, for example, user administration or get further information about the cardholder.

Provided that the plug-in supports deep link, the following prerequisites exist for the access control system:

l Must include a web client

l Must support deep links

To manage cardholder information:

131 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. On the Access Control tab, select Cardholders list.

2. Search for a cardholder and select the person from the list.

3. On the right-hand side, below the cardholder information, you can click a link to, for example, a webpage.
Depending on the plug-in, more links may be supported and you may be asked for additional login
credentials.

4. You can edit several functionality, including cardholder information and access rights.

5. Close, in this example, the webpage and return to XProtect Smart Client.

Turn access request notifications on or off

You can turn off access request handling, for example in cases where only one person should handle access
requests.

1. Click and then Settings to open the Settings window.

2. Select Access Control and turn off access request notifications.

If you later need to handle access requests again, turn on access request notifications. You can also change the
options for access control, by clicking the Settings icon from within an access request notification.

If the Follow Server field is selected, your system administrator controls the setting of
Show access request notifications.

XProtect LPR (configuration)

Add LPR cameras to views

1. On the Live tab, in Setup mode, select the view you want to add an LPR camera to.

2. In the System overview pane, click LPR and drag it to the relevant view item.

3. In the Select LPR Cam era dialog box, expand the required server to view a list of available LPR cameras
from that server.

You can specify how you want to display LPR camera events on the Live tab in the Properties pane (see Adjust
LPR view settings on page 132).

Adjust LPR view settings

1. On the Live tab, click Setup.

2. In Properties, next to LPR cam era, click the Browse button to open the Select LPR Cam era dialog box
and select another LPR camera.

132 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

3. Choose the order of LPR events in your lists on the right side of the preview:

l N ewest on top: Display the newest LPR events at the top of the list

l N ewest on bottom : Display the newest LPR events at the bottom of the list

4. If you want to display the list of license plates from one camera but want to view video from another,
select a different camera in the Cam era nam e field.

Enable LPR server status on maps

It is possible to visualize LPR servers on maps and have their current status shown on the maps. To enable the
LPR server status on maps:

1. On the Live tab, click Setup.

2. In Views, select the relevant map.

3. Right-click the map and select Toolbox.

4. In the toolbox, click the Add Plug-In Elem ent icon to open the Elem ent Selector window.

5. Select the relevant LPR server and drag it onto the map.

6. On the map, right-click the LPR server icon and select Status Details to get live status on the LPR server
and the LPR cameras related to the server.

You can associate the LPR specific map with your Alarm list by adding the map on the Alarm Manager tab.

Enable LPR-specific elements

To be able to see all relevant information regarding LPR recognitions in your XProtect Smart Client, on the Alarm
Manager tab, do the following:

133 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. On the Alarm Manager tab, in the Alarm s list, right-click the Im age icon next to the Quick Filters
column. From the menu, select: Object, Tag, and Type.

134 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

2. Now Type displays all events related to LPR, Tag displays their country codes, and Object displays license
plate numbers of the registered vehicles.

XProtect Transact (configuration)

Getting started with XProt ect Transact

Before you start observing and investigating your transactions in XProtect Smart Client, you need to:

1. Verify that your XProtect Transact base license has been activated during installation of the VMS. To do
this, open XProtect Smart Client and check that the Transact tab is visible. Even if you do not have a base
license, you can still use XProtect Transact with a trial license. For more information, see XProtect
Transact trial license on page 136.

2. Verify that transactions are displayed correctly. This includes the individual transaction lines and receipts.
To do this, click the Transact tab and select a transaction source and a time interval. If configured
correctly, a list of transaction lines appear, and if you click a line, the corresponding video still frame is

135 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

displayed, one for each connected camera.

3. Set up a view for transactions, if you want to observe real time transactions on the Live tab or investigate
transactions on the Playback tab. For more information, see Set up views for transactions on page 136.

XProt ect Transact trial license

With an XProtect Transact trial license, you can try out the XProtect Transact functionality for up to 30 days. All
related features are enabled, and you can add one transaction source, for example a cash register. When the 30
days trial period expires, all XProtect Transact features are deactivated, including the Transact workspace and
transaction view items. By purchasing and activating an XProtect Transact base license and the transaction
source licenses you need, you can use XProtect Transact again, and your settings and data are maintained.

If you are using XProtect Express or XProtect Professional, the trial license is a built-in license. The trial license is
activated when the system administrator adds a transaction source in the configuration.

For other products, you need to acquire the trial license from Milestone. The system administrator must activate
the trial license in the configuration.

Set up views for transactions

Before viewing transactions on the Live or Playback tab, you need to set up a view where you include a
transaction view item for each transaction source. In case of ongoing transactions, the receipts roll over the
screen inside the view item when you leave the setup mode.

Steps:

1. On the Live tab or Playback tab, click Setup in the upper right corner to enter the setup mode.

2. Create a new view or select an existing one.

3. Expand the System Overview pane.

136 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. Drag and drop the Transact item into the view item, where you want the transactions and video feed to
be displayed. A pop-up window appears.

5. Select a transaction source, for example a cash register, and click OK. A receipt preview is displayed
inside the view item.

6. Expand Properties and select the Show cam eras check box to add cameras associated with the
transaction source. By default, the first camera added to the transaction source in the configuration is
selected.

7. Use the First cam era and Second cam era drop-down lists to specify which cameras are displayed in the
view item. By default, no second camera is selected. If you do not want a second camera, leave it as is.

137 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

8. If you want to change the position of the cameras, select a value in the Position drop-down list, for
example to the left of the receipt.

For each transaction view item you want to add to the view, repeat steps 4-8.

Adjust settings for transaction view items

Once you have created a view that includes one or more transaction view items, you can:

l Change the cameras selected and their display order. You can select maximum two cameras per
transaction view item, and only cameras associated with the transaction source

l Change how the cameras are positioned in relation to the receipt

l Add (or remove) transaction view items

Steps:

1. On the Live tab or Playback tab, click Setup in the upper right corner to enter the setup mode.

2. Select the view and then the view item you want to adjust.

3. To modify the cameras selected or their position, expand Properties and verify that the Show cam eras
check box has been selected.

4. Use the Position drop-down list to specify how the camera or cameras are displayed in relation to the
receipt, for example below the receipt.

5. Use the First cam era and Second cam era drop-down lists to change which cameras are displayed in the
view item.

6. If you want to add a transaction source to the view, follow steps 3-8 in Set up views for transactions on
page 136.

138 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Scripting

Scripting for log in (explained)

You can use scripting to control parts or all of the login procedure in XProtect Smart Client.

l If using Basic authentication or Windows authentication, you can make the XProtect Smart Client login
window open with a pre-filled server address and user name fields so users only have to enter a
password to log in.

l If using Windows authentication (current user), you can make the XProtect Smart Client connect to the
surveillance system automatically, based on the user's current Windows login.

Scripting the login procedure based on Basic authentication or Windows authentication

requires that you add non-encrypted, sensitive information to an SCS file that you store
locally with the XProtect Smart Client program files:

l Host name

l Username

l Password

Storing non-encrypted information may compromise the security of your system or GDPR
compliance. The information in the SCS file can be read:

l By anyone who can access the file

l In the memory footprint of the XProtect Smart Client application that was started
by the SCS file or a command-line that delivers the username and password

Milestone recommends that you use Windows authentication (current user). If you
must use Basic authentication or Windows authentication, you should limit access to
the SCS file.

Scripting for log in - parameters

You can use these parameters:

ServerAddress

Refers to the URL of the server to which XProtect Smart Client connects.

For these products, this is the URL of the Management server:

139 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l XProtect Corporate

l XProtect Expert

l XProtect Professional+

l XProtect Express+

l XProtect Essential+

For these products, it is the URL of the image server:

XProtect Professional

XProtect Express

The following example shows the XProtect Smart Client login window with http://ourserver in the Server address
field:

Client.exe -ServerAddress="http://ourserver"

The default authentication type is Windows authentication (current user). Unless you change this, using the
AuthenticationType parameter (described in the following section), the login window automatically displays the
current Windows user in the User nam e field.

UserName

Refers to a specific user name.

The following example shows the XProtect Smart Client's login window with http://ourserver in the Server
address field, and Tom m y in the User nam e field:

Client.exe -ServerAddress="http://ourserver" -UserName="Tommy"

This parameter is relevant only for Windows authentication and Basic authentication.
You use the AuthenticationType parameter to control which authentication method to use.

Password

Refers to a specific password.

The following example shows the XProtect Smart Client's login window with http://ourserver in the Server
address field, Tom m y in the User nam e field, and T0m My5Pa55w0rD in the Password field:

Client.exe -ServerAddress="http://ourserver" -UserName="Tommy" -

Password="T0mMy5Pa55w0rD"

140 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

This parameter is relevant only for Windows authentication and Basic authentication.
You use the AuthenticationType parameter to control which authentication method to use.

AuthenticationType

Refers to one of XProtect Smart Client's three possible authentication methods: Windows authentication
(current user) (called WindowsDefault in startup scripts), Windows authentication (called Windows in startup
scripts), or Basic authentication (called Sim ple in the startup scripts).

The following example shows the XProtect Smart Client login window with http://ourserver in the Server address
field, Basic authentication selected in the Authentication field, Tom m y in the User nam e field, and
T0m My5Pa55w0rD (masked by asterisks) in the Password field:

Client.exe -ServerAddress="http://ourserver" -UserName="Tommy" -

Password="T0mMy5Pa55w0rD" -AuthenticationType="Simple"

If you use Windows authentication, the example is:

Client.exe -ServerAddress="http://ourserver" -UserName="Tommy" -

Password="T0mMy5Pa55w0rD" -AuthenticationType="Windows"

If you use Windows authentication (current user), the UserN am e and Password parameters would not be
necessary, and the example looks like this:

Client.exe -ServerAddress="http://ourserver" -AuthenticationType="WindowsDefault"

Script

Refers to a full path to an .scs script (a script type targeted at controlling the XProtect Smart Client).

The following example uses an .scs script to login:

Client.exe -Script=c:\startup.scs

Example of an .scs script for logging in to http://ourserver with the current Windows user:

<ScriptEngine>

<Login>

141 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

<ServerAddress>http://ourserver</ServerAddress>

<AuthenticationType>WindowsDefault</AuthenticationType>

</Login>

</ScriptEngine>

You can use many of the XProtect Smart Client's function calls (see View a list of function calls) to add further
functionality to .scs scripts. In the following example, we have added a line so the .scs script from the previous
example will also minimize the XProtect Smart Client application:

<ScriptEngine>

<Login>

<ServerAddress>http://ourserver</ServerAddress>

<AuthenticationType>WindowsDefault</AuthenticationType>

</Login>

<Script>SCS. Application.Minimize();</Script>

</ScriptEngine>

Format

Valid parameter formats are:

{-,/,--}param{ ,=,:}((".')value(",'))

Examples:

142 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

-UserName Tommy

--UserName Tommy /UserName:"Tommy" /UserName=Tommy -Password 'Tommy'

Scripting HTM L page for navigation

You can use scripting to create HTML pages that let you switch between views. HTML pages can be added to
your views, so they appear together with video from your cameras.

Example: In an HTML page, you can insert a clickable floorplan of a building that allows operators to simply click
a part of the floorplan to instantly switch to a view that displays video from that part of the building.

Requirements

l If your XProtect VMS system supports Smart Client profiles, you must enable HTML scripting on the
required Smart Client profiles in XProtect Management Client.

l If your XProtect VMS system does not support Smart Client profiles, you must enable HTML scripting in
the Client.exe.config file.

In the following, you will see examples of HTML pages for XProtect Smart Client navigation:

l A simple HTML page with buttons

l A more advanced HTML page with a clickable image map

l A check list for system administrators outlining the tasks involved in creating and distributing HTML
pages to XProtect Smart Client operators

Example of an HTML page with button navigation

A very quick solution is to create an HTML page with buttons for navigation. You are able to create a wide variety
of buttons on the HTML page. In this example, we will just create two types of buttons:

143 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l Buttons for switching between the XProtect Sm art Client's views

Required HTML syntax:

<input type="button" value=" Buttontext" onclick="SCS. Views.SelectView

('Viewstatus.Groupname. Viewname');">

Where Viewstatus indicates whether the view is shared or private (if the HTML page is to be distributed
to several users, the view m ust be shared).

Example from a real button:

<input type="button" value="Go to Shared Group1 View2" onclick="SCS.

Views.SelectView('Shared.Group1. View2');">

This button would allow users to go to a view called View2 in a shared group called Group1.

Buttons for switching between tabs: Live and Playback Bear in mind that, depending on their user
rights, some users may not be able to access all tabs.

Required HTML syntax:

Live tab: <input type="button" value="Buttontext" onclick="SCS. Application.ShowLive

();">

Playback tab: <input type="button" value="Buttontext" onclick="SCS.

Application.ShowBrowse();">

For advanced users it is possible to create many other types of buttons using the
approximately 100 different function calls available for the XProtect Smart Client.

In the following we have created two shared groups in the XProtect Smart Client . We have called them Group1
and Group2. Each group contains two views, called View1 and View2.

We have also created an HTML page with buttons allowing users to switch between our four different views as
well as between two of the XProtect Smart Client 's tabs, Live and Playback. When viewed in a browser, our
HTML page looks like this:

144 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

HTML page with buttons for navigating between views and tabs

We have saved the HTML page locally, in this case on the user's C: drive. When the HTML page is to be used for
navigation, saving the HTML page locally is necessary to open it in compatibility mode. See also Web page
properties on page 63.

When saving the HTML page locally, save it at a location to which an unambiguous path can be defined, for
example in a folder on the user's C: drive (example: C:\ myfolder\file.htm). Saving the HTML page on the user's
desktop or in the user's My Docum ents folder will not work properly due to the way Windows constructs the
path to such locations.

We then imported the HTML page into the required XProtect Smart Client views.

Example of an HTML page with image map navigation

You can also create an HTML page with more advanced content, for example, an image map allowing users to
switch between views.

In the following example we have kept the two groups and two views from the previous example. Instead of
using buttons, we have created an HTML page with an image of a floor plan, and created an image map based
on the floor plan. Viewed in a browser, our HTML page looks like this:

145 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

HTML page with image map for navigating between views

For this example, we divided the floor plan into four colored zones, and defined an image map area for each
zone. Users can click a zone to go to the view displaying cameras from that zone.

For instance, the red zone on our image map mirrors the Go to Shared Group2 View2 button from the previous
example. If you click the red zone, you will go to View2 in Group2.

Importing the HTML page

Importing a navigation HTML page into a view is in principle no different from importing any other type of HTML
page into a view in the XProtect Smart Client. See Add web pages to views on page 61.

l The HTML page should be stored locally on the operator's computer

l For the navigation to work properly, you may want to import the HTML page into
several views

System administrator's check list

To create and distribute navigation HTML pages to XProtect Smart Client operators, do the following:

1. Create the required HTML page. The navigation controls in the HTML page must match the views users
see in the XProtect Smart Client. For example, in order for a button leading to View1 to work, a view
called View1 must exist in users' XProtect Smart Client installations. If you intend to distribute the HTML
page to a group of users, the views in which the HTML page will be used should be placed in shared
groups.

146 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

2. Save the HTML page locally on each computer on which it will be used. When saving the HTML page
locally, save it at a location to which an unambiguous path can be defined, for example in a folder on the
user's C: drive (example: C:\ myfolder\file.htm). Saving the HTML page on the user's desktop or in the
user's My Docum ents folder will not work properly due to the way Windows constructs the path to such
locations.

3. Im port the HTML page into the required views in XProtect Smart Client. See Add web pages to views on
page 61.

4. Test that the navigation controls on the imported HTML page work as intended.

For information about troubleshooting, see Web pages (troubleshooting) on page 344.

Simplified mode
The simplified mode provides only the most basic features. You can toggle between simplified and advanced

mode by clicking Toggle sim plified or advanced m ode.

147 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Simplified mode (overview)

View video - view live video, or play back recorded video to investigate an incident. Select a different view to
view video from other cameras or other types of content.For more information, see:

l Topic: Add or edit views in simplified mode on page 149

l Video: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sn1voRJxXEo/

Get a closer look - tap or double-click a video to view it in full-screen mode. Tap or double-click again to exit
the full-screen mode. Scroll to zoom in and out.

Investigate recordings - Play back video forward or backward in time, adjust the time span, or scroll to
quickly browse the recordings. You do this on the Playback tab.For more information, see:

l Topic: Time navigation controls (overview) on page 196

l Video: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ev4LZwLAl4c/

Create docum entation - export a video clip or still image that shows what happened. You do this on the
Playback tab.For more information, see:

l Video: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=r1BIp1PrWJ8/

148 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Add or edit views in simplified mode

You can select or search for existing views or cameras in the Select view list. However, to add or edit views, for
example renaming the view or changing a camera, you need to switch to advanced mode.

Steps:

1. In the toolbar, click and then to switch to advanced mode.

2. Click Setup to enter setup mode.

3. For information about adding a view, see Create views on page 53.

4. For information about editing a or copying a view, see Copy, rename, or delete views or groups on page 54.

5. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

If the button is not available, you cannot switch to advanced mode. In that case,
please contact your system administrator.

149 | Configuration
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Optimization

Enabling hardware acceleration

Hardware acceleration (explained)

Hardware acceleration improves the decoding capability and performance of the computer running XProtect
Smart Client. This is particularly useful when you view multiple video streams with high frame rate and high
resolution.

XProtect Smart Client supports hardware accelerated decoding using Intel® and NVIDIA®
GPUs. Milestone does not recommend the use of Scalable Link Interface (SLI)
configuration of your NVIDIA display adapters.

Check hardware acceleration settings

1. Go to Settings > Advanced > Hardware acceleration.

2. There are two settings for hardware acceleration: Auto and Off.

Select the default setting Auto.

3. Go to Video diagnostics overlay.

4. To make the current status of the stream, including the GPU resource used for hardware acceleration
visible, select Level 2.

This setting applies to all view items. The default setting is Hide.

150 | Optimization
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

The video diagnostics overlay status for Hardware acceleration can be: Intel, N VIDIA or Off.

If the status is Off, continue to examine your computer so you can enable hardware acceleration, if
possible and make sure that all hardware acceleration resources are utilized.

5.
Use the System Monitor to check the current XProtect Smart Client decoding
performance. See Monitor client resources on page 159.

Verify your operating system

Make sure your operating system is Microsoft ® Windows® 8.1, Windows® Server 2012, or newer.

Only non-virtual environments are supported.

NVIDIA hardware acceleration is only supported by 64-bit operating systems.

Check CPU Quick Sync support

To verify that your processor supports Intel Quick Sync Video:

151 | Optimization
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Visit the Intel website (https://ark.intel.com/Search/FeatureFilter?productType=processors/).

2. In the menu, set Processors and Intel Quick Sync Video filter to Yes.

3. Find your CPU in the list.

Examine the Device M anager

Make sure that an Intel or NVIDIA display adapter is present in Windows Device Manager.

152 | Optimization
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

You can connect your displays to any display adapter available. If a more powerful display
adapter is available in your computer, typically NVIDIA or AMD® , connect your displays to
this adapter to use all available GPU resources for hardware accelerated decoding and
rendering.

Not all NVIDIA display adapters supports hardware acceleration. See Check NVIDIA
hardware acceleration support on page 153.

If the Intel display adapter is not present, enable the Intel display adapter in the BIOS. See Enable the Intel
display adapter in the BIOS on page 154.

Check NVIDIA hardware acceleration support

NVIDIA products have different compute capabilities.

Hardware accelerated decoding using NVIDIA GPUs requires compute capability version
6.x (Pascal) or newer.

To find the compute capability version of your NVIDIA product, visit the NVIDIA website
(https://developer.nvidia.com/cuda-gpus/).

153 | Optimization
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Enable the Intel display adapter in the BIOS

If another display adapter card, for example NVIDIA or AMD, is available in your computer, the onboard Intel
display adapter may be disabled, and you must enable it.

The Intel display adapter is located on the motherboard as a part of the CPU. To enable it, look for graphics, CPU
or display settings in the computer BIOS. The vendor's motherboard manual may be helpful to find the relevant
settings.

If changing the settings does not enable the onboard Intel display adapter, you can try to
move the display adapter card to another slot and then connect the display to the
motherboard. In some cases, this can enable the onboard display adapter.

Update the video driver

Make sure that the driver version for all your display adapters are updated to the newest version available from
Intel or NVIDIA.

The Intel driver version provided by the PC vendor can be an older version and may not
support Intel Quick Sync Video.

There are two ways of updating your video driver. Manual download and install or using a driver update utility.

I ntel

Manual download and install:

1. Go to the Intel download website (https://downloadcenter.intel.com/).

2. Enter the name of your integrated display adapter.

3. Manually download and install the driver.

For automatic detection and updates of Intel components and drivers:

1. Download Intel Driver and Support Assistant (https://www.intel.com/p/en_us/support/detect/).

2. Run the assistant to auto search for the drivers.

3. Choose to update the driver for Graphics.

N VI DI A

Option 1: Manually find drivers for my NVIDIA products.

154 | Optimization
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Go to the NVIDIA download drivers website (https://www.nvidia.com/Download/index.aspx/).

2. Enter the name of your product and the operating system.

3. Manually download and install the driver.

Option 2: Automatically find drivers for my NVIDIA products.

1. Go to the NVIDIA download drivers website (https://www.nvidia.com/Download/index.aspx/).

2. Click GRAPHICS DRIVERS.

3. Your system is scanned.

4. Download and update the driver.

Check memory modules configuration

If your system supports more than one memory channel, you can increase the system performance by making
sure that a minimum of two channels have a memory module inserted in the correct DIMM slot. Refer to the
motherboard manual to find the correct DIMM slots.

Example:

A system with two memory channels and a total of 8 GB of memory obtains the best performance using a 2 x 4
GB memory module configuration.

If you use a 1 x 8 GB memory module configuration, you only use one of the memory channels.

Enabling adaptive streaming

Adaptive streaming (explained)

Adaptive streaming improves the decoding capability and performance of the computer running XProtect Smart
Client. This is useful when you view multiple live video streams in the same view.

To take advantage of adaptive streaming, your cameras must have multiple streams defined with different
resolutions. This enables XProtect Smart Client to automatically select the closest match to the resolution
requested by the view item. Now XProtect Smart Client does not have to scale down the default streams with an
unnecessary high resolution. This reduces the load on the CPU and GPU decoding resources.

To ensure the video quality the closest match is defined as equal or higher than the resolution requested by the
view item if possible. This is to avoid the upscaling of the streams. The table below shows the video streams that
adaptive streaming selects based on view item requests from XProtect Smart Client.

155 | Optimization
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Resolution requested by a view item Closest m atch of available video stream s

636 x 477 Video stream 1 640 x 480 (VGA)

644 x 483 Video stream 2 1280 x 720 (WXGA-H)

1920 x 1080 Video stream 3 1920 x 1080 (FHD)

1920 x 1440 Video stream 4 3840 x 2160 (4K UHD-1)

When zooming, the live video stream requested is always the one with the highest
resolution.

Bandwidth usage is often reduced when the resolution of the requested streams are
reduced. Bandwidth usage also depends on other settings in the configurations of the
defined streams.

156 | Optimization
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Check adaptive streaming settings

1. Go to Settings > Advanced > Adaptive stream ing.

2. There are two settings for adaptive streaming: Disabled and Enabled.

Select Enabled.

3. Go to Video diagnostics overlay.

4. To make the current video resolution of the stream visible, select Level 2.

This setting applies to all view items. The default setting is Hide.

5. The video diagnostics overlay should now be Enabled.

Try to resize the view window from small to large, large to small and check if the Video resolution value
changes.

If the value doesn't change, continue to examine your available live video streams from your cameras so
you can enable adaptive streaming, if possible.

157 | Optimization
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Check available live video streams

To take advantage of adaptive streaming, two or more live video streams with different resolutions must be
configured in your camera settings.

The only supported video resolution format for adaptive streaming is width x height.
Video resolution formats presented from a camera as 720p, mode2, VGA or a like are not
supported.

Not all cameras support multi-streaming.

Multi-streaming allows multiple streams per device to be configured on the server. If multiple streams are
configured and adaptive streaming is enabled, you can select Adaptive stream ing or one of the other available
streams.

To make sure that Adaptive stream ing is configured in a view:

1. Click Setup to configure the view.

2. In Properties, click the Live Stream dropdown list, and the list of available live video streams appears.

3. Check if two or more live video streams are available and select Adaptive stream ing.

If only one live video stream is available, add more live video streams for the
camera in XProtect Management Client.

4. Click Setup to close the view configuration.

To make sure that Adaptive stream ing is selected in a Live view item:

158 | Optimization
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Click the More dropdown list.

2. Select Live Stream , and the list of available live video streams appears.

3. Check if two or more live video streams are available and select Adaptive stream ing.

Monitor your system

The System Monitor tab gives you an overview of the current status of your servers, connected devices, and the
computer running XProtect Smart Client.

For more information, see System Monitor tab (explained) on page 167.

M onitor client resources

The number of cameras in a view together with the resolution, frame rate, and codec results in a load on your PC
running XProtect Smart Client. To observe the current load on CPU, RAM, and NVIDIA GPU resources:

1. Click and drag the System Monitor tab to undock it to a separate window.

2. Select This com puter.

3. To monitor the load of the current view, select the Live or Playback tab.

If your client PC has additional NVIDIA display adapters installed, the load on these GPU's
are also visible.

159 | Optimization
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

If the load is too high, you can add GPU resources to your PC by installing multiple NVIDIA
display adapters. Milestone does not recommend the use of Scalable Link Interface (SLI)
configuration of your NVIDIA display adapters.

System M onitor tab with M ilest one Federat ed Archit ect ure (explained)
If you run Milestone Federated Architecture™, the System Monitor tab is divided into two parts:

l One pane displays a hierarchical tree-structure representing your federated architecture

l The other pane is a browser-based area with relevant system data for the selected server

Click any server in the site pane to see its system data.

If you move away from the tab or log out of the system and come back, the System Monitor tab remembers
which server is selected in your federated architecture and continues to display system data from this server.

You can drag the System Monitor tab to an independent window to monitor multiple servers.

160 | Optimization
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Operation

Logging in

Log in and out

1. Start XProtect Smart Client. The login window appears.

2. Specify the name or address of the server that you want to connect to.

161 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

3. Select one of these authentication methods:

l Windows authentication (current user) - select this option to log in with your current Windows
user credentials

l Windows authentication - select this option to log in with Windows user credentials that are
different from your currently used Windows user credentials

l Basic authentication - select this option to log in as a basic user. Basic users are defined by your
system administrator in XProtect Management Client

4. Click Connect. If a problem occurs during login, you may receive an error message. See also Logging in
(troubleshooting) on page 339.

5. Depending on the configuration, you may be asked to restore the views used in the previous session:

l Main view - this option restores the view that you used last time in the main window

l Detached views - this option restores the view that you used last time in a floating window. Only
available when connecting to specific XProtect VMS systems. See also Surveillance system
differences on page 29

6. To log out of XProtect Smart Client, simply click the Log out button in the title bar.

If you encounter a second dialog during login, you need additional login authorization to
get access to XProtect Smart Client.

Login authorization (explained)

When you log into the XProtect Smart Client, you may be asked for additional authorization of your login. You
need your supervisor, system administrator or someone else who has the rights to authorize you to enter their
credentials along with yours in the login window. After that, you are good to go.

If you do not know who can authorize you, please ask your system administrator.

Logging into access control systems (explained)

When you log into XProtect Smart Client, you may be asked for additional login credentials for the access control
systems, if they are configured to do so.

Your login controls the parts of an access control integration, for example doors, that you can manage and
operate.

If you do not know your login credentials for an access control system, please ask your system administrator.

The system remembers your login credentials, so you only need to fill out your credentials the first time you log
in or if the login has failed.

162 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Change password in XProt ect Sm art Client

If you log in using as a basic user (Basic authentication), you can change your password. If you choose a
different authentication method, only your system administrator can change your password. Changing your
password often increases the security of your XProtect VMS system.

Requirements

The version of your XProtect VMS system must be version 2021 R1 or later.

Steps:

163 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Start XProtect Smart Client. The login window is displayed.

2. Specify your login information. In the Authentication list, select Basic authentication. A link with the text
Change password appears.

3. Click the link. A browser window opens.

4. Follow the instructions in the window and save your changes.

5. Log in to XProtect Smart Client using your new password.

Allow connections that use an older security model (HTTP)

If the XProtect VMS server that you are trying to log in to does not have a certificate installed, then you cannot
connect with an HTTPS network protocol, the newest available security model in XProtect. In such cases, you are
prompted to allow connections with an older security model (HTTP).

164 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

If you select the Rem em ber m y choice. Do not show this m essage again check box, HTTP connections are
always allowed in the future. See also Clear setting that allows connections on page 165.

Clear setting that allows connections

You can clear the setting that allows you to log in to an XProtect VMS server using a network protocol with a
connection that use an older security model (HTTP). The next time that you log in, you are then prompted to
allow HTTP connections.

The setting only applies to your user account and the machine that you are currently
working on.

Requirements

During the login process, you have allowed HTTP connections and selected the Rem em ber m y choice. Do not
show this m essage again check box. See also Allow connections that use an older security model (HTTP) on
page 164.

Steps:

1. In the upper-right corner, click the Status button. A window appears.

2. Select the Login Inform ation tab.

3. Click the Clear button.

4. Click OK to close the window. Next time you try to log in, you are prompted to allow HTTP connections.

Workspaces in XProtect Smart Client

XProtect Smart Client comes with a set of dedicated tabs allowing you to perform your daily surveillance tasks.
Some of these tabs are standard and others require XProtect add-ons.

Finally, some tabs may be custom-made through the MIP SDK and specific to your XProtect VMS system.
Functionality that depends on MIP SDK is not documented in the current manual.

Standard tabs (overview)

l The Live tab for viewing live video. See also Live tab (explained) on page 166

l The Playback tab for viewing recorded video. See also Playback tab (explained) on page 166

l The Search tab for making advanced searches for video and metadata. See also Search tab (explained)
on page 167

l The Alarm Manager tab for investigating and managing alarms. See also (see Alarm Manager tab

165 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

(explained) on page 167

l The System Monitor tab for viewing system information. See also (see System Monitor tab (explained)
on page 167

If some of the tabs are unavailable, it is because you do not have the rights required to
access all these tabs.

Add-on tabs (overview)

l The Access Control tab for controlling your access control system and associated cameras. See also
Access Control tab (explained) on page 168

l The LPR tab for identifying vehicles by their license plates, and investigating LPR related events. See also
LPR tab (explained) on page 168

l The Transact tab for monitoring and investigating transactional data in combination with the associated
video streams. See also Transact tab (explained) on page 169

These tabs are visible only if you have acquired licenses for:

l XProtect Transact

l XProtect LPR

l XProtect Access

All tabs (in detail)

Live t ab (exp lain ed )

On the Live tab, you can view live video feeds, and work with audio, carousels, hotspots, Matrix, smart map, pan-
tilt-zoom (PTZ) control, digital zoom, independent playback, and more.

Here, you can also enter setup mode, where you can set up views for your cameras and other types of content.

Playb ack t ab (exp lain ed )

On the Playback tab, you can investigate recorded video by playing it back, start search from any camera or
view, and then document what you find by exporting evidence. To protect the evidence from being deleted from
the database, you can also add evidence locks to recorded video.

The timeline gives you advanced features for browsing recorded video and jumping to a specific date and time.

You can also:

166 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l Listen to audio when connected to selected Milestone surveillance systems

l If your XProtect VMS supports smart map, you can get access to the cameras in your system in a
geographical interface, which is easy to navigate

l Use hotspots, digital zoom, or carousels, navigate fisheye lens images, print images, and more

Search t ab (exp lain ed )

On the Search tab, you can search across the different types of data available in your VMS system. This includes:

l Video recordings in general

l Recordings with motion

l Recordings with motion in selected areas

l Bookmarks

l People

l Vehicles

l Video recordings with alarms

l Video recordings with events

For each search category, you can apply filters to refine your search.

From the search results, multiple actions are available. For more information, see Actions available from search
results (overview) on page 230.

Alarm Man ag er t ab (exp lain ed )

On the Alarm Manager tab, you can view and respond to incidents or technical problems that have triggered an
alarm. The tab displays an alarm list, an alarm preview, and a smart map or map if one is available.

Syst em Mon it or t ab (exp lain ed )

On the System Monitor tab, you can get a visual overview of the current state of your system servers, cameras,
other devices, and the computer running XProtect Smart Client.

By default, the tiles represent Recording servers, All servers, Failover servers, and All cam eras. Your system
administrator specifies the tiles and the threshold value for each state.

Here is a description of the colors used:

l Green: N orm al state. Everything is running normally

l Yellow: Warning state. At least one monitoring parameter is above the defined value for the N orm al
state

l Red: Critical state. At least one monitoring parameter is above the defined value for the N orm al and
Warning state

167 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

If a tile changes color and you want to identify the server or parameter that caused the change, click the tile. This
opens an overview in the bottom of the screen. Click the Details button for information about why the state
changed.

If a tile displays a warning sign, a data collector for one of your monitored servers or
cameras may not be running. If you place your mouse above the tile, the system shows
you when it last collected data for the relevant tile.

Access Con t rol t ab (exp lain ed )

On the Access Control tab, you can investigate access control events with search and filtering, and view the
associated video recordings and access control data. You can also monitor door states, investigate cardholders
and create reports.

You can drag the Access Control tab to its own separate floating window, while you keep the main window in the
background to watch multiple views simultaneously. You can also sort columns and drag the columns to different
positions.

You can search for, filter, sort, and review data related to:

l Events: Logs the events with a time stamp, event type, the associated door or access control unit, and
cardholder name if available. If your XProtect VMS system integrates with multiple access control
systems, the list displays from which access control system the event was triggered

l Doors: Lists the doors, access points and other access control units in each access control system, and
their current state

l Cardholders: Lists the cardholders in each access control system and their details

Depending on your access control system, you may be able to connect to the access
control system applications via the Access Control Adm inistration button in the top right
corner to, for example, specify access rights or manage cardholders.

LPR t ab (exp lain ed )

On the LPR tab, you can investigate LPR events from all your LPR cameras, and view the associated video
recordings and license plate recognition data. Keep match lists updated and create reports.

The tab includes an LPR event list, and an LPR camera preview for previewing video associated with individual
LPR events. Below the preview, information about the license plate appears together with details from the
license plate match list it is associated with.

You can filter the event list according to the period, country module, LPR camera, or license plate match list. Use
the Search field to search for a particular license plate number. By default, this list shows LPR events from the
last hour.

You can specify and export a report of relevant events as PDF.

168 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

You can make updates to the existing match lists by using the License Plate Match List function.

Tran sact t ab (exp lain ed )

On the Transact tab, you can investigate transactions through search and filtering, and view receipts and video
recordings in a combined view.

There is a search field and two filters:

l Search field: enter your search words here to perform a free text search. The search returns transaction
lines that contain your search words and does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters. In
the receipt, the transaction lines matching the search are highlighted

l Time interval: use this filter to specify the time interval, for example Last 7 days. You can also set a
custom interval by your own choice. By default, the filter is set to Today

l Source: use this filter to select the transaction sources you want to view transactions for. By default, the
filter is set to All

Buttons in XProtect Smart Client (overview)

XProtect Smart Client has multiple buttons that allow you to perform different actions. The buttons are located in
the following places:

169 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l In the upper-right corner

l In the lower-right corner

The buttons available vary depending on the tab you are standing on. For example, Setup is not available on all
tabs.

Button Description

Setup Enter setup mode. See also Setup mode (overview) on page 31.

Export Export video data. See also Export video, audio, and still images on page 199.

Create an evidence lock to prevent evidence from being deleted. See also Create
Evidence Lock
evidence locks on page 210.

Retrieve recordings from interconnected hardware devices or cameras that support

Retrieve
edge storage.

Toggle full screen Toggle between full screen and a smaller window that you can adjust to the size you
m ode want.

Status Access the Status window. See also Status window (explained) on page 337

170 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Button Description

Access the help system, play online video tutorials, or view version number and plug-
Help
in information. See also Buttons in XProtect Smart Client (overview) on page 169.

Log out Log out of XProtect Smart Client. See also Log in and out on page 161.

Configure XProtect Smart Client settings and behavior, joysticks, keyboard shortcuts,
Settings
language, and more. See also Settings in XProtect Smart Client on page 33.

Lift privacy Users with sufficient rights can temporarily lift privacy masks. See also Lift and apply
m asks privacy masks on page 266.

Toggle them e Switch the XProtect Smart Client theme to dark or light.

Toggle sim plified

or advanced Switch between simplified mode and advanced mode.
m ode

Managing views
Views are located on the Live and Playback tabs and can contain cameras and other types of content. If views
have been assigned shortcut numbers, you can select a view by using keyboard shortcuts. See also Keyboard
shortcuts (overview) on page 185.

Searching for views and cameras (explained)

If you have a large or complex hierarchy of view groups, the search function makes navigation easier and allows
you to search for views, cameras - including camera characteristics (see also Camera characteristics on page

173) - and keywords across the hierarchy. You can find an overview of common keywords if you click next to
the search field.

Example

The following two images show a hierarchy of views and what it looks like when you search for parking:

171 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

172 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

If a top-level folder has a red background , it is protected. You can still access any
views under the protected top-level folder, but you cannot create new views or edit
existing views under it.

As you enter the search words, matching results for views and cameras are displayed. When you select one or
more of the matching cameras, the cameras appear in a temporary view that is optimized for the number of
cameras you select.

To view a single camera in a 1:1 view, click the search result in the Cam eras section.

To view the first 25 cameras in a view, click the search result in the Views section. You can also select cameras
manually if you press either CTRL or Shift while clicking the cameras. Press Enter to view the cameras.

Camera characteristics

l Name

l Description

l Capability:

l PTZ

l Audio

l Input

l Output

l Views containing a specific camera

l Recording server name or address (shows connected cameras)

Your system administrator can add free text tags in the camera description field on the
XProtect VMS server to make it possible to group cameras and search for these tags. An
example could be that all outdoor cameras use the tag "Outdoor" in the description field.
In that case, you can find all cameras of this type.

Change individual cameras temporarily

You can temporarily change the cameras in a view. However, it does not permanently change the view. If you
want to permanently change the content of a view, you must be in setup mode.

Requirements

You can only change the camera if the view item contains a camera or a position within a Smart Wall overview.

Steps:

173 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Select the relevant item in the view.

2. Do one of the following:

l In the Cam eras pane, drag the relevant camera into the position in the view.

l On the camera toolbar, click More > Send to window > Main Window, and then select a position
in the view.

3. To restore your original view, click on the workspace toolbar.

In the Cam eras pane, the list of cameras is grouped by server. If a server is listed with a
red icon, it is unavailable, in which case you will not be able to select cameras from that
server.

Swap cameras
You can temporarily swap two cameras in a view. The camera in that position then exchanges places with the
one you swap it with. You can only swap cameras with other cameras. This can be useful, for example, if you
want to keep all your most important cameras in a certain position in your view.

Steps:

1. Click the relevant camera title bar and drag it to a new position.

2. To restore the original view, click on the workspace toolbar.

If you want to make permanent changes to your view, you must first be in setup mode.

Send video between open views

You can send video from a selected camera position to a single-camera position in another open view, including
any views you may have in floating windows or on secondary displays.

This feature is not available for hotspots, carousels, or Matrix positions.

Steps:

1. On the camera toolbar, click More > Send to Window.

2. Select the destination view, and then select the position in the view where you want the video for that
camera to display. If some of the camera positions are not selectable, they might be unavailable or used
for hotspots, carousels, or Matrix content.

174 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Send views between displays

You can send a view to a specific display or a floating window. This is useful, for example, if you have several
monitors. Afterwards, you can synchronize the time of the destination display with the time used in the main
window.

1. In the Views pane, right-click the relevant view.

2. Click Send View To and then specify how you want your view to display.

If more secondary displays are available, they will be numbered.

3. To synchronize the time between the two displays, click Link window in the upper-right corner. The
timeline is hidden in the destination window, but is still visible in the main window.

Any hotspots, carousels, Matrix positions, still images, or HTML pages included in the view
will work as usual in a floating window.

M ultiple windows or displays (explained)

You can send individual views to separate windows or displays, while keeping the main window of the XProtect
Smart Client in the background, so you can watch several views simultaneously. The selected camera or item is
always displayed with a blue border.

You can send any view to:

175 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l A primary display that shows the view in a separate full-screen window on the main display of your
computer with the main window hiding behind it

By default, the tabs and controls are hidden. Press ESC to make the tabs and
certain controls reappear.

176 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l A secondary display that shows the view in a full-screen window on another monitor (if available). The
main window stays visible on the primary monitor

By default, the tabs and controls are hidden. Press ESC to make the tabs and
certain controls reappear.

177 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l A floating window that shows the view in a separate window. You can open any number of floating
windows and drag them to any monitor that is connected to your computer.

Click Link window to synchronize the time in the floating window with the time of
the main window.

Your multiple window setup is stored in XProtect Smart Client, so next time you log in, you
can reuse it. However, the setup applies only to the computer that you are currently using.
To use multiple windows on more than one computer, you must configure your multiple
window setup on each computer.

Navigating your cameras and views

Learn about some of the ways of navigating within or between the cameras in XProtect Smart Client.

See also Smart map (explained) on page 277 and Maps (explained) on page 289.

178 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Hotspots (explained)
A hotspot lets you view magnified and higher quality video from a selected camera in a dedicated position in a
view. Hotspots are useful because you can use a low image quality or frame rate for cameras in the regular
positions of the view and a high image quality or frame rate for the hotspot. This saves bandwidth on your
remote connections.

There are two types of hotspots:

l Global hotspots, which display the selected camera regardless of whether the camera is in the main
window or in a secondary display

l Local hotspots, which only display the selected camera of the local display

It is a good idea to have a hotspot in one of the larger positions of the view, for example, the large position in a
1+7 view: .

Use h ot sp ot s

l When you click a camera in a view, the hotspot position updates with video feed of that camera

l The title bar displays the hotspot icon:

When you view live or recorded video, you can double-click a hotspot (or any other camera position in a view) to
maximize it. When you do this, the video in the hotspot is displayed in full quality, regardless of your image
quality selection. If you want to make sure that the selected image quality also applies when maximized, in
Setup mode, in the Properties pane, select Keep when m axim ized.

Camera navigator (explained)

The camera navigator allows you to view several cameras in relation to each other as they are laid out on a map,
for example a floor plan . This can be useful if you want to follow someone or something from one camera to
another, for example, to follow suspects as they move around a building. By setting up your cameras according
to their location on a map, you can navigate from one camera to the next from a single view.

179 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

The underlying map itself does not appear, but the camera icons that are placed on the
map appear.

The cameras that are currently not in focus appear as thumbnail images on the right-hand side. They are sorted
according to proximity.

You can base your views on several maps that link to each other through hot zones, allowing you to follow
movement from a camera on one map to another camera on a sub-map, just as you would a person moving
from one floor to another or outside your building. The Sub-Maps pane gives you access to the cameras set up
on maps that are linked via hot zones on a map.

Use cam era n avig at ors

Use cameras navigators to navigate between related cameras as they are laid out according to a map.

Requirements

The camera navigator must be configured and then added to a view.

Steps:

1. On the Live or Playback tab, open the view that contains the camera navigator. Video from the default
camera of the map is displayed.

2. To view video from the other cameras on the map, click the camera icons that are currently not in focus.
You can also shift between the cameras in the thumbnail overview on the right-hand side.

180 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

3. To click back through you camera selection, click the Back button in the upper-right corner: .

4. To go to the default camera, click the Hom e button in the upper-right corner.

5. If you have navigated to a sub-map, you can click Up to go to the previous map, or Hom e to go to your
default view.

Carousels (explained)
A carousel is used for displaying video from several cameras, one after the other, in a single position in a view.
You can specify which cameras to include in the carousel as well as the interval between camera changes.
Carousels are displayed with the carousel icon on the toolbar: .

Fisheye lens cameras cannot be included in a carousel.

You can maximize a carousel by double-clicking the carousel position. When you do this, video from cameras
included in the carousel is by default displayed in full quality, regardless of your image quality selection. This
default cannot be overridden for carousels.

You can use digital zoom and PTZ controls from a carousel if the camera supports this. When you use the PTZ or
digital zoom controls that appear, the carousel pauses automatically.

Use carou sels

If any of your views contain carousels, this icon will appear in the title bar next to the camera name: .

Requirements

l Carousels must be configured before you can use them. See also Add carousels to views on page 76.

l In the Settings window, Default for cam era title bar must be set to Show.

Steps:

1. On the Live tab, open a view that contains a carousel. When you hover over the view item, this toolbar

appears: .

2. The carousel starts automatically. To pause it, click the Pause button.

3. To shift to the next or previous camera in the carousel, click the Previous cam era or N ext cam era
button.

181 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. Additional actions available in the toolbar:

l Jump to the place on the smart map, where the camera is located

l Start search from the camera currently in focus, in a new window

l Create snapshot

l Copy to clipboard

You can maximize a carousel by double-clicking the carousel position. Video from
cameras included in the carousel is by default displayed in full quality, regardless of your
image quality selection.

Digital zoom (explained)

Digital zoom lets you magnify a portion of a given image so you are able to have a closer look at it. It works both
in live and playback mode.

Digital zoom is a useful feature for cameras that do not have their own optical zoom capabilities. Using digital
zoom will not affect any recording of the video. Recording will still take place in the regular format of the camera.

For non-PTZ cameras, digital zoom is enabled by default. If you enable or disable digital
zoom on one camera, all cameras in your view are affected. For PTZ cameras, this setting
only applies to one camera at a time.

When you export evidence, you can choose to export the regular images or the digitally zoomed images in AVI or
JPEG formats. When you export to database format, this is unavailable, because the recipient can use digital
zoom on the exported recordings. If you print an image on which you have used digital zoom, the digitally
zoomed area of the image will be printed.

Use digital zoom

Requirements

To enable digital zoom, on the camera toolbar, click More and select Digital zoom .

Steps:

182 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Click and drag inside the image to zoom. The area you select is highlighted by a dotted line. When you
release the mouse button, the zoom will take effect.

2. To move to other areas of the image while maintaining your zoom level, in the overview frame, drag the
highlighted area to the required position.

3. To adjust the zoom level, click inside the image and use the scroll wheel on your mouse.

183 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. Click the Hom e icon inside the virtual joystick to return to the normal zoom level.

Virtual joystick and PTZ overlay buttons (explained)

If your views include fisheye cameras or lenses, or PTZ devices, you can navigate the images by using the virtual
joystick or the PTZ navigation buttons that may appear inside the image. See also PTZ and fisheye lens images
(explained) on page 269.

The virtual joystick:

If you do not want the camera toolbar to pop up when you hover over the view item, press
and hold the CTRL key while moving the mouse.

Views and shortcuts (explained)

You can use keyboard shortcuts to select views if the views have been assigned numbers. You assign numbers
to the views in setup mode on the Live and Playback tabs. See also Setup mode (overview) on page 31.

Using keyboard shortcuts to select a view only works if you are using a numeric keypad.

Example

If you have assigned the number 1 to a particular view, you select the view by pressing * + 1 + EN TER.

184 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Keyboard shortcuts (overview)

When you work on the Live and Playback tabs, a number of keyboard shortcuts allow you to navigate within and
between views.

These shortcuts cannot be used for positions in views containing Matrix content or static
images.

You can also assign your own custom shortcut key combinations for particular actions in XProtect Smart Client.
See also Keyboard settings on page 40.

Press these
To do this
keys

EN TER Toggle maximized and regular display of the selected item in the view.

Select a specific view item within a view. First, press ALT. A number is displayed for
each open window. If, for example, you want to select a view item in the second
window, press 2. Multiple numbers now appear, one for each view item that is
ALT visible in the second window. Press the number of the view item that you want to
select, for example 4. When a view item is in focus, it is marked with a blue frame.

If you are using a PTZ camera or a hotspot, this allows you to control cameras with
a joystick or to send the view item directly to the hotspot without using the mouse.

Change the camera in the selected view item to the camera with the matching
/ +<cam era shortcut number. Example: if the required camera has the shortcut number 6, press
shortcut / + 6+EN TER.
num ber>
+EN TER Camera shortcut numbers may not necessarily be in use on your XProtect
VMS system. They are defined on the server.

/ +EN TER Change the camera in the selected view item to the default camera.

/ +/ +EN TER Change the cameras in all view items to the default cameras.

* +<view Change the selected view to the view with the matching shortcut number. Example:
shortcut if the required view has the shortcut number 8, press * + 8+EN TER.
num ber> If view shortcut numbers are used, you can see them on the Live and Playback tabs

185 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Press these
To do this
keys

in the Views pane, where they appear in parentheses before the names of the
+EN TER
views.

6 (numeric
Move the view position selection one step to the right.
keypad only)

4 (numeric
Move the view position selection one step to the left.
keypad only)

8 (numeric
Move the view position selection one step up.
keypad only)

2 (numeric
Move the view position selection one step down.
keypad only)

Viewing live video

You view live video mainly on the Live tab. To view live video, you must find a view that shows video from the
cameras that you are interested in. The views are available in the Views pane. For each camera that appears in
a view, different actions are available, for example taking snapshots or starting manual recording. See also
Camera toolbar (overview) on page 188. If something catches your attention, you can zoom in to take a closer
look using the virtual joystick.

Live video (explained)

The video stream from the camera is not necessarily being recorded. Typically, recording takes place according
to a schedule, for example, every morning from 10.00 to 11.30. Or whenever the XProtect VMS system detects
special events, for example, motion generated by a person entering a room, a door is opened, or similar.

If multiple streams have been set up on the server, you can temporarily view a different
stream by selecting this from the camera toolbar. On the camera toolbar, click More and
then select a stream from the available list.

To investigate an incident that was recorded, go to the Playback tab. To perform advanced searches, go to the
Search tab.

186 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Live tab (overview)

N um ber Description

1 The different workspaces. See also Workspaces in XProtect Smart Client on page 165.

2 Select a view.

Change cameras in views temporarily. See also Change individual cameras temporarily on
3
page 173.

View recorded video for individual cameras. See also View recorded video independently of
4
timeline on page 198.

5 The camera toolbar. See also Camera toolbar (overview) on page 188.

6 Enter or exit setup mode to add cameras and other types of content to your views.

7 Buttons. See also Buttons in XProtect Smart Client (overview) on page 169.

187 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Camera toolbar (overview)

The camera toolbar appears whenever the cursor hovers over a camera inside a view. The camera toolbar is
available both on the Live and on the Playback tab.

N um ber Description

Open a new search window where the camera is preselected. See also Start search from
1
cameras or views on page 233.

View recorded video independently of the timeline. See also View recorded video
2
independently of timeline on page 198.

3 Bookmark the video. See also Add or edit bookmarks on page 254.

Take simple snapshots of what you are viewing. See also Take single snapshots on page
4
190.

Print a surveillance report from a single camera. See also Print report from single cameras
5
on page 204.

6 Copy single images to the clipboard. See also Copy images to clipboard on page 206.

7 Record video manually from a single camera. See also Record video manually on page 190.

8 Enable digital zoom. See also Use digital zoom on page 182.

Change the camera in the view item temporarily. See also Change individual cameras
9
temporarily on page 173.

188 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Hid e cam era t oolb ar

When you minimize the camera toolbar in a view item, the toolbar remains minimized only to you in the current
session. However, you can hide it permanently for a particular view item, for all users with access to the view
item.

Steps:

1. On the Live or Playback tab, click Setup to enter setup mode.

2. Find the view item where you want to hide the toolbar.

3. Click to hide the toolbar.

4. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved.

The setting you make in setup mode is stored on the server, so that the change impacts
other XProtect Smart Client operators.

Camera indicators (explained)

The camera indicators show you the status of the video that is displayed in the camera view items. The camera
indicators are visible only if the camera title bar is enabled in the Settings window on the Application tab.

You can turn the camera title bar on and off on individual view items. On the Live or
Playback tab, click Setup and select the Show title bar check box in the Properties pane.

The list describes the different camera indicators that appear when:

l motion is detected. Click inside the image to reset the motion indicator

l the server connection to the camera is lost

l video from the camera is being recorded

189 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l a connection to the camera is established. This icon is only relevant for live video

l playing back recorded video

l no new images have been received from the server for more than two seconds

In the camera properties, you can add sound to notify you when there is motion.

Record video manually

Recording while watching live video is useful if you see something of interest.

Steps:

On the camera toolbar for the view item that you want to record, select one of the following options:

l Start recording for # Minutes

Once started, recording will continue for the number of minutes determined by your system
administrator. You cannot change this, and you cannot stop recording before the specified number of
minutes has passed.

l Start manual recording

Once started, recording will continue for the number of minutes determined by your system

administrator, or you can click the icon again to stop manual recording.

You can start recording the video stream from more than one camera
simultaneously, but you must select them one by one.

Take single snapshots

As you are viewing live or recorded video, or searching for video, you can take an instant snapshot that you can
share. The path to the folder, where the still image is saved, is specified in the Settings window under
Application settings.

Requirements

In the Settings window under Application, Snapshot must be set to Available.

Steps:

190 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. If you are on the Live or Playback tab:

1. Hover over a view item that contains a camera, a hotspot, a carousel, or a camera navigator.

2. In the toolbar, click . The icon momentarily turns green.

2. If you are on the Search tab, double-click a search result and click in the camera toolbar. The icon
momentarily turns green.

3. To access the snapshots, go to the file location where the snapshots are saved. See Settings in XProtect
Smart Client on page 33.

If the image contains a privacy mask, this privacy mask is also applied to the snapshot
image.

Investigating incidents
You investigate incidents mainly on the Playback tab by using the timeline to browse recorded video. To view
recorded video, you must find a view that shows video from the cameras that you are interested in. The views
are available in the Views pane. For each camera that appears in a view, different actions are available, for
example taking snapshots or launching search. See also Camera toolbar (overview) on page 188. If something
catches your attention, you can zoom in to take a closer look using the virtual joystick.

You can perform advanced searches on the Search tab and use the search results as a starting point for further
investigation or actions, for example exporting and bookmarking.

If the incident is associated with an alarm, go to the Alarm Manager tab, or select a view where the Alarm List
has been added.

Viewing recorded video (explained)

There are different ways of viewing recorded video:

191 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

On t h e Playb ack t ab

On the Playback tab, all cameras in a view display recordings from the same point in time, the master time. You can
play back or browse recordings by using the timeline. See also Time navigation controls (overview) on page 196.

However, you can also view and navigate recordings from individual cameras independently of the master time.
Independent playback must be enabled in the Functions settings. See also Functions settings on page 36.

If you are accessing your cameras through the tree structure in the Cam eras pane, you can open individual
cameras in a new window from the Playback tab.

192 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

On t h e Live t ab

Though the Live tab normally shows live video, you can watch recorded video for individual cameras by clicking

the button in the camera toolbar. This will open a new window where you can play back or browse the
recordings. Cam era playback must be enabled. See also Functions settings on page 36.

On t h e Search t ab

The search results are basically video sequences that you can play back:

l Preview the search results. See also Preview video from search results on page 234

l Play back the search results in full screen mode or in a separate window. See also Open search results in
separate windows on page 233

193 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Playback tab (overview)

N um ber Description

1 View recorded video on the Playback tab.

Select a view in the tree structure or use keyboard shortcuts. See also Keyboard shortcuts
2
(overview) on page 185.

Change individual cameras temporarily. See also Change individual cameras temporarily on
3
page 173.

Select a time span for exporting video. See also Time navigation controls (overview) on page
5
196.

194 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N um ber Description

6 Browse using the timeline. See also Timeline (explained) on page 195.

Open a new search window with the camera preselected. See Start search from cameras or
7
views on page 233.

8 Create an evidence lock.

9 Export video data. See also Export video, audio, and still images on page 199.

Perform various actions on the camera toolbar. See also Camera toolbar (overview) on
10
page 188.

11 Enter or exit setup mode to add cameras and other types of content to your views.

12 Switch to full screen mode.

Timeline (explained)
The timeline displays an overview of periods with recordings from all cameras displayed in your current view.
Two timelines are displayed in the timeline area:

l The upper timeline shows the recording periods of the selected camera

l The lower timeline is for all the cameras in the view, including the selected camera. If you have linked
floating windows, these will also be included on the lower timeline

Drag the timeline to the right or left to move in time, or use the scroll wheel of your
mouse.

To adjust the range of the timeline, press CTRL and use the scroll wheel at the same time.

You will see these colors in the timeline:

l Light-red indicates recordings

l Red indicates motion

l Light green indicates outgoing audio

l Green indicates incoming audio

For a legend of the color codes, to the far right, click the small question mark.

195 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Additional markers and colors

If there are additional sources of data available in your XProtect VMS system, incidents from these sources are
shown as markers in other colors. The incidents can appear as pop-ups in the timeline.

To view markers and colors from additional sources, Additional data and Additional
m arkers must either be enabled in the timeline settings or server-side by your system
administrator. See also Timeline settings on page 38.

Bookm arks in t h e t im elin e (exp lain ed )

Bookmarks in the timeline are indicated with a blue bookmark icon: . To view the bookmarked video, place
your mouse over the icon.

Time navigation controls (overview)

196 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N um ber Description

The playback date and time is the time to which all the cameras are tied. When you play
back recordings, all cameras in the view will show video from the same time. Some
1 and 3 cameras, however, may only record if motion is detected. Also, there may be no recorded
video from one or more cameras in the view matching the specified point in time. Then, the
last image in the database prior to the specified point in time will be dimmed.

2 The time of the timeline is indicated by a blue vertical line.

Select a period of time by dragging the start and end time indicators on the timeline -
4
typically when you are exporting video. Click again to see the timeline with no time selected.

5 Jump to a specific point in time by specifying the date and time.

The playback speed slider lets you change the current playback speed. Move the slider to
6
the left for slow motion, and to the right for fast motion. Click 1x for normal speed.

7 Move to the image just before the one currently viewed.

Play backward in time.

8
When you click either Play Backward or Play Forward, the button turns into a pause
button.

9 Adjust the speed. Drag it to the right to increase forward play speed.
Drag to the left to increase backward play speed.

10 Play forward in time.

11 Move to the image just after the one currently viewed.

12 Move to the first image in the database for the selected camera.

13 Move to the first image in the previous sequence.

197 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N um ber Description

14 Move to the first image in the following sequence.

15 Move to the last image in the database for the selected camera.

16
Specify the time span of playback in the timeline.

View recorded video independently of timeline

When you play back video on the Playback tab, all recordings in the view are synchronized with the timeline. For
individual cameras, you can play back video independently of the timeline.

You can only use this feature for ordinary single-camera positions, not for hotspots,
carousels, or Matrix positions.

Requirements

In the Settings window > Functions tab, the Independent playback option must be set to Available.

Steps:

1. Move your cursor to the bottom of the camera that you want to view recorded video from. On the toolbar
that appears, click the Independent Playback button.

The independent playback timeline appears:

2. Drag the timeline to set the start time.

3. To view recorded video for the selected time on all the cameras in your view at once, on the toolbar, click
the Use the selected tim e on the playback tim eline button: . This displays the Playback tab with all
cameras synchronized to the time you have selected.

198 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Investigate your search results

There are different ways of investigating incidents that you have found on the Search tab:

l Open the search result in a separate window where the Playback tab is preselected. See also Open
search results in separate windows on page 233

l Open the search result in a detailed view. Do one of the following:

l In the list of search results, double-click the search result to view it in full screen mode. Double-
click again to return to the list of search results

l If you are previewing your search result in the preview area, double-click inside the video image.
The search result opens in full screen mode. Double-click again to return to the preview area

Creating video evidence

There are several ways of documenting incidents and events in XProtect Smart Client, for example by exporting
recordings and creating single still images from the video stream.

For information about locking video evidence and how to export evidence locks, see
Locking video evidence on page 210.

Export video, audio, and still images

To share video evidence, you can export video in different formats and any associated audio. You can also
export still images and other types of data that - depending on your XProtect VMS system - may be available.

Steps:

1. On the Playback tab, in the timeline, click the button to select the start and end time (see Time
navigation controls (overview) on page 196) of the sequence you want to export.

2. For each item you want to include in the export, select the associated check box .

3. To the right of the timeline, click Export > Export to open the Export window.

4. To include additional view items, click Add item button to select them.

5. In the Export nam e field, you can change the default name.

6. Specify a path, a media burner, or both, for the destination of the export.

199 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

7. Select one or more of the following export formats:

l XProtect form at - use the XProtect database format if you want to include the XProtect Smart
Client – Player along with the export. Other media players will not work

l Media player form at - use a format that most media players can play. This requires that a media
player is installed on the computer where the export is to be viewed

l Still im ages - export a still image file for each frame for the selected period

8. If you want the recipient to be able to verify that the exported evidence has not been tampered with,
select the following check boxes:

l XProtect form at

l Include digital signature

This will enable the Verify Signatures button in the XProtect Smart Client – Player.

9. Click Start Export to export your evidence.

To mask an area during export, see Mask areas in recordings during export on page 200.

M ask areas in recordings during export

When you export video, you can add privacy masks to cover selected areas. When someone watches the video,
the areas with privacy masks appear as solid blocks.

The privacy masks that you add here only apply to the current export and for the selected
video. The export may already include privacy masks that have been defined by your system
administrator for certain cameras. See also Privacy masking (explained) on page 265.

Steps:

1. In the Export window, click the Privacy m ask button. A window appears.

2. For each area that you want to mask, click the button, and then drag the pointer over the area that you
want to mask.

3. To unmask a part of a privacy mask, click the button, and then drag the pointer over the area that you
want to unmask. Repeat this step for each part to unmask.

To temporarily hide masks, click and hold the Hide m ask button.

4. Click OK to return to the Export window.

200 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

The preview image contains an invisible grid with cells. If the area you select includes any
portion of a cell, the system masks the entire cell. The result can be that the system
masks slightly more of the image than you intended.

Storyboards (explained)
The storyboard function helps you paste together video sequences from one camera or from multiple cameras
into one cohesive flow. You can use the sequence of events, the storyboard, as proof of evidence in internal
investigations or the court of law.

You can skip all sequences that are not relevant and avoid wasting time looking through long sequences of video
that you do not need. Also, you avoid wasting storage space on stored sequences that do not contain relevant
video.

You can also export items directly from the Export window. See also Export video, audio, and still images on
page 199.

Export storyboards
You can create a storyboard by pasting together video sequences into one cohesive flow and then export it.

Steps:

1. On the Playback tab, start by opening a view that contains items that you want to add to your storyboard.

2. In the timeline, click .

3. Select the start time and the end time for the storyboard. See Time navigation controls (overview) on
page 196.

4. For each item in the view that you want to add, select the corresponding check box and click Export >
Add to export list.

5. Repeat step 1-4 until you have added all items that you need for your storyboard.

6. Click Export > Export to open the Export window. All selected items are displayed in the Item list, ready
for export.

7. In the Export nam e field, enter a name for the export. The program automatically creates a name with
the current date and time. You can change the name.

8. Specify a path for the destination of the export.

9. Click the relevant tab to select a format to export to.

10. Specify the necessary settings for the format that you have chosen. XProtect Smart Client estimates the
size of the export and displays this information at the bottom of the window.

11. Click Start Export to export your evidence.

201 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

For information about viewing the exported storyboard,see View exported video on page 202.

Export locked video evidence

When you export evidence locks, also the data from devices related to the cameras are included in the export.

Steps:

1. Click the Playback tab.

2. To the right of the timeline, click Evidence Lock and select View.

3. If you want to stay on the Live tab instead of the Playback tab, click the Status button on the
application toolbar and select Evidence Lock List.

4. Select an evidence lock and click Export.

5. The Export window opens. Define your settings.

View exported video

The exports you create in XProtect Smart Client are stored in a default folder on your local computer, unless you
have specified a different folder. You can view an export immediately after creating it, or later.

Steps:

202 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. To view the exported video immediately after creating it:

1. Create the export. See also Export video, audio, and still images on page 199.

2. Click the Details button in the upper right corner when the export is complete. A dialog box
appears with a link to the output folder.

3. Click the link to open the output folder.

203 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

2. If you have exported video at a previous point in time:

1. Go to the folder where you store export files. The default location is
C:\Users\<username>\Documents\Milestone\Video Export. You can check the folder location in the
Export window. This works only if you always use the same export destination.

2. Depending on the output format, open the relevant folder and double-click the video file or still
image. If the format is XProtect form at, double-click the Smart Client – Player file with the .exe
extension.

Printing or creating surveillance reports

Depending on your needs, you can either print surveillance reports on the fly based on still images from
surveillance cameras, or you can create surveillance reports that you save to your computer.

See also Print alarm reports on page 262 and Get statistics on alarms on page 263.

Prin t rep ort from sin g le cam eras

You can print single still images and related information from live cameras or from recorded video. Notes that
you add are also printed.

Steps:

1. To print a recorded still image, go to the Playback tab.

2. To print a live still image, go to the Live tab.

3. Open the view that contains the camera you are interested in.

4. Hover over the view item. The camera toolbar appears.

204 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

5. Click the icon. A window appears.

6. Add notes if required.

7. Click Print. The Windows Print dialog appears.

8. If necessary, change the print settings and print. Otherwise, just click Print.

You can also print information about alarms if your organization uses the alarm handling
features. See also Alarms (explained) on page 256.

Creat e rep ort s from search resu lt s

Based on search results, you can create a surveillance report that contains information about the events or
incidents, for example still images, event time, information about the cameras, and notes. The report is saved as
a PDF file.

Steps:

205 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Go to the Search tab and run a search.

2. For each search result that you want to include in the report, hover over it and select the blue check box .

3. In the blue action bar, click . A window appears.

4. Change the default report name into something meaningful. In the report, the name is displayed as the
page header.

5. To change the folder that the report is saved to, in the Report destination section, click and select a
different folder.

6. To add a note, enter text in the N ote field.

7. Click Create. A progress bar informs you when the report is generated.

8. To open the report, click Details, and then click Open. To open the destination folder, click the link.

To change the layout of the report, open the Settings dialog, click Advanced, and then
select a different value in the PDF report form at list.

Copy images to clipboard

You can copy single still images from selected cameras. Copied images can then be pasted (as bitmap images)
into other applications, such as word processors, e-mail clients, etc. You can only copy a single image from one
camera at a time.

l On the camera toolbar, click the Copy to Clipboard icon to copy an image

206 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Video export settings

Depending on your user rights, type of server, and what has been set up on the server,
certain export settings may be restricted and unavailable.

The format and settings you choose are stored and displayed next time you export.

N am e Description

Export nam e The program automatically fills this in with the local date and time, but you can rename it.

Lists the items selected for export, for example video sequences.

For each item, you can change the timespan by clicking the start time or the end time.
After selecting a new date and time, click Go To. You can also change the timespan by
dragging the handles underneath the preview area.

Item Click an item to see a preview of the export clip in the preview area. To preview multiple
items simultaneously, press and hold down the SHIFT or CTRL buttons while clicking the
relevant items.

You can delete an item from the Item list by clicking the red x next to it. The red x
appears when you hover over the item with your mouse. If you want to split the item into
two, click the Split icon in the preview area.

Use the Add item button to select other items that you want to include in the export. Use
Add item
the Rem ove All button to clear the list in the Item window.

Path - when you specify a path, the folders you specify do not have to be existing ones. If
they do not already exist, they are created automatically.
Export
A path may already be suggested in this field.
destination
Media burner - you can specify a burner that you want to send the export to. In this way,
you create the export and make sure it is written directly to an optical media in one go.

Click to add privacy masks to the video. The privacy masks cover the selected area with a
solid, black area.

Privacy m ask The privacy masks that you add here only apply to the current export and for the selected
video. The export may already include video with privacy masks configured by your
system administrator. For more information, see Privacy masking (explained) on page
265.

207 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

XProt ect format settings

To view exports that are created in XProtect version 2020 R1 or later, you must use
XProtect Smart Client version 2020 R1 or later.

N am e Description

Include
XProtect Include the XProtect Smart Client – Player application with the exported data. The
Sm art Client XProtect format can only be viewed with the XProtect Smart Client – Player.
– Player

Prevent re-
Select this check box to prevent your recipients from re-exporting the video in any format.
export

Select this check box to encrypt the export using the encryption standard AES-256. When
Encrypt with
you click Start Export, the system asks you for a password that must contain at least
password
eight characters.

Select this check box to include a digital signature to your exported database. Depending
on your surveillance system settings, the video or audio might already contain a
signature. If this is the case, these signatures will be verified during export and if
successfully verified, added to the export. If verification fails, the export for the device will
also fail. When opening the exported files, the recipients can verify the signature in
XProtect Smart Client – Player. See also Verify digital signatures on page 316.

If you do not include a digital signature, neither the signature from

the server or the export will be included, and the export will
Include digital
succeed even if the video or audio has been tampered with.
signature

Digital signatures can be excluded during the export process in two different situations:

l If there are areas with privacy masks, digital signatures for the recording server
will be removed from the export

l If the data you are exporting is very close to the current date and time, the digital
signature for the recording server might not be included for the whole sequence.
In this case, only part of the export will have digital signatures added

208 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

The export process will complete, but when you verify the signatures, you will see that the
digital signatures for the recording server were removed or partially OK.

Click to open the Add Com m ents to Export window, where you can add comments to
Com m ents
individual cameras or to the project as a whole.

M edia player format settings

The media player format allows you to export a standard video clip or audio clip that can be viewed or listened to
from computers that have a standard media player installed. The computer must also have the codec installed
that you use for the export.

N am e Description

Select
Select if you want to export video only, audio only, or both video and audio.
content

Select
Select if you want to export video in AVI format or MKV format.
form at

A video codec is a particular compression and /decompression technology used when

generating video files. Your choice of codec will affect the quality and size of the AVI file.

The list contains the video codecs available on your PC.

You can change the codec, but we recommend that you keep the default codec settings,
Codec
unless you have a good reason to change these.

The codec that you use must be similar on the computer that you play
the video clip from.

Select if you want to add the date and time from the surveillance
Include tim estam ps system to the exported images. The timestamp will be displayed
at the top of the exported video.

Reduce fram e rate Select to reduce the frame rate for the export; every second

209 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

image will be included, yet still play back in real-time.

Click to open the Video Texts window where you can create pre-
and post-texts for the AVI file. These texts will be added to all
Video texts
cameras for the export and displayed as still images before (Pre-
slides) and/or after (Post-slides) the video.

When you perform an export in MKV format: if you have not used privacy masking in video
recorded in JPEG or MPEG-4/H.264/H.265 formats, no transcoding takes place on
recorded video in the export (the recorded video is kept in the original quality). In contrast,
if you have used privacy masks or have recorded video using any other codec (for
example MxPEG or MPEG-4 short header mode), recorded video is transcoded into JPEG
in the export.

Locking video evidence

You can add, edit, and delete evidence locks, but you can also export them and play back video with evidence
locks.

Evidence locks (explained)

With the evidence lock functionality, you can protect video sequences from being deleted, for example while an
investigation or trial is ongoing. This protection also covers audio and other data from devices related to the
selected cameras.

Once an evidence lock is in place, the system prevents the data from being deleted automatically based on the
retention time of the system.

Depending on your user rights, you may be able to create, view, edit and delete evidence
locks.

Create evidence locks

You can create an evidence lock to prevent video recordings and related data from being deleted.

Create evidence locks on the Playback tab

210 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. In the timeline, click the Tim e Selection Mode or the Set Start/ End Tim e button.

2. Select the start and end time for the video sequences you want to protect from deletion.

3. Select the cameras that have video sequences and data from related devices that you want to protect.

4. To the right of the timeline, click Evidence Lock > Create. A window appears.

5. Give the evidence lock a headline and, optionally, a description.

6. For information about the remaining fields, see Evidence lock settings on page 214.

7. Click Create. If the evidence lock was created successfully, you can click Details to see what went well
and what did not. See Evidence lock status messages on page 216.

Create evidence locks on the Search tab

1. In the list of search results, select the video sequences that you want to protect from being deleted. The
action bar appears. Data from related devices will also be protected.

211 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

2. Click > Create evidence lock. In the window that appears, the cameras associated with the
selected search results are listed.

3. Give the evidence lock a headline and, optionally, a description.

4. The timespan covers all the selected search results. To change the timespan, use the Interval start and
Interval end fields.

5. For information about the remaining fields, see Evidence lock settings on page 214.

6. Click Create. A window appears informing you about the progress of the evidence lock. Click Details to
see what went well and what did not. See Evidence lock status messages on page 216.

View evidence locks

1. Click the Playback tab.

2. To the right of the timeline, click Evidence Lock and select View.

3. If you want to stay on the Live tab instead of the Playback tab, click the Status button on the
application toolbar and select Evidence Lock List. A list appears with the existing evidence locks with
devices that you have user rights to.

212 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. Search for text in the headlines and descriptions, sort the different columns and/or use the filter options
to make it easier to find the wanted evidence lock.

5. Select an evidence lock and click Details to see the cameras included in the evidence lock and other
information.

Edit evidence locks

You can edit evidence lock, depending on your user rights, for example the time interval, the cameras, and how
long the evidence lock should apply.

1. Select the Playback tab.

2. To the right of the timeline, click Evidence lock and select View, or click the Status button on the
application toolbar and select Evidence Lock List.

3. Select an evidence lock and click Details. A window appears..

4. To make the interval of the evidence lock shorter or longer, use the Evidence lock interval start and
Evidence lock interval end fields.

5. To change the time that the evidence lock is valid for, select a value in the Keep evidence lock for list.

6. When done, click Update.

7. A window shows if the update was successful. Click Details to see what went well and what did not. See
Evidence lock status messages on page 216 for more information.

Play back video with evidence locks

You can always play back video on the Playback tab regardless if the video is protected or not. If you want to
play back video sequences that are included in a specific evidence lock, do the following:

1. Click the Playback tab.

2. To the right of the timeline, click Evidence Lock and select View.

3. If you want to stay on the Live tab instead of the Playback tab, click the Status button on the
application toolbar and select Evidence Lock List. A list appears with the existing evidence locks with
devices that you have user rights to.

4. Select an evidence lock and click Play back. A new window opens and you can see a view with all the
cameras in the evidence lock.

5. Use one of the timeline features to go to a specific time or simply click Play Forward.

Export locked video evidence

When you export evidence locks, also the data from devices related to the cameras are included in the export.

Steps:

213 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Click the Playback tab.

2. To the right of the timeline, click Evidence Lock and select View.

3. If you want to stay on the Live tab instead of the Playback tab, click the Status button on the
application toolbar and select Evidence Lock List.

4. Select an evidence lock and click Export.

5. The Export window opens. Define your settings.

Delete evidence locks

When you delete an evidence lock, you do not delete the video sequences but do only remove the protection of
them. If the video sequences are older than the system's default retention time, the system informs you about
this and you can keep the evidence lock to prevent that the video sequences are automatically deleted by the
system after the removal of the protection.

1. Click the Playback tab.

2. To the right of the timeline, click Evidence Lock and select View.

3. If you want to stay on the Live tab instead of the Playback tab, click the Status button on the
application toolbar and select Evidence Lock List.

4. Select one or more evidence locks and click Delete.

5. A window shows if the deletion was successful. Click Details to see what went well and what did not. See
Evidence lock status messages on page 216 for more information.

Evidence lock settings

N am e Description

Headline The headline of the evidence lock.

Description A description of the evidence lock.

Interval start Adjust the start date and time for the video sequences you want to protect.

Interval end Adjust the end date and time for the video sequences you want to protect.

Keep evidence lock Specify for how long you want to keep the evidence protected.

214 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

Depending on you user rights, you can have the following options: hour(s), day(s),
week(s), month(s), year(s), indefinite or user-defined.

for If you select User-defined, click the calendar button to select a date and then
adjust the time manually.

When done, the date and time for when the evidence lock expires is shown.

Select cam era Click to select more cameras to include in the evidence lock.

Rem ove/ Rem ove All Click to remove one selected camera or all cameras from the evidence lock.

Evidence lock filters

N am e Description

Lock Filter your evidence locks based on the start time of the interval they are protected in.
interval Available options are today, yesterday, last 7 days and all.

Filter your evidence locks based on when they were created. Available options are today,
Created yesterday, last 7 days, all and custom interval. If you select custom interval, you select the
start and end date in a calendar.

Filter your evidence locks based on when they expire. Available options are today,
Expiry date tomorrow, next 7 days, all and custom interval. If you select custom interval, you select the
start and end date in a calendar.

Users Filter for evidence locks created by all users or just by you.

Filter for evidence locks with data from any camera or select one or more cameras that
Cam eras
must be included in the evidence locks.

215 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Evidence lock status messages

Scenarios and
Message Description and result
solution

All went well.

Succeeded Result:

The evidence lock is created/updated/deleted.

Scenario: Some of
the recording
servers with
devices included in
the evidence lock
are offline.

Solution: Wait for

If the creation, update or deletion of an evidence lock was not the recording
entirely successful, an only partially successful message is shown server to come
and the progress bar is yellow. Click Details to see what went online.
wrong.
Scenario: One or
Result: more devices have
The evidence lock is created/updated/deleted but without recordings on
Only partially including some of the selected cameras and/or their related recording servers
successful devices. that are not
upgraded to 2020
Additionally, this can be because a recording server is offline, in R2 or later.
which case the evidence lock is configured, but not yet applied on
the actual video. In this case, the evidence lock will be applied to Solution: Upgrade
the video when the recording server becomes available. You can the recording
verify that the locks are applied by looking at the size of the lock. servers to version
An indication of size means that the lock is applied. 2020 R2 or later.

Scenario: Your
system
administrator has
changed your
evidence lock user
rights after you
logged into XProtect

216 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Scenarios and
Message Description and result
solution

Smart Client.

Solution: Contact
your system
administrator.

Scenario: All the

recording servers
with devices
included in the
evidence lock are
offline.

Solution: Wait for

the recording
servers to come
online.

Scenario: The
management
If the creation, update or deletion of an evidence lock is not server is offline.
successful, a failed message is shown and the progress bar is
Solution: Wait for
red. Click Details to see what went wrong.
Failed the management
Result: server to come
online.
The evidence lock is not created/updated/deleted.
Scenario: Only for
update and
deletion: You do not
have user rights to
one or more
devices in the
evidence lock.

Solution: Contact
your system
administrator.

Scenario: One or
more devices have

217 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Scenarios and
Message Description and result
solution

recordings on
recording servers
that are not
upgraded to 2020
R2 or later.

Solution: Upgrade
the recording
servers to version
2020 R2 or later.

Searching for video data

The search features are available mainly on the Search tab, but they are integrated with the Live and Playback
tabs.

Search for video

The Search tab lets you search for video recordings, and - based on the search results - lets you take action, for
example by exporting.

What can you search for?

l Video sequences

l Video sequences with motion

l Bookmarked video

l Video sequences with alarms

l Video sequences with events

l Video sequences with people

l Video sequences with vehicles

l Video recorded at a certain location

Requirements

218 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l Searching for people, vehicles, and location is only available if these search categories were enabled by
your system administrator

l Searching for vehicles is also available if you have XProtect® LPR installed in your system. For more
information, ask your system administrator

The search categories Alarm s, Events, People, Vehicles, and Location are only available
if you are using one of these products:

l XProtect Corporate

l XProtect Expert

You can only combine search categories if you are using one of the products mentioned
above. For information about the features available in your XProtect VMS, see
Surveillance system differences on page 29.

Steps:

219 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Click the arrow to select a predefined time span, or define your own Custom interval.

2. In the Selected cam eras list, do one of the following to add cameras to your search:

l Use the search function to find cameras or views

l Manually select the cameras in the tree structure. To add all cameras within a view, select the
name of the view

As you add cameras, the search is run immediately.

220 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

3. Click Search for to select the search categories. You can use search categories alone or combined.

4. For each search category that you add, you can refine the search by adding search filters. For more
information about search filters, see FAQ: searching on page 353.

221 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

5. To preview the video of a search result, select the search result and, in the preview pane, click .

To play back the video sequence in full-screen mode, double-click the search
result.

222 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

6. To make the action bar appear, hover over the search results, one by one, and select the blue check box
that appears.

The blue action bar appears:

Search for motion (smart search)

When you search for video recordings with motion, you can apply smart search filters to show only search
results with motion in areas that you define.

Example

Use smart search to find video footage of a person entering through a doorway that is monitored by multiple
cameras.

Requirements

To use smart search filters, smart search must be enabled on your user profile by your system administrator.

Steps:

1. On the Search tab, select a time span.

2. Select the cameras that you want to include in your search.

3. Click Search for > Motion > N ew search. If the database has any recordings with motion within the
selected time span and cameras, the recordings appear as thumbnail images in the search results pane.

223 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. To find motion in selected areas only:

1. Below Motion, click 0 cam eras selected.

A dialog box appears with a list of the cameras that you selected.

2. Select one camera at a time and, in the red preview area, click and drag to unmask at least one
area. The system will look for motion only in that area. You can unmask multiple areas.

The sensitivity of the motion detection is defined by your system

administrator in Management Client on individual cameras. However, you
can use the slider to adjust the sensitivity. For more information, see
Motion search threshold (explained) on page 225.

3. Automatically, the search is run. Click outside the dialog to return to the search results.

224 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. To perform actions, for example bookmarking search results, hover over the search results and

select the check box . The action bar appears.

Mot ion search t h resh old (exp lain ed )

When you search for motion in selected areas of a camera, you can adjust the motion threshold. The motion
threshold determines how sensitive the motion search mechanism is:

l The higher the threshold, the more motion is required to activate motion detection. Likely, this will
produce fewer search results

l The lower the threshold, the less motion is required to activate motion detection. Likely, this will produce
more search results

Search for bookmarks

You can find incidents that are bookmarked by you or others for any number of cameras.

Steps:

1. Select the cameras that you want to include in your search.

2. Click Search for > Bookm ark > N ew search. If the database has any bookmarked recordings, they
appear as thumbnail images in the search results pane.

225 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

3. To preview the video sequence and bookmark details, select a search result and play back the video in
the preview pane on the right-hand side.

4. To view the recording in full-screen mode, double-click the search result.

5. To perform other actions, for example editing the bookmark, hover over the search result and select the

check box . The action bar is displayed.

226 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Search for alarms

When you search for video recordings associated with alarms, you can apply search filters to show only search
results with certain alarms, for example alarms in a certain state that are assigned to a specific operator.

Steps:

1. Select the cameras that you want to include in your search.

2. Click Search for > Alarm s > N ew search.

3. Apply search filters to narrow down search results. You can filter for:

l Priority

l State

l ID - Type the full ID to filter for it

l Owner

l Server - available only if you are using Milestone Federated Architecture™

If you are using Milestone Federated Architecture™, the Priority and State filters
are applied across all connected sites.

Search for events

When you search for video recordings associated with events, you can apply search filters to show only search
results with certain events, for example events that come from a specific source or server.

Steps:

1. Select the cameras that you want to include in your search.

2. Click Search for > Events > N ew search.

3. Apply search filters to narrow down search results. You can filter for:

l Source

l ID - Type the full ID to filter for it

l Server - available only if you are using Milestone Federated Architecture™

Search for people

This search category and its search filters are only available if they were enabled by your
system administrator.

227 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

When you search for video recordings that include people, you can apply search filters to show only search
results with people that have certain characteristics, for example people of a certain age or height.

1. Select the cameras that you want to include in your search.

2. Click Search for > People > N ew search.

3. Apply search filters to narrow down search results. You can filter for:

l Age - Filter for people in a certain age range

l Gender - Filter for males or females

l Height - Filter for people in a certain height range

l Face - Select the check box to limit search results to people whose face is visible

Search for vehicles

This search category and its search filters are only available if they were enabled by your
system administrator.

Searching for vehicles is also available if you have XProtect® LPR installed in your system.

For more information, ask your system administrator

When you search for video recordings that include vehicles, you can apply search filters to show only search
results with certain vehicles, for example a vehicle with a certain license plate that was issued by a certain
country.

1. Select the cameras that you want to include in your search.

2. Click Search for > Vehicles > N ew search.

3. Apply search filters to narrow down search results. You can filter for:

l Color - Filter for vehicles of certain colors

l License plate - Type a part of a license plate number or the full license plate number to filter for it

l Country - Filter for license plates that were issued by certain countries

This search filter is only available if you have XProtect® LPR installed in
your system.

l Vehicle type - Filter for types of vehicles, for example trucks

l Vehicle speed - Filter for vehicles moving at a certain speed

228 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l License plate m atch list - Filter for license plates that are part of certain license plate match lists

This search filter is only available if you have XProtect® LPR installed in
your system.

Search for video at location

This search category and its search filters are only available if they were enabled by your
system administrator.

When you search for video recordings recorded at a certain location, you can apply search filters to show only
search results in a specific location.

1. Select the cameras that you want to include in your search.

2. Click Search for > Location > N ew search.

3. Apply search filters to narrow down search results. You can filter for geographic coordinates by
specifying the latitude and longitude coordinates and the radius of the search area.

Search results, settings, and actions

This section describes the search timeline and the different settings and things you can do while searching.

For information about saving and managing searches, see Managing your searches on page 245.

Timeline on Search tab (explained)

The timeline gives you an overview of how the search results are distributed. The timeline also allows you to
navigate the search results.

The scope of the timeline changes according to the selected time span, for example Last 6 hours.

The white markers indicate where the search results are.

Individual markers may indicate that there are multiple search results. By hovering over the markers,
information is displayed about the time and the cameras that recorded the events or incidents.

To navigate the search results, click a marker. The marker turns blue, and the associated search result is
marked with a blue border.

229 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

If the marker that you select shows more than one search result, the first search result is marked.

If a marker indicates more than 10 search results, a message will inform you about the
number of search results and the number of associated cameras.

Actions available from search results (overview)

Based on your search results, there are multiple actions available. Some actions are available in the blue action
bar, others in the preview area.

The actions available may differ depending on your user rights.

Action Description

Export video and still images from multiple search results at the same time.

Create PDF reports with information about the search results, for example still images from
the video sequences.

230 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Action Description

Bookmark multiple search results at the same time.

Edit multiple bookmarks at the same time.

Add evidence locks to protect the video sequences and data from related devices, for example
audio, from being deleted.

Open multiple search results in a separate window, where you can view the video in live or
playback mode, export, create evidence locks, and retrieve recordings from devices and
cameras belonging to interconnected VMS systems.

Take multiple snapshots of your search results at the same time.

When you are previewing video, you can transfer the current time to the playback timeline.
This is useful, for example, if you want to look at related cameras on the Playback tab at the
time that an incident took place.

MIP-relat ed act ion s

There may be additional actions available, related to third-party software. The MIP SDK is used to add these
additional actions.

M erged search results (explained)

If you are using multiple search categories, and the search results overlap in time, they are merged into one. In
some situations into multiple search results. This happens when different search criteria match video from the
same camera within the same timespan. Instead of returning different search results that show basically the
same video sequences, XProtect Smart Client simply gives you one search result that contains all details, for
example the camera name, indications of event time, and search categories.

Examples:

Find vehicle on Memory Lane 15

Suppose you want to find a vehicle of the type truck on Memory Lane 15 within the last two hours. To configure
your search:

231 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Select 10 cameras placed in the right area.

2. Set Duration to Last 2 hours.

3. Add the search category Vehicles and filter on Truck.

4. Add the search category Location and filter on the geo coordinates of the address and a search radius.

5. Select the Match all criteria check box.

For more information, see Search for vehicles on page 228 or Search for video at location
on page 229.

Find bookmarked alarm

Two days ago an alarm went off in your XProtect VMS system. To make it easy to find the alarm again, you
bookmarked it. Now you want to find the bookmark again to make an export. To configure your search:

1. If you remember which camera recorded the incident, select the camera. Otherwise, select a range of
possible cameras.

2. Set Duration to Last 24 hours, or specify a Custom interval.

3. Add the search categories Bookm arks and Alarm s.

4. Select the Match all criteria check box.

For more information, see Search for bookmarks on page 225 or Search for alarms on
page 227.

M atch any or all search criteria (explained)

If you are using XProtect Corporate or XProtect Expert, you can use multiple search categories in the same
search. While configuring your search, specify whether your search must match any or all the search categories.

Matching all criteria gives you fewer but more accurate search results. In addition, if the search results overlap,
they are combined into fewer results. See also Merged search results (explained) on page 231.

Matching any criterion gives you more but less accurate search results.

232 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Actions that are normally available in the action bar may not be available for merged
search results. This happens if the action that you are trying to perform cannot be used
with one of the search categories. See also Why is the action that I need not available in
the action bar? on page 354

Start search from cameras or views

If you are looking for something specific in one or more video streams, you can start search from a single
camera, or from an entire view. The search workspace opens in a new floating window.

Steps:

1. Go to the Live or Playback tab.

2. To search a single camera:

1. Hover over the view item. The camera toolbar appears.

2. Click . A new Search window opens, and a search for recorded video starts immediately
based on the camera in the view item.

3. To search all cameras in a view:

1. Make sure the correct view is open.

2. At the top of the view, click . A new Search window opens, and a search for recorded video
starts immediately based on the cameras in the view.

4. Depending on your goal, change the time span, search categories and filters, or similar. For more
information, see Searching for video data on page 218.

Open search results in separate windows

You can open a search result in a new window. The window opens on the Playback tab allowing you to
investigate the incident using the full timeline and perform other actions, for example exporting video.

233 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Hover over the search result and select the blue check box that appears.

The blue action bar appears:

2. Click to open the search result in a new floating window on the Playback tab.

3. To move the window to a different monitor, click and drag the window and release when appropriate.

Preview video from search results

To determine whether you have found the video sequence you were looking for, you can do a quick preview.

Steps:

234 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. When you have run a search on the Search tab, select a search result. A still image from the associated
video sequence appears in the preview area.

2. Click to play back the video.

3. To preview the video in full-screen mode, double-click the individual search results. Double-click again to
return to the search results.

4. Scroll with your mouse wheel to zoom in or out. You can even click and drag to zoom in on a specific area.

235 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

The yellow marker in the timeline indicates the event time. Hover over the marker to view
the event time.

Multiple markers appear in the same timeline when search results are combined.

This happens, for example, if you have searched for Motion and Vehicles, and the search
result match both criteria. In this example, one marker would indicate when the motion
started. The other marker would indicate when the vehicle was identified as a vehicle.

Show or hide bounding boxes during search

During search, bounding boxes help you identify objects, for example based on motion detection. You can turn
the bounding boxes on or off.

The bounding boxes mostly appear in the thumbnail images of your search results.
However, if your VMS system is configured to search for metadata, bounding boxes may
also appear when you preview video from the search results.

Steps:

1. Go to the Search tab and run a search.

2. In the upper-right corner below Bounding boxes, do one of the following:

l Select Show to make the bounding boxes appear

l Select Hide to hide the bounding boxes

Sorting options
You can sort your search results by:

236 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

This sorting option is only available if you are using one of these products:

l XProtect Corporate

l XProtect Expert

Relevance means different things depending on how your search is configured:

l None or one search category selected - the search result with the newest event
time is displayed first
Relevance
l Multiple search categories selected/Match any criterion - the search result with
most matching search categories is displayed first. If two search results have the
same number of matching search categories, the search result with the newest
event time is displayed first

l Multiple search categories selected/Match all criteria - the search result with most
event times is displayed first. If two search results have the same number of event
times, the search result with the newest event time appears first

N ewest
Search results with the most recent event time appear first.
event tim e

Oldest event
Search results with the oldest event time appear first.
tim e

N ewest start
Search results with the most recent start time appear first.
tim e

Oldest start
Search results with the oldest start time appear first.
tim e

Locate cameras while searching

If your VMS system is configured to use smart map , you can view the geographical location of the cameras in a
smart map preview while searching for video and related data.

Requirements

237 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l You are using one of these XProtect products:

l XProtect Corporate

l XProtect Expert

For information about the features available in your XProtect VMS, see
Surveillance system differences on page 29.

l Cameras must be geographically positioned. If in doubt, ask your system administrator

Steps:

238 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Select the search result that you are interested in.

2. In the preview area, click Location. The camera is displayed in its geographic context.

239 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

3. To get an overview of the surroundings, use the scroll wheel on your mouse to zoom out, or pan away
from the camera position.

4. To return to the camera, click Re-center.

Cam era icon s (exp lain ed )

Some of the icons described in this topic appear only in the Location area on the Search tab, whereas icons with
red are associated with alarms and also appear in views that contain the smart map. The icons differ depending
on the situation.

In the table below:

l Gray background indicates that you have not selected the camera

l Blue background indicates that you have selected the camera

Icon Tabs Description

Search The camera is not associated with any of the search results.

You have selected the search result that the camera is

Search
associated with.

Live, Playback, and

This is a source camera: a camera that triggered an alarm.
Search

240 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Icon Tabs Description

This is a related camera: a camera associated with the

Live, Playback, and selected source camera, which triggered the alarm.
Search
This icon only appears after you select a source camera.

This is both a source camera and a related camera. This

camera:

Live, Playback, and l Triggered an alarm, and

Search l Is associated with the selected source camera, which
triggered the alarm

This icon only appears after you select a source camera.

Source cameras and related cameras are defined in XProtect Management Client as part
of the alarm definition.

Bookmark search results

To document or share incidents that you have found by searching, you can bookmark multiple search results at
the same time. Bookmarking incidents allows you or other operators to find the incidents later.

Steps:

241 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. For each search result that you want to bookmark, hover over it and select the blue check box .

2. In the blue action bar, click . A window appears. The picture reflects the situation where you have
selected two search results.

3. Select the search results one by one to add details to the bookmarks and follow these steps:

1. To change the default time span, drag the handles in the timeline to a new position.

2. Enter a headline and possibly also a description of the incident.

3. If you want the same headline or description to apply to all the bookmarks, click:

l Apply headline to all in list

l Apply description to all in list

4. Click OK to save the bookmarks. A progress bar informs you when the bookmarks are created.

242 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

If XProtect Smart Wall is set up in your system, click Display on Sm art Wall to send a
bookmark to a monitor in a Smart Wall.

Edit bookmarks from search results

You can edit the details of bookmarks in your system, for example the time span, headline, and description. You
can also edit multiple bookmarks at the same time.

Requirements

You must have the user rights to edit bookmarks. This is done by your system administrator in Management
Client under Roles > Overall Security.

Steps:

1. On the Search tab, find the bookmarks that you want to edit. When you perform the search, make sure
that you have selected Search for > Bookm arks.

2. For each bookmark that you want to edit, hover over it and select the blue check box .

243 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

3. In the blue action bar, click . A window appears.

4. Select the search results one by one to edit the details, for example time span, headline, and description.

5. Click OK to save your changes. A progress bar informs you when the changes are saved.

If XProtect Smart Wall is set up in your system, click Display on Sm art Wall to send the
bookmarks a video wall.

Take snapshots from search results

To save and share still images from your search results, you can take multiple snapshots at the same time.

Steps:

244 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. When you have performed your search, hover over the search results, one by one, and select the check

box .

2. In the blue action bar, click and select Create snapshot. A progress bar informs you when the
snapshots are created.

3. To locate the snapshots on your computer, go to the location that is specified in the Settings dialog >
Application > Path to snapshots.

Transfer the search time to the playback timeline

When you are previewing a search result on the Search tab, you can synchronize the time on the Playback tab
with the time in the preview timeline. This is useful if, for example, you have found an incident, and you want to
investigate what happened at that time on other cameras.

1. On the Search tab, select a search result.

2. In the preview area, click to transfer the current time to the playback timeline on the Playback tab.
You will stay on the Search tab.

3. To check other related cameras, click the Playback tab and select a view that contains the cameras that
you are interested in. The timeline is now in sync with the search result.

Managing your searches

This feature is only available in certain XProtect VMS systems. For information about the
features in your system, see Surveillance system differences on page 29.

You can save your searches to reuse them and share them with other operators. Depending on your user rights,
you can also access and use the searches made by others, unless they are private. When a search has been
saved, you can:

245 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l Change the name and description, and make the search private or public.

l Modify how the search is configured, for example by adding or removing cameras or by adjusting the
search categories.

l Delete the searches as they become obsolete.

Save searches
You can save your searches, so you can reuse them later or share them with other operators.

Requirements

To save new searches that will be available to other users of your VMS system, the Create public searches user
right must be enabled on your role in XProtect Management Client.

Steps:

1. On the Search tab, configure your search. See Searching for video data on page 218.

2. Click to the right of Search filters.

246 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

3. In the list that appears, click Save as. A window appears.

4. Select a name that will make it easy for you to find the search, and possibly also a description. Later,
when you use keywords to find the search, the search includes both the N am e and the Description fields.

5. To make the search visible only to you, select the Private search check box.

6. Click Save. A progress bar informs you when the search is saved.

To get an overview of saved searches, click and then Open and m anage searches.

Find and open saved searches

Requirements

To find and open public searches, the Read public searches user right must be enabled on your role in XProtect
Management Client.

Steps:

247 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. On the Search tab, click to the right of Search filters.

2. In the list that appears, click Open and m anage searches. A window appears.

3. Find and double-click the search that you want to open, or click Open. Immediately, the search is run.

If many searches are listed, you can use keywords to find the search. The search
includes both the N am e field and the Description field.

4. You can modify the search, for example by adding cameras. Click > Save to save the changes.

248 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Edit or delete saved searches

This feature is only available in certain XProtect VMS systems. For information about the
features in your system, see Surveillance system differences on page 29.

You can change the details of a saved search, or you can change how the search is configured, for example the
search categories.

If the searches become obsolete, you can delete them.

Requirements

The following user rights are enabled on your role in XProtect Management Client:

l To find and open public searches, the Read public searches user right must be enabled

l To edit a public search, the Edit public searches right must be enabled

l To delete a public search, the Delete public searches right must be enabled

Learn how to:

Edit the details of a saved search

1. On the Search tab, click to the right of Search filters.

2. In the list that appears, click Open and m anage searches. A window appears.

3. Find and select the search that you want to change.

4. Make your changes, for example by entering a name for the search, and click Save.

Change how a search is configured

249 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. On the Search tab, click to the right of Search filters.

2. In the list that appears, click Open and m anage searches. A window appears.

3. Find and double-click the search that you want to open, or click Open. Immediately, the search is run.

If many searches are listed, use the search function to find the search.

4. Modify the search, for example by adding cameras, and click > Save.

Delete a saved search

1. Open the Open and m anage searches window as described above.

2. Find and select the search that you want to delete.

3. Click Delete search.

Bookmarks (usage)

This feature is only available in certain XProtect VMS systems. For information about the
features in your system, see Surveillance system differences on page 29.

Bookmarks allow you to quickly find or share relevant video sequences with other users of the system. Detailed
bookmarks make it easier to find the bookmarks after creating them. To enable details, see Enable detailed
bookmarks on page 73.

Bookmarks (explained)
You can bookmark incidents in live or recorded video. A bookmark is essentially a small video clip. When you
bookmark an incident, the program automatically assigns it an ID and the user who created it. Bookmarks are
searchable, so operators can easily find them later.

A bookmark video clip typically contains video from a few seconds before and a few seconds after the
bookmarked incident (specified by the system administrator) to ensure that the incident is recorded, regardless
of any delays.

250 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

You can find and edit bookmarked video by using:

l The search functionality on the Search tab.

l The timeline on the Playback tab.

Depending on your user rights, the ability to add bookmarks from some cameras may be
restricted. You may be able to view bookmarks even if you cannot add them, and vice
versa.

Bookmark window
The Bookmark window appears only when you have enabled detailed bookmarks. See Enable detailed
bookmarks on page 73.

The layout of the bookmark window changes depending on where you are in XProtect Smart Client, and if you
are creating just one or multiple bookmarks. Click below to see images of the window.

Single bookmark

251 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Multiple bookmarks

252 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Fields in the Bookm ark window.

N am e Description

Bookm ark ID A number that automatically is assigned to the bookmark.

Added by The person who created the bookmark.

Although the bookmark time and the clip start and end time are specified by the system
The tim eline administrator, you can change these settings. To change the time, drag the indicators on
the timeline (see Time navigation controls (overview) on page 196) to the required time.

253 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N am e Description

Start tim e: The suggested start time of the bookmark clip is a number of seconds before
the bookmark time, specified by the system administrator.

Bookm ark tim e: The time in the video clip that you bookmarked.

End tim e: The suggested end time of the bookmark clip is a number of seconds after the
bookmark time, specified by the system administrator.

Headline Lets you specify a headline containing a maximum of 50 characters.

Apply Only visible if you are creating multiple bookmarks.

headline to all
in list Click the text to use the same headline for all bookmarks.

Description Lets you specify a description.

Apply Only visible if you are creating multiple bookmarks.

description to
all in list Click the text to use the same description for all bookmarks.

Add or edit bookmarks

You can add bookmarks to live and recorded video. If you have enabled detailed bookmarks, you can give the
bookmark a name and a description. You can even adjust the time span. Later, you can find and edit the
bookmark details.

Requirements:

Detailed bookmarks must be enabled. For more information, see Enable detailed bookmarks on page 73.

Steps:

1. Select the required camera in the view.

2. Click the bookmark icon . With details enabled, the Bookm ark window appears where you can add a
detailed description of the incident.

3. Enter a name for the bookmark.

254 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. The length of a bookmark clip is determined on the surveillance system server, but you can change this
by dragging the timeline indicators.

5. (optional) Describe the incident.

6. Click OK.

To find and edit the bookmark later, go to the Search tab and search for bookmarks. See
Search for bookmarks on page 225.

Delete bookmarks
You can delete bookmarks created by yourself or others. If you delete a bookmark, it is removed from the
database, and you can no longer find it.

Requirements

You must have the user rights to delete bookmarks. This user right is controlled by your system administrator in
Management Client under Roles > Overall Security.

Steps:

1. On the Search tab, find the bookmarks that you want to delete.

2. In the search results, hover over each of these bookmarks and select the blue check box .

3. In the blue action bar, click and select Delete bookm ark. A window appears.

4. Click Yes to delete the bookmarks.

There may be restrictions in your system preventing you from deleting certain
bookmarks. In that case, you will be notified.

255 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Alarms and events (usage)

Alarms (explained)

This feature is only available in certain XProtect VMS systems. For information about the
features in your system, see Surveillance system differences on page 29.

On the XProtect VMS server, virtually any kind of incident or technical problem - events - can be set up to trigger
an alarm. Alarms and events can all be viewed on the Alarm Manager tab, which provides a central overview of
your VMS incidents, status, and possible technical problems.

You cannot set up alarm triggers in the XProtect Smart Client. Your system administrator does this when
configuring the XProtect VMS system.

The Alarm Manager tab is either displayed or hidden depending on the settings defined
by your system administrator.

The Alarm Manager tab provides a dedicated view for your alarm or event handling. The tab itself displays the
number of active alarms. More than nine alarms are shown with a . The Alarm Manager tab includes an
alarm list, an alarm preview for previewing video associated with individual alarms or events, and possibly also a
map that displays the geographical location of the camera associated with the alarm.

Alarm list (explained)

The Alarm List displays incoming alarms by default, with the most recent alarms at the top of the list.
Alternatively, the alarm list can display a list of MIP plug-in and analytic events, for example, access control or
license plate recognition.

Alarms or events with associated video are displayed with an icon . To preview a still image from the time of
the alarm or event, hover over the icon. To preview recorded video from the camera or cameras associated with
the alarm or event, select the alarm or event in the list. To stop a repeating alarm sound, select the alarm
associated with the sound in the list.

You can decide how you want the list to appear, you can filter the columns, you can drag the columns to different
positions, and you can right-click to show or hide certain columns.

The event list does not display system- or user-generated events, such as motion
detection or archive failure.

The list is updated every 3 seconds.

256 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

To see a list of events, enter setup mode and select Event in the Properties pane. See
also Alarm list settings on page 82.

Servers in alarm list (explained)

On the left side of the alarm list, you can view the servers that the alarms originate from. Many XProtect
VMS systems only have a single server, but some systems may consist of several servers in a hierarchy. All the
servers you have access to are listed, and you can filter alarms by servers.

Alarm states (explained)

Alarms can be in one of the following states: New, In progress, On hold, or Closed. You can see the state of each
alarm in the Alarm List, in the State N am e column. The Filters pane lets you filter according to certain criteria.
Initially, all alarms will be in the N ew state, but when an alarm is being handled, its state is updated.

Filter alarms
There are several ways you can filter the alarm list, so it displays just the alarms or events that you are
interested in.

Steps:

1. In the toolbar of the alarm list, click the Custom (filter applied) or N o filter text. The text may differ
depending on the filter selected.

257 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

2. Enter filter criteria on any of the columns you want to filter on. For example, if you enter a user ID in the
ID field, the list will only display alarms assigned to that particular user.

3. You can combine filters, for example State nam e and Owner (assigned to).

4. To return to the unfiltered alarm list, click the Clear filter button.

5. To sort the content of the alarm list, click the title of the column.

If your alarm handling views contain map content, you can also filter the alarm list by
right-clicking an element (camera, server, or similar) on the map, then selecting Show
Alarm s. This will make the alarm list show only alarms from the selected element.

Responding to alarms

View in g an d ed it in g d et ails of an alarm

You can respond to alarms in different ways. You can go to any view where you have added the Alarm List and
double-click an alarm. The alarm opens in a separate window, where you can preview the alarm incident and live
video. You can also respond to the alarm by changing the fields in the table below.

Depending on how your XProtect VMS system is configured, you may also receive alarm desktop notifications.
Such notifications stay on your screen for 15 seconds. When you click a notification, it takes you directly to the
Alarm Manager tab and opens the alarm window.

Field Description

The state of the alarm indicates if someone has addressed the event. You can change the
State state of the alarm. Typically, you would change the state from N ew to In progress, and
then later to On hold or Closed.

Priority Lets you change the priority of the alarm.

Lets you assign the alarm to a user in your organization, including yourself. The person to
Assigned to whom you assign the alarm becomes the owner of the alarm, and will appear in Owner
column of the alarm list.

Write comments and remarks that are added to the Activities section. Comments typically
relate to the actions you have taken. For example, “Suspect detained by Security”, “Suspect
Com m ent
handed over to police,” or “False alarm.” The Com m ent field appears at the bottom of the
window.

258 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Field Description

The activities summarize how you have handled the alarm. Any changes you or your
colleagues make to alarm state or priority, any reassigning of alarms between users as
well as any comments added will automatically be included in the Activities section.

Activities Depending on the configuration of the XProtect VMS server, the

alarm can contain instructions about what to do when receiving the
alarm. The instructions are defined on the server-side as part of the
alarm definition. When that is the case, the activities are
automatically displayed when you edit the alarm.

Lets you print a report that contains information about the alarm, such as the alarm
Print
history and a still image from the time of the alarm, if an image is available.

Ackn ow led g e alarm s

When you have received an alarm, you can acknowledge it to record that you will do something about it.

Steps:

1. In the alarm list, right-click the alarm and select Acknowledge. The alarm state changes to In progress.

You can only acknowledge new alarms.

2. To acknowledge multiple alarms simultaneously, press and hold down the CTRL key, and then select the
alarms you want to acknowledge.

3. Double-click an alarm to edit the details of the alarm, for example assigning the alarm to someone and
adding instructions.

Disab le all n ew alarm s on select ed even t t yp es

If an event is triggering false alarms, you might want to disable all new alarms on this type of event for some
time.

For example, if there is a lot of movement around a camera and this is causing several false alarms, you can
disable alarms on motion detection for this camera for 10 minutes. Then, motion detection for the camera will
not trigger alarms for 10 minutes. This way, false alarms will not disturb you, and you can focus on the alarms
that need your attention.

259 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Disabling alarms affects all operators who are connected to the XProtect VMS system that
you are also connected to.

You can disable all new alarms using the Alarm Manager or a map.

260 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Using the Alarm Manager: in the alarm list, right-click an alarm and select Disable all new alarm s.

Using a map: right-click an alarm and select Disable all new alarm s > Disable.

The Disable all new alarm s window appears.

2. In the Events that will not trigger alarm s list , select which event types should not trigger alarms.

3. Specify until when or for how long the selected event types should not trigger alarms .

261 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. Optionally, add a comment about why you are disabling alarms on the selected event types .

Ig n ore alarm s on m ap s

On a map, you can ignore an alarm for an element for a duration of time. For example, if a camera is being
repaired and therefore disconnected, you might want to ignore the error showing up on the map during the
repair. When you ignore an alarm on a map, this does not remove the alarm from the alarm list, just the map.

Close alarm s

After acknowledging an alarm, typically you assign it to someone who investigates what is going on. During that
time, the alarm will be in the state In progress. After handling the alarm, you can close it.

To close an alarm, in the Alarm List, do one of either:

l Right-click the alarm and select Close.

l Double-click the alarm, and in the State list, select Closed.

Print alarm reports

You can print a report with information about the alarm, including the alarm history and, if available, a still image
from the time of the alarm. If you have selected multiple alarms in the alarm list, you cannot use this feature.

Steps:

1. In the alarm list, right-click the alarm.

2. Select Print. A window appears.

3. To add a note, enter the text in the N ote field.

262 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. Click the Print button.

Get statistics on alarms

Get statistical data about the alarms triggered in your XProtect VMS system over the:

l Last 24 hours

l Last 7 days

l Last 30 days

l Last 6 m onths

l Last year

The Alarm Report window shows two graphs that display the number of alarms filtered by categories, for
example Priority or State, allowing you to compare the two graphs side by side.

Steps:

1. In the Alarm List, click the Reports button. A window appears.

2. Above the graphs, select the timespan, for example Last 24 hours.

3. In the Select report list, select one of these categories:

l Category

l State

l Priority

l Reasons for closing

l Site

l Response tim e

4. For each graph, select a sub-filter. For example if you selected State, you can select N ew in the first
graph and In progress in the second. The graphs are populated.

5. To print the graphs as a PDF report, click .

Alarms on maps (explained)

If your alarm handling view contains one or more map positions, you can view alarms on the maps too. Maps
display alarms based on the geographical location of the camera, server or other device triggering the alarms,
so you can instantly see where the alarm originates from. You can right-click and acknowledge, disable, or
suppress the alarm directly from the map.

263 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Camera elements display video in thumbnail format when you move your mouse over it. When used together
with alarms, the graphical elements on maps display red circles around them if alarms occur. For example, if an
alarm associated with a particular camera occurs, the graphical element representing that camera will
immediately get a red circle around it, and you can then click the camera element and not only view video from
the camera, but also handle the alarm through a menu that appears.

If red is not an ideal color for signifying alarms on your maps, you can change this color.

Now, say the camera which has an alarm associated with it, is located on a street level map, but you are viewing
a city level map. How will you then notice the alarm? No problem, thanks to hot zones—graphical
representations linking different map hierarchy levels together. If an alarm is detected on the street level map,
the hot zone on the city level map will then turn red, indicating that there is an alarm on a lower level map—even
if there are map levels in between.

To return to an alarm list mode where you can see alarms from more than just the one element, click the
required server, priority or state in the alarm list.

Alarms on smart maps (explained)

Smart map displays alarms if they are triggered by a device and if the device is added to the smart map. See
also Adding, deleting, or editing devices on smart map on page 96.

For more information about smart map icons, see Camera icons (explained) on page 240.

Events (explained)
An event is a predefined incident on the XProtect VMS system that can be set up to trigger an alarm. Events are
either predefined system incidents or user-defined events, for example analytics events, generic events, or user-
defined. Events are not necessarily linked to an alarm, but they can be.

Typically, events are activated automatically and in the background, for example, as a result of input from
external sensors, detected motion or by data from other applications. However, events can also be manually
activated. Events are used by the VMS system to trigger actions, such as starting or stopping recording,
changing video settings, activating output, or combinations of actions. When you activate an event from your
XProtect Smart Client, it automatically triggers actions on the VMS system, for example recording on a particular
camera with a particular frame rate for a particular period of time.

Your system administrator determines what happens when you manually activate an event.

Man u ally act ivat e even t s

The list of selectable events is grouped by server, and the camera or device that the event is associated with.
You can manually activate an event. There is no confirmation once you have activated an event.

264 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. On the Live tab, expand the Event pane.

2. Click Activate.

3. Alternatively, if available for the camera, click the overlay button that appears when you move your
mouse over the image.

Hierarchically, global events will appear under the relevant server. If a server is listed with
a red icon, it is unavailable and you cannot activate events on it.

Privacy masking (usage)

This feature is only available in certain XProtect VMS systems. For information about the
features in your system, see Surveillance system differences on page 29.

Privacy masking (explained)

You can use privacy masking to protect private or public areas in live and recorded video by blocking out certain
areas in the field of view of a camera. For example, if a camera overlooks the windows of a private residence,
you can apply privacy masks to the windows.

In this example, privacy masks are applied to five windows in an adjacent building.

In this example, two types of privacy masks are applied. The solid gray area is covered permanently while the
blurred area can be lifted, but only by users with sufficient rights to lift privacy masks.

265 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Privacy masks are applied to areas in cameras' field of view by system administrators, and as such you cannot
add or remove them from views in XProtect Smart Client. You can, however, temporarily remove liftable privacy
masks from the views, depending on your surveillance system and user rights.

You can also add additional privacy masks when you export. For more information, see Mask areas in recordings
during export on page 200.

If you export video that contains privacy masks, the export process may take significantly
longer and the export file size may be larger than usual, particularly if you export in
XProtect format.

Lift and apply privacy masks

This feature is only available in certain XProtect VMS systems. For information about the
features in your system, see Surveillance system differences on page 29.

It can sometimes be necessary to view the video beneath the areas covered by privacy masks. This is only
possible for privacy masks that your system administrator has defined as liftable privacy masks in the
Management Client and if you have the necessary user rights.

If you do not have the necessary user rights, you will be asked for additional authorization. Contact a person who
has the rights to authorize you, so he or she can enter their credentials. If you do not know who can authorize
you, ask your system administrator.

To lift privacy masks:

266 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. On the Live or Playback tab, click More > Lift privacy m asks on the application toolbar.

If you have the rights to lift privacy masks, liftable privacy masks now disappear for all cameras and
permanent privacy masks remain.

If you do not have sufficient rights, a dialog box appears.

267 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

2. Contact a person who has the rights to authorize you, so he or she can enter their credentials.

Liftable privacy masks disappear and permanent privacy masks remain.

3. The lift ends (times out) after 30 minutes, if your system administrator has not changed the default value,
but you can apply the masks any time. On the application toolbar, click More > Apply privacy m asks.

If you log out of XProtect Smart Client with lifted privacy masks and log in again, the
masks will always be reapplied.

PTZ and fisheye lenses (usage)

PTZ and fisheye lenses are described in the same section, because they are closely related.

Fisheye lens images (explained)

If your views include fisheye cameras or lenses, you can navigate fisheye cameras images by clicking either the
arrow mouse pointer (the virtual joystick) or the PTZ navigation buttons that appear inside the image (some
types of fisheye cameras have their own zoom buttons). The PTZ middle navigation button lets you quickly move
the camera to its default position.

Zoom in and out using the plus and m inus buttons. If your mouse has a scroll wheel, you can use scroll to zoom
in and out. Click the scroll wheel or middle mouse button to return to the default view.

268 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

On individual mice, the scroll wheel may have been reserved for special purposes, in
which case zooming may not be possible. Refer to your mouse configuration manual.

You cannot use presets (see Move cameras to PTZ preset positions on page 270) for navigating fisheye lens
images but you can save a favorite position.

Define a favorite fisheye lens position

You can only save positions for fisheye cameras.

1. Navigate to the position in the fisheye lens image that you want to save.

2. On the camera toolbar, click More > Save Fisheye Lens Positions to save the position.

3. When you want to return to the fisheye lens position, on the camera toolbar, click More > Load Fisheye
Lens Positions.

PTZ and fisheye lens images (explained)

The use of fisheye cameras is not supported by all surveillance systems and some fisheye cameras are not
supported by the 64-bit version of Microsoft Windows.

Depending on your user rights, access to pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) controls from some cameras may be restricted.
PTZ features may be limited when connecting to selected surveillance systems.

For information about the features available in your XProtect VMS, see Surveillance
system differences on page 29.

269 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

PTZ images (explained)

If your views (including those in a carousel or a map preview) contain PTZ camera images, you can control the
PTZ cameras using the overlay PTZ navigation button.

In Setup mode, on the Properties pane, you can define the PTZ click mode for the view item. You can choose
between click-to-center and virtual joystick. Click-to-center is the default mode when you start using XProtect
Smart Client. You can change the default selection in XProtect Smart Client settings (see Settings in XProtect
Smart Client on page 33).

Most PTZ cameras support joystick and point-and-click control. You can customize (see
Joystick settings on page 42) the joystick control.

You can also control most PTZ cameras simply by pointing and clicking inside the camera images. If you see a
set of crosshairs when placing your mouse pointer over the images from a PTZ camera, the camera supports
point-and-click control.

Crosshairs indicate point-and-click control. For some cameras, crosshairs may look different.

Some cameras have crosshairs surrounded by a square. When this is the case, you can zoom in on an area by
dragging a square around the area in the image you want to magnify. For such cameras, zoom level is controlled
by holding down the SHIFT key on your keyboard while moving the mouse up or down; this will display a zoom
level slider inside the image.

M ove cameras to PTZ preset positions

To make the PTZ camera move to a predefined position, select a PTZ preset from the list of available positions
defined for the PTZ camera.

1. On the Live tab, on the camera toolbar, click the PTZ icon to open the PTZ menu.

2. Select a PTZ preset in the menu to move the camera to the required position. The icon turns green.

If you select the preset Hom e, the camera moves to its default position.

Locked PTZ presets (explained)

Depending on your surveillance system (see Surveillance system differences on page 29), you may experience
that a PTZ preset is locked.

A system administrator can lock a PTZ preset to protect it from being renamed or deleted or to avoid that
someone changes its position. The system administrator decides whether a PTZ preset is locked or unlocked.

270 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Starting, stopping, or pausing PTZ patrolling

With certain XProtect VMS systems, you can manually start and stop a patrolling. You can always pause an
ongoing patrolling.

St op PTZ p at rollin g

A PTZ camera can continuously move between a number of PTZ presets according to a schedule. You can stop
an ongoing system patrolling.

Only stop system patrolling when there is an important reason to do so. Normally your
system administrator has planned the patrolling carefully to meet your organization's
surveillance needs.

1. On the Live tab, select the required view.

2. On the camera toolbar, click the PTZ icon to open the PTZ menu.

3. Select Stop PTZ patrolling and you can patrol manually.

4. To resume the system patrolling, select the Stop PTZ patrolling command again.

Man u al p at rollin g (exp lain ed )

Depending on your surveillance system (see Surveillance system differences on page 29), you can start and stop
patrolling manually.

You may want to start a patrolling manually if, for example, the system patrolling does not screen an area of a
room properly or there is no system patrolling. If the camera is already patrolling, you need a higher PTZ priority
than the patrolling user or rule-based patrolling to be able to start a manual patrolling session.

Patrolling profiles can be created by your system administrator, other users, or yourself (see Patrolling profiles
(configuration) on page 79), if you have the necessary user rights.

Users with a higher PTZ priority than you can take control of the camera while you are running a manual
patrolling. When they release the session again, the system resumes your manual patrolling.

271 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

With a sufficient PTZ priority, you can stop manual patrolling started by other users by clicking the patrolling
profile, by pausing it (see Pause patrolling on page 273) or starting another manual patrolling. You can always
stop a manual patrolling that you have started.

St art an d st op m an u al p at rollin g

You can only start and stop PTZ patrolling manually with certain XProtect VMS systems. See Surveillance system
differences on page 29.

Steps:

1. In the view, select the PTZ camera that you would like to start patrolling on.

2. On the camera toolbar, click the PTZ icon to open the PTZ menu.

3. Below the Manage PTZ presets entry, you find the list of patrolling profiles configured for this camera.

Example of a PTZ menu

4. Select the patrolling profile you want to start.

While the patrolling profile is running, there is a check mark in front of it for all users. The PTZ icon
turns green for you and red for all other users, so they can see that someone controls the camera.

5. To stop the manual patrolling, select the profile again.

The system resumes its regular patrolling or the camera is made available for other users.

272 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

6. If the camera is available and you have the sufficient PTZ rights, you can take control of the camera, by
clicking on the video within the view item or moving your joystick. You keep the control until you have not
done any movements for 15 seconds.

The timeout for manual control is 15 seconds by default, but your system
administrator can change it.

7. To control the camera for a longer period, select Pause patrolling (see Pause patrolling on page 273)
from the PTZ menu.

Pau se p at rollin g

Depending on your surveillance system (see Surveillance system differences on page 29), you can pause a
patrolling.

If you have the necessary PTZ priority, you can pause a system patrolling or a manual patrolling started by
another user. You can always pause your own manual patrolling. This can be useful when you need a longer
timeout to control the camera.

273 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. In the view, select the PTZ camera that you would like to pause patrolling on.

2. On the camera toolbar, click the PTZ icon to open the PTZ menu.

3. Click Pause patrolling.

While patrolling is paused, there is a check mark in front of the Pause patrolling menu item for all
users. The PTZ icon turns green for you and red for all other users, so they can see that someone
controls the camera.

If you start a manual patrolling, you lose the pause patrolling session.

4. To stop pausing, select Pause patrolling again.

The system resumes its previous patrolling or the camera is made available for other users.

If a user with a lower PTZ priority than you has started a manual patrolling, for example Weekday, you can
pause it and take control of the camera:

1. Click Pause patrolling.

While you have paused another user's manual patrolling, there is a check mark in front of the Pause
patrolling menu item and the patrolling profile for all users. The PTZ icon turns green for you and red for
the other users, so they can see that someone controls the camera.

274 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

2. To stop pausing, select Pause patrolling again.

The system resumes to the manual patrolling, in this example Weekday.

Patrolling is paused for 10 minutes by default, but your system administrator may
have changed this.

Reserved PTZ sessions (explained)

Depending on your surveillance system (see Surveillance system differences on page 29), you can reserve PTZ
sessions.

Administrators with security rights to run a reserved PTZ session can run the PTZ camera in this mode. This
prevents other users from taking control over the camera. In a reserved PTZ session, the standard PTZ priority
system is disregarded to avoid that users with a higher PTZ priority interrupt the session.

You can operate the camera in a reserved PTZ session both from XProtect Smart Client and the Management
Client.

To reserve a PTZ session can be useful, if you need to make urgent updates or maintenance to a PTZ camera or
its presets without being interrupted by other users.

You cannot start a reserved PTZ session, if a user with a higher priority than yours
controls the camera, or if another user has already reserved the camera.

Reserve PTZ session s

1. On the Live tab, select the required view item.

2. On the camera toolbar, click the PTZ icon to open the PTZ menu.

3. Select Reserve PTZ session. If you have started a manual patrolling it automatically stops.
The PTZ camera is now reserved to you, and the timer shows the remaining time of the session.

Remember to release the session when done, as the PTZ camera will remain reserved
until the current session times out.

Release PTZ session s

When you are done controlling a PTZ camera, you can manually release the PTZ session, so other users with
lower priority can take control over the camera or the system can resume its regular patrolling. Otherwise, the
camera will not be available until the session times out.

275 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. On the camera toolbar for the PTZ camera that you are controlling, click the PTZ icon to open the
PTZ menu. (The green color indicates that you currently run the PTZ session).

2. In the menu, select Release PTZ session.

The PTZ session is released and available for other users or system patrolling, indicated by the PTZ icon
turning gray .

Virtual joystick and PTZ overlay buttons (explained)

If your views include fisheye cameras or lenses, or PTZ devices (see PTZ and fisheye lens images (explained) on
page 269), you can navigate the images by clicking either the arrow mouse pointer (the virtual joystick) or the
PTZ navigation buttons that appear inside the image.

The virtual joystick

PTZ overlay

If you don't want the camera toolbar to pop up when you move your mouse over the view,
press and hold the CTRL key while moving the mouse.

Audio (usage)

Audio (explained)

Support for specific audio features may vary from system to system (see Surveillance
system differences on page 29). Access to recorded audio, or certain recorded audio
features, may be restricted depending on your user rights. Ask your system administrator
if in doubt.

276 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

XProtect Smart Client supports both incoming and outgoing audio. You can listen to live recordings from
microphones attached to cameras and use loudspeakers connected to cameras to talk to audiences. When you
play back recorded video, you can hear the corresponding audio if the cameras have microphones, speakers, or
both, attached. When you select a camera or view, the corresponding microphone or speaker is also selected by
default.

The XProtect VMS system can record incoming audio from microphones attached to cameras, even if no video is
being recorded.

If your views contain maps, these maps may contain microphones, speakers, or both. You
can listen to audio by clicking the relevant microphone or speaker element. Click and hold
down the mouse button for as long you want to listen or talk.

Talk to an audience
Talking to audiences through speakers attached to cameras is possible by using:

l The Audio pane on the left-hand side

l Overlay buttons

l Speaker functionality on maps

Outgoing audio transmitted through speakers attached to cameras may be recorded, but only on certain
XProtect systems. See also Surveillance system differences on page 29.

Smart map (usage)

Smart map (explained)

This feature is only available in certain XProtect VMS systems. For information about the
features in your system, see Surveillance system differences on page 29.

Smart map lets you view and access devices at multiple locations around the world in a geographically correct
way. Unlike maps, where you had a different map for each location, smart map gives you the big picture in a
single view.

You can zoom out to see all of your locations in multiple cities, regions, countries and continents, and quickly go
to each location to view video from the cameras.

Example

You can preview footage from cameras at your sales office in Rome, then zoom out, pan across the world with a
single drag, and then zoom in to the cameras in your office in Los Angeles.

277 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

One key benefit of a smart map is the spatial reference data behind-the-scenes. For more information, see
Geographic backgrounds (explained) on page 86.

Smart map and alarms (explained)

Smart map displays alarms if they are triggered by a device and if the device is added to the smart map. See
also Adding, deleting, or editing devices on smart map on page 96.

Depending on your user rights, you may be able to see alarms on smart maps.

Smart map and search (explained)

While searching for video and related data on the Search tab, you can locate the devices geographically in the
preview area:

278 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

When you select a search result, the smart map zooms in on the associated device in its geographic location.
You may need to zoom out to get a better overview of the surroundings.

If the device is placed somewhere inside a multistory building, an indication of the level of the device appears:

279 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

If a device is visible on multiple levels, only the first level specified is displayed, from the
bottom and up.

Grouping of devices (explained)

When cameras and other types of devices are placed close to each other and you zoom out, the devices are
grouped and displayed visually as circular icons.

280 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

The cluster shows the number of devices inside the cluster. As you zoom in again, for example by double-clicking
the cluster, it turns into devices and possibly sub-clusters.

Clusters turn blue when you select them.

281 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

If a cluster contains different types of devices, for example cameras and microphones, then the cluster only
shows the number of devices. However, if a cluster contains only one type of device, then the cluster shows both
the type of device and the number of devices. This scenario is illustrated in the following image:

If you see a cluster that looks this way, only some of the devices inside the cluster are selected:

You have different options when you right-click a cluster - or one or more selected devices - for example Live
preview:

The options differ depending on the situation. For example, you can only remove devices
in setup mode.

282 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

MIP elements do not cluster with any type of device. They only cluster with MIP elements
of the same type.

Example 1: If an area has two cameras and one MIP element, the cluster will look as
follows:

Example 2: If an area has two MIP elements of different types, there will be no cluster.

In addition, MIP elements have their own layer that you can turn on or off by clicking
Show or hide layers and custom overlays in the smart map toolbar.

Get overview of grouped devices

Clusters can contain different types of devices, for example cameras and input devices. To get an overview of
the devices in a cluster, click the cluster once.

Zoom in and out

There are different ways of zooming in or out:

283 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l Use the scroll wheel on your mouse

l If there is a cluster, double-click it, or right-click and select Zoom to. The map zooms to a level where all
the devices or sub-clusters within the cluster are visible

l Press and hold the SHIFT key and drag the pointer to select an area on the map. The map zooms in and
centers on your selection

There may be a limit to how much you can zoom in on a map if you're using one of the
following services:

l Bing Maps

l Google Maps

l Milestone Map Service

l OpenStreetMap

The zoom limitation depends on if the services are able to provide an image at the
requested zoom depth. When such a zoom limit occurs, the view item stops displaying the
geographic background. Other layers, such as devices or shapefile images continue to
display.

Preview live video from one camera

You can preview video from single cameras. The video is displayed in a preview window, which allows you to
further investigate the video, for example in a new floating window.

Steps:

284 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Navigate to the camera.

2. Double-click the camera, or right-click and select Live preview. The live video feed is displayed in the
Preview window.

3. To play back and investigate the video in more detail, do one of the following actions:

l In the Preview window, click Independent Playback. The controls of independent playback
become available

l Click More > Send to window > N ew Floating Window. A window appears.

Preview live video from multiple cameras

You can preview live video from multiple cameras at the same time - a maximum of 25 live videos can be shown
at the same time. The video is displayed in a preview window, allowing you to further investigate the video, for
example, in a new floating window.

Steps:

285 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Navigate to the place on the smart map, where the cameras are located.

2. Select the cameras using one of these methods:

l Press and hold the CTRL key while you select the cameras.

l In the toolbar, click Select m ultiple cam eras, then click and drag to select the cameras within
an area.

Only cameras are included in the selection.

l Double-click a cluster to zoom to and select the devices and potential sub-clusters inside the
cluster

3. Right-click any of the selected cameras or sub-clusters and select Live preview, or press EN TER.

4. To play back and investigate the video in more detail, do one of the following actions:

l In the Preview window, click Independent Playback. The controls of independent playback
becomes available

l Click More > Send to window > N ew Floating Window. A window appears.

Use hotspot to view video from cameras on smart map

Instead of previewing video feed from your cameras, or sending the video feed to a secondary display, you can
use a hotspot to quickly shift between cameras on your smart map.

Requirements

You have already set up a view with a hotspot. For more information, see Add hotspots to views on page 76.

286 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Steps:

1. Open the view that contains the smart map.

2. If the view also contains the hotspot:

1. Navigate to the cameras on the smart map.

2. Click the cameras you are interested in. As you click, the video feed is displayed in the hotspot
view item.

3. If the view does not contain the hotspot:

1. In the Views pane, right-click the view that contains the hotspot.

2. Select Send View To and select a display option, for example Floating Window.

3. Arrange the views on your monitor or monitors so that you can see both.

4. Navigate to the cameras on the smart map.

5. Click the cameras you are interested in. As you click, the video feed is displayed in the hotspot
view item.

Go to smart map locations

You can quickly jump to locations added by yourself or others in XProtect Smart Client instead of panning
manually to the location on the smart map. The list of locations displays the last location you selected.

Steps:

1. Select the view that contains the smart map.

2. In the upper left corner of the view, open the Select a location list.

3. Select the location to go to that location on the smart map.

Jump to device on smart map

If you want to view a device in its geographic context, you can jump to the place on the smart map where the
device is. This is useful if, for example, you forgot the location of a device, or if you want to check nearby devices.

Requirements

You can jump to a device only if the device has been geographically positioned in one of two ways:

287 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l The geo coordinates of the device have been specified in the device properties in XProtect Management
Client

l The device has been positioned on the smart map in XProtect Smart Client

Steps:

1. To search for a device and then jump to it:

1. On the Live or Playback tab, go to the Views pane.

2. Search for the device. If the device exists, it appears in the search results.

3. Hover over the device that you want to jump to.

4. Click to jump to the device. The smart map opens in a floating window.

2. To jump to a camera from a view item:

1. On the Live or Playback tab, select the view item that contains the camera.

2. Inside the view item, at the bottom, hover over the black bar to make the camera toolbar appear.

3. Click to jump to the camera. The smart map opens in a floating window.

Jump to custom overlays on smart map

If you need to quickly navigate to a custom overlay on the smart map, you can jump to the location where the
overlay is.

1. On the smart map, click Show or hide layers and custom overlays. A window appears.

2. Go to the Custom overlays section.

3. Click next to the overlay you want to find. This will take you to the location on the smart map.

288 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Backtracking to previous locations (explained)

When you go from one location to another, XProtect Smart Client keeps a history of the locations you visit. This

lets you backtrack by clicking Back. The history is based on the locations that you click. That is, if you pan to a
location, but do not click it, the location is not added to the history.

When you backtrack, XProtect Smart Client removes the location you just left from the history. The history
includes only forward movements.

The system clears the history when you leave the view.

Maps (usage)

If you are connected to a surveillance system that supports Milestone Federated

Architecture, you can only add maps from the surveillance system server you logged in to.

M aps (explained)
With a map, you get a physical overview of your surveillance system. You can instantly see which cameras are
placed where, and in what direction they are pointing. You can use maps for navigation. Maps can be grouped
into hierarchies, so you can drill down through hot zones, from large perspectives to detailed perspectives, for
example, from city level to street level, or from building level to room level.

A map position does not display live video, a map is always a still image.

Maps may contain elements representing cameras, microphones and similar technology. You can view recorded
video from cameras in a preview window when you move your mouse over a camera icon on the map. The
status information in playback mode is not based on recorded data, but retrieved from the elements' current
status, as displayed in live mode.

289 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Map with camera elements and hot zone

Maps do not have to be geographical maps, although they often are. Depending on your organization's needs,
photos and other kinds of image files can also be used as maps.

Maps are not the same as a smart map. For more information, see Differences between
maps and smart maps (explained) on page 84.

How elements interact with maps

You can use map elements to interact with the actual devices in the following ways:

Cameras

290 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Place your mouse pointer over a camera on a map to see a live preview from the camera. Click the title bar of
the preview to display it as a separate floating window. You can resize the floating window by pulling its corners.
To start recording, right-click the required camera and select Start Recording for # Minutes. Particular user
rights may be required to use this feature.

A fixed cam era is displayed on the map with an associated view zone that shows the camera's angle of view.
Note that the angle on the map is very likely to need adjustment to match the camera's angle of view. To adjust
the angle, simply drag it to a suitable size and position.

A PTZ cam era is displayed on the map with any PTZ presets defined for the camera on the surveillance system.
The presets are illustrated as colored angles that radiate from the PTZ camera icon. Each angle represents a
particular preset. Note that the angles are very likely to need adjustment to match the camera's preset angles.
To adjust an angle, simply drag it to a suitable size and position. If a camera has more than 25 presets, no
angles are initially displayed since the angles would be too small to be useful. In such cases, you can add
required angles individually by dragging the presets from the required camera from the Elem ent Selector
window onto the map. To go to one of a PTZ camera's presets, simply click the preset on the map. This works in
the floating preview window, on the map itself, as well as in hotspot positions (see Hotspots (explained) on page
179). Alternatively, right-click the camera, select PTZ Presets, then select the required preset.

Microphones

Place your mouse over a microphone; press and hold the left mouse button to listen to incoming audio from a
microphone, or right-click the microphone and select Listen to Microphone. You cannot use microphones in
map views in playback mode.

Speakers

Place your mouse over a speaker; press and hold the left mouse button to talk through the speaker. You cannot
use speakers in map views in playback mode.

Events

Click an event on the map (see Alarms (explained) on page 256) to activate it, or right-click the event and select
Activate Event. When left-clicking an event, the mouse pointer briefly changes to a lightning symbol to indicate
that the event is being activated.

Alarms

Click an alarm on the map (see Alarms (explained) on page 256) to view it, or right-click the alarm and select
Activate Alarm . Right-click to acknowledge the alarm.

Output

Click an output on the map to activate it, or right-click the output and select Activate Output. When you click an
output, the mouse pointer briefly changes to a lightning symbol to indicate that the output is being activated.

Hot zones

A hot zone is usually colored, so it is easy to recognize. Click a hot zone to go to the sub-map associated with the
hot zone, or right-click the required hot zone and select Go to Sub-m ap.

If the hot zone appears with a dotted outline, no map is associated with the hot zone.

291 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

On some surveillance systems, maps from several different servers may be in a map
hierarchy. This can mean that when you click a hot zone, the sub-map is unavailable
because its server is unavailable. Servers can become unavailable because of scheduled
maintenance or network problems. Contact your system administrator if the problem
persists.

A hot zone can point to a map that you do not have access rights to and the XProtect
Smart Client will inform you about this. Because user rights can be time-based, you might
not be able to access a map that you could previously. This can be because you do not
have access during certain hours of the day or certain days of the week. Contact your
system administrator if in doubt about your user rights.

Plug-ins

Plug-in elements are available only if used on your surveillance system. Examples of plug-in elements: access
control systems, fire detection systems, etc.

Interconnected hardware

Because interconnected hardware that is part of a Milestone Interconnect system is offline at times, you may
often see error statuses on the interconnected hardware element on a map.

Status visualization

Status visualization is a feature that graphically displays the status of elements added to a map. When a map is
fully operational and in the normal state, no visual status indication is presented. The Status Visualization
window lets you define the visual appearance of maps' status indication.

Indicator Description

Attention needed - when an element requires attention, but is still working; for instance
when a server is running out of disk space. Note that the device in question is not
necessarily included on the map. The default display color is yellow.

N ot operational - when there is an error on the element, for example if a server cannot
connect to a microphone or speaker. The default display color is orange.

292 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Indicator Description

Alarm s - when an element has an alarm attached to it. The default display color is red.

Disabled/ status unknown - when an element has been disabled on the surveillance
server, or when it is not possible to obtain status information from a server. The default
color is purple.

Ignore status - when an element has a status that does not need attention, for example, if
you are already aware of what the issue is. The default color is blue.

The status of a map mirrors the status of all elements on the map. Up to four names of affected servers can be
listed in the map title bar. In cases where an unavailable server causes disabled elements on the map, but the
server itself is not included on the map, the map is displayed in the not operational state, even though the map
only contains disabled elements. If the unavailable server is included on the map, the map is simply displayed
with the disabled/ status unknown. Status information is also available in the Map Overview.

Example of map with status visualization

Change the appearance of status visualization

293 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

M ap Overview window (explained)

The Map Overview window provides you with an overview of the map hierarchy set up in the XProtect Smart
Client. To open the Map Overview window, right-click the map and select Map Overview or click the icon on
the map title bar.

A plus sign (+) next to a map indicates that the map could have one or more sub-maps attached to it as hot
zones. Clicking a map in the Map Overview immediately displays the selected map in the view.

Content in the Map Overview may take some time to load if you are connected to a very
large surveillance system with many maps.

If you are connected to a surveillance system that supports Milestone Federated

Architecture, you can only add maps from the surveillance system server you logged in to.
Milestone Federated Architecture is a system setup with related but physically separate
surveillance systems. Such a setup can be relevant for, for example, chains of shops with
many separate—but related—surveillance systems.

See the XProtect Comparison Chart on https://www.milestonesys.com/ for information

about which surveillance systems support Milestone Federated Architecture.

Send cameras from a map to a floating window

To view all the cameras (a maximum of 25 in one view) on a map simultaneously in a floating window:

1. On the Live tab or the Playback tab, select the map that contains the cameras you want to view in a
floating window.

2. At the top of the map title bar, click the Send all cam eras to floating window icon: .

The floating window displays a maximum of 25 cameras in the view.

If you have more than 25 cameras on a map, when you click this button, it will not always
be the same cameras you see.

View recorded video from cameras on a map

You can view recorded video from cameras in a preview window when you move your mouse over a camera icon
on the map. The status information in playback mode is retrieved from the camera's current live status.

294 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l You can use digital zoom and PTZ controls from the camera preview if the camera supports this. In the
preview window, either click the More button and select digital zoom or use the PTZ (see PTZ images
(explained) on page 270) controls that appear. If you have PTZ presets set up for a particular camera, you
can activate the preset by selecting the preset in the preview

l To view all the cameras (a maximum of 25 in one view) on a map simultaneously in a floating window,

click the Send all cam eras to floating window icon at the top of the map title bar:

If you have more than 25 cameras on a map, when you click this button it will not always
be the same cameras you see.

View status details

Status details are available for cameras (for example, resolution, image size, and bit-rate) and servers (for
example, CPU usage, memory, network usage).

l To display status details, right-click the required element and select Status Details. Status details are
displayed in a separate, floating window

If you see the error message "Event Server has insufficient access rights to the recording
servers," you will not be able to view status details from recording servers. The error
message relates to the Event Server service, which handles map-related communication
on the surveillance system. The Event Server service is managed on the surveillance
system server. Contact your system administrator, who will be able to handle the issue.

Zoom and auto maximize

If the map is larger than the view area in the XProtect Smart Client, or if you have zoomed in on the map, you can
pan the map to see otherwise hidden areas. Click the map anywhere outside of added elements, and the map
centers on the clicked spot. Pan the map by clicking and dragging the map in any direction.

l To use the zoom function on a map, right-click the map and select Zoom In or Zoom Out as required. Or
use the Zoom to Standard Size function to zoom back to normal size

Alternatively, use your mouse's scroll wheel to zoom; scroll up to zoom in, scroll down to
zoom out.

If Auto m axim ize m ap is enabled and your map position in the view is part of a view with several view positions,
the map is automatically maximized to full screen after a period of time as defined in setup mode in the
Properties pane. To revert to the original view, double-click the map anywhere outside of any added elements.

295 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Matrix (usage)

This feature is only available in certain XProtect VMS systems. For information about the
features in your system, see Surveillance system differences on page 29.

M at rix (explained)
Matrix is a feature that lets you send or receive video from any surveillance system camera to any monitor
(known as a Matrix-recipient) on a network. A typical Matrix configuration automatically presents live video on
the required Matrix-recipient when a defined event occurs, for example, when motion is detected or when
another user wants to share important live video. Provided Matrix has been configured on the surveillance
system server, you can include Matrix content in your XProtect Smart Client views. When a particular event
occurs, or another user wants to share video with you, live video will automatically appear in your Matrix views.

Viewing M at rix content (explained)

The event or the camera used in the Matrix setup depends entirely on the Matrix configuration on the
surveillance system server or on what other users want to share with you. You cannot control this in XProtect
Smart Client. However, you can add Matrix content to as many positions in the view as required, so you can
watch live video from several Matrix-triggered sources at the same time.

A Matrix position is displayed with a Matrix icon on the toolbar: . You can maximize a Matrix by double-clicking it.

A view can contain several Matrix positions. This lets you watch live video from several Matrix-triggered sources
at the same time. If your view contains several Matrix positions, the positions are always ranked—one of the
positions will be the primary Matrix position, another the secondary, and so on. When the first Matrix-triggered
live video stream is received, it is automatically presented in the primary Matrix position. When the next Matrix-
triggered video stream is received, a first-in-first-out principle applies: the previously received video stream is
transferred to your view's secondary Matrix position, and the newest video stream is presented in your primary
Matrix position, and so on. The Matrix positions’ ranking is applied automatically: the first Matrix position you add
is the primary Matrix position, the next one you add is the secondary one, and so on. You can change this ranking
in setup mode.

On the Playback tab, Matrix positions display video from the cameras with which the Matrix positions were last
used on the Live tab. You can play back this video using the navigation features of the Playback tab.

M anually send video to M at rix recipients

You cannot send video to a hotspot (see Hotspots (explained) on page 179) or carousel
(see Carousels (explained) on page 181).

Requirements

Matrix content has been added to a view. See Add Matrix to views on page 122.

296 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Select the view.

2. On the camera toolbar, click More > Matrix, and then select the relevant Matrix recipient.

Milestone Interconnect (usage)

Timeline and M ilest one Int erconnect (explained)

If the selected camera is part of a Milestone Interconnect setup, and it is an interconnected device, the timeline
for the selected camera displays the retrieval data. Retrievals that have taken place are displayed as recordings.
On the timeline, shading lets you quickly identify which periods contain recordings and for which periods you
need to request a retrieval (see Retrieve data from Milestone Interconnect on page 297) for.

l Dark gray indicates that there are no recordings for the time

l A dark checkerboard pattern indicates that no recordings have been requested and therefore it is
unknown whether there are recordings

l Red shading indicates that there is a recording

l A light checkerboard pattern indicates that data has been requested for retrieval

The timeline with dark checkerboard pattern where no recordings have been requested and therefore it is not
known whether there are recordings and the lighter checkerboard pattern where video has been requested for
retrieval.

Retrieve data from M ilest one Int erconnect

Milestone Interconnect™allows you to retrieve data from one or more devices belonging to independent VMS
systems integrated with your current VMS system. An example is mobile installations on ships or busses that are
connected with a central site.

Requirements

Your XProtect Smart Client is part of a Milestone Interconnect setup and at least one of your cameras supports
edge storage, and you have the necessary user rights.

Steps:

1. On the Playback tab, in the timeline, click the Tim e Selection Mode button to select the start and end
time of the sequence you want to retrieve data for.

2. To the right of the toolbar, click Retrieve to open the Retrieval window.

297 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

3. Select the relevant camera(s) and then click Start Retrieval.

You can view the progress of your retrieval jobs in the Status window (see Status
window (explained) on page 337) by clicking the Status button on the Application
toolbar.

4. To stop a retrieval job that is in progress, either click Stop in the notification area at the top of the
workspace area, or in the Status window, next to the job that is in progress.

XProtect Smart Wall (usage)

After your system administrator configures a Smart Wall, you can start working with it in XProtect Smart Client.
The system administrator defines the monitors that the Smart Wall consists of, the layout and size of the
monitors, and possibly also what cameras are displayed on the monitors.

Using XProtect Smart Wall is basically about the following:

l View Smart Wall content on page 299 - open the Smart Wall monitors in different displays or on physical
monitors

l Displaying content on Smart Wall on page 301 - share content with other operators who use the Smart
Wall and control what content is displayed

To change the layout of the monitors or presets that your system administrator specified,
see Change the layout of Smart Wall monitors on page 125.

Sm art Wall overview (explained)

The Smart Wall overview is a graphical representation of a Smart Wall and the monitors that it consists of. The
overview allows you to control what is displayed on the Smart Wall.

298 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

The image displays a Smart Wall overview with two monitors:

l Left m onitor has a 2x2 layout

l Right m onitor has a 1+5 layout

Blue tiles in the Smart Wall overview are displaying content. Gray tiles are empty.

If your organization has more than one Smart Wall, select the Smart Wall you need in the Sm art Wall list.

The Select preset list allows you to select and activate preconfigured Smart Wall presets.

After selecting a Smart Wall and a preset, other users can select a different Smart Wall,
preset, or both.

Identify the type of content that a tile is displaying

l Hover the cursor over a tile. The number of the tile changes to an icon, such as a camera, that indicates
the type of content

l Click the tile to view the content in a Preview window. The toolbar in the Preview window provides options
for printing the content, or sending it to another Smart Wall

View Sm art Wall content

Your Smart Wall displays both live and recorded video depending on the tab you are currently on. Milestone
recommends that you use a dedicated computer for displaying the Smart Wall and another computer for
handling the Smart Wall overview.

User rights can prevent cameras from displaying video on your Smart Wall.

1. In the Views pane, expand Sm art Wall.

2. Expand the Smart Wall that you want view.

3. Right-click the monitors, one at a time, to send them to the preferred displays.

299 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. Click Send View To and select one of these options:

l Prim ary Display - opens in full screen mode in your current display

l Secondary Display - opens in full screen mode in your secondary display if any

l Floating Window - opens in a new floating window

View Smart Wall content in the main view

1. In the Views pane, expand Sm art Wall.

2. Expand the Smart Wall that you want view.

3. Select the monitors, one at a time, to view the content in the main view.

Disconnect Sm art Wall monitors

You can view Smart Wall content without interfering with what others are seeing on the Smart Wall.

1. Follow the steps described in View Smart Wall content on page 299.

2. For each monitor that you want to view, click Disconnect Sm art Wall m onitor.

Changes you make are reversed when you reconnect.

Sm art Wall display options

The following table describes ways to view Smart Wall content in a separate window or secondary display.

300 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Option Description

Prim ary View content in full screen mode on the display that you are currently viewing. Smart
Display Client remains open behind the Smart Wall content.

Secondary
View content on another display and continue viewing Smart Client on the current display.
Display

Floating View content in a new floating window. This is useful, for example, if your video wall
Window consists of multiple monitors.

You can maximize or resize the window regardless of your preferred display option.

Displaying content on Sm art Wall

Your Smart Wall may be preconfigured to display video from certain cameras. However, you can change that in
XProtect Smart Client by changing the cameras or adding other types of content to your Smart Wall overview, for
example alarms, hotspots, images, and smart maps.

Depending on the situation and the environment you monitor, you can combine different types of content to
improve response times and effectiveness. For example, if you want to display a picture of a suspect so that
people on patrol know who to look for, you can add an image. If you want to provide guidance for response
measures, you can add text.

Ad d or ch an g e cam eras on Smart Wall

You can change the cameras that are being displayed on your Smart Wall. Immediately, other operators who are
using the same Smart Wall will see the changes.

Requirements:

You have set up a view that contains your Smart Wall overview. For more information, see Add Smart Wall
overview to views on page 124.

Steps:

1. Make sure that your Smart Wall is running as described in View Smart Wall content on page 299.

2. If your Smart Wall is running on a different computer, open XProtect Smart Client on your current
computer.

3. Go to the Live or Playback tab.

301 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. To add a camera from a view:

1. Open the view that contains the camera that you want to add.

2. In the camera view item, click More > Send to Sm art Wall. Then select the Smart Wall, the
monitor, and finally the tile inside the monitor.

302 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

5. To add a camera from the Cam eras pane:

1. In the Views pane, select the view that contains the Smart Wall overview.

2. In the Cam eras pane, find the camera that you want to add.

3. Drag the camera to a tile in a monitor on your Smart Wall overview. The video from the camera is
displayed in the Smart Wall.

303 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

4. To verify that you added the correct camera, click the camera icon in the Smart Wall overview. A
preview appears.

Ad d en t ire view s t o Smart Wall

You can share an entire view with other operators through your Smart Wall by sending the view to a Smart Wall
monitor. What is currently being displayed on that monitor is then replaced by the content of the view containing,
for example, cameras.

Requirements:

You have set up a view that contains your Smart Wall overview. See Add Smart Wall overview to views on page 124.

Steps:

1. Make sure that your Smart Wall is running as described in View Smart Wall content on page 299.

2. If your Smart Wall is running on a different computer, open XProtect Smart Client on your current
computer.

304 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

3. Go to the Live or Playback tab and open the view that contains your Smart Wall overview.

4. In the Views pane, find the view that you want to send to the Smart Wall.

5. Drag the view into a tile in the preferred monitor and then release.

6. To reset the monitor to its original display, or to clear the whole monitor or a specific tile in the Smart
Wall overview, see Stop displaying content on Smart Wall on page 311.

Ad d or ch an g e ot h er t yp es of con t en t on Smart Wall

You can change what is being displayed on your Smart Wall, for example by sharing an image of a suspect.
Immediately, operators who are using the same Smart Wall will see the changes.

What can you add?

305 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l Alarms

l Bookmarks

l Cameras or whole views

l Camera navigators

l Carousels

l Images and snapshots

l Hotspots

l HTML pages

l Maps

l Smart maps

l Text

Requirements

Text and cameras you can drag into your Smart Wall overview. However, before you can add other types of
content to your Smart Wall, make sure that the content has been added to a view. See Add cameras and other
items to views on page 55.

Steps:

1. Make sure that your Smart Wall is running as described in View Smart Wall content on page 299.

2. If your Smart Wall is running on a different computer, open XProtect Smart Client on your current
computer.

3. Go to the Live or Playback tab.

4. Open the view that contains the element that you want to add.

If you want to add cameras, you can drag the cameras directly from the Cam eras
pane. To add text, in your text editor, select the text and drag the text into a tile in
your Smart Wall overview.

5. Hover over the view item. The camera toolbar appears.

6. Click Send to Sm art Wall and select the Smart Wall.

306 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

7. Select the monitor and finally the tile inside the monitor.

The selected tile in the Smart Wall monitor is updated accordingly.

Disp lay t ext on Smart Wall

Displaying text on your XProtect Smart Wall is useful when you want to provide information to anyone who can
see the Smart Wall.

Requirements

l To send text from an existing view, first you must add the text to a view. See Add cameras and other
items to views on page 55.

l To add text using drag-and-drop, make sure that your text editor supports drag-and-drop operations.

Steps:

1. To add text from a third-party text editor:

1. Open the view that contains your Smart Wall overview.

2. Write the text in your preferred text editor.

3. Select the text.

4. Drag and drop the text into a tile in a Smart Wall monitor.

5. In the window that appears, you can edit the text even further. Click Save.

6. Immediately after, the text appears on the Smart Wall display.

307 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

2. To add text that has already been added to a view:

1. Open the view that contains the text.

2. Hover over the view item. The camera toolbar appears.

3. Click More > Send to Sm art Wall and then select the preferred Smart Wall.

4. Select the monitor and finally the tile inside the monitor.

Immediately after, the text appears on the Smart Wall display.

Alarm s on Smart Wall (exp lain ed )

You can share a prioritized overview of all alarms by adding the Alarm List to your Smart Wall. This allows you to
view and work with details about the alarm directly from the Smart Wall. See Displaying content on Smart Wall
on page 301.

You can also display individual alarms on your Smart Wall by dragging and dropping the alarm from the Alarm
List.

Alarm details

308 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l The time of day when the event triggered the alarm

l The name and video feed from the device that triggered the alarm, and all devices that are related to it

l You can view additional details and change some settings for the alarm by clicking the arrow in the upper
right part of the position in the view. The details are as follows:

l The person the alarm is assigned to, its priority, and the state of the alarm. You can change these
if you want to

l The source, or what triggered the alarm, such as when a camera detects motion or an analytics
event occurs

l Instructions on how to respond to the alarm

l Activities. These are comments that users entered. Typically, they indicate decisions or actions
related to the alarm. Additionally, when someone changes the details of the alarm, the system
adds the changes to the list of activities

l If you were recording video when the event occurred, you can view the video of the moment the
alarm was triggered by clicking the Playback tab, and then Go To Alarm Tim e

Sen d b ookm arks t o Smart Wall

Sending a bookmark to a Smart Wall can help you quickly distribute a single image of, for example, a person or a
video sequence of an incident.

Steps:

309 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Create a bookmark as described in Add or edit bookmarks on page 254 or Bookmark search results on
page 241.

2. In the window that appears, click Display on Sm art Wall and select the preferred Smart Wall.

3. Select a monitor and then a tile within the monitor. The bookmarked video sequence appears on the
Smart Wall display.

4. To send a still image instead of the video sequence, select the Send still im age only check box.

Sm art m ap an d Smart Wall (exp lain ed )

If you are using Smart Wall, you can share the smart map with other operators who are using the Smart Wall.
The current zoom level, the location that you have navigated to, and the layers that are visible are also sent to
the Smart Wall.

310 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Drag cam eras from m ap s or sm art m ap s t o Smart Wall

If a particular camera on your map or smart map recorded an incident, and you want to share the video from
that camera, you can drag cameras from the map to the monitors of the Smart Wall.

You can also drag cameras from maps in floating windows and secondary displays.

Stop displaying content on Sm art Wall

You can stop displaying content on your Smart Wall, for example when an incident is under control or the content
is no longer relevant.

311 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Stop displaying all content on a Smart Wall monitor

1. In your Smart Wall overview, go to the monitor that you want to clear.

2. Click the icon.

3. Select Clear View. On the Smart Wall overview. The tiles turn gray, and all content is removed from the
Smart Wall display.

Remove specific content from a Smart Wall monitor

1. In your Smart Wall overview, go to the monitor where you want to remove specific content.

2. Right-click the tile that you want to clear and select Rem ove from View.

The tile turns gray, and the content is removed from the associated position in the Smart Wall display.

Reset your Smart Wall

If you have removed content from a monitor, you can make it reappear by resetting the preset that is associated
with the monitor.

312 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Click Select preset.

2. Hover over the preset that corresponds to the monitor that you cleared.

3. Click Activate. The gray tiles in the Smart Wall overview turn blue again.

Other operators can manually change the content on a Smart Wall, and the content can
change according to a schedule or rules. This means that the content that you remove can
reappear later. To permanently prevent content from displaying, contact your system
administrator.

XProtect Smart Client – Player (usage)

XProtect Smart Client – Player is a light version of XProtect Smart Client that can be included with exported video
data. XProtect Smart Client – Player lets the recipient view the exported files without having surveillance
software installed.

XProtect Smart Client – Player is also automatically included in video archives and recording database folders to
ensure availability of recordings if the disk with the recordings is removed.

You can use XProtect Smart Client – Player to view video data and archives and to repair corrupted databases.
The application has many of the features of the XProtect Smart Client and looks similar.

313 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

XProt ect Sm art Client – Player (overview)

N um ber Description

Investigate the exported recordings on the Playback tab, and run searches on the Search
1
tab.

2 Select the view that contains the cameras that you are interested in.

Drag the timeline back and forth to browse the recorded video. See Timeline (explained) on
3
page 195.

Use the time navigation controls to play back video or jump to a specific moment in time.
4
See Time navigation controls (overview) on page 196.

314 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N um ber Description

5 Change the timespan. The range is five minutes to four weeks.

6 Zoom in or out.

Copy a still image to the clipboard, so you can paste it into, for example, a document, or
7
print a surveillance report with a still image and related information.

8 Start search in a new search window with the cameras in the current view preselected.

Search in XProt ect Sm art Client – Player

On the Search tab, you can search the recordings included in the export, for example if you want to search a
subset of the cameras.

You can search for recordings, motion, and bookmarks.

315 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

N um ber Description

The timespan is set automatically based on the export timespan. You can define your own
1
timespan, for example Custom interval.

2 Add the cameras that you want to search.

3 Specify what to search for, for example Motion. You can combine search categories.

4 Review the list of search results. Scroll to view the next or previous search results.

5 Use the Thum bnail size slider to make the thumbnail images smaller or bigger.

6 Play back video from the search results.

Take further action based on your search results, for example create PDF reports to share
7 or print evidence. The action bar appears when you select the blue check box inside the
search results.

For more information about the features on the Search tab,see Search for video on page 218.

Verify digital signatures

If you are reviewing video evidence in Smart Client – Player, and the exported material has digital signatures,
you can verify that the recording has not been tampered with since it was recorded, or since the export was
made, or both.

Digital signing does not work for XProtect Smart Client 2017 R1 or earlier that connects to
XProtect VMS 2017 R2 or newer. The video export will not succeed.

Requirements

l In XProtect Management Client, signing has been turned on for the recording server

l In XProtect Smart Client, during the export process, the XProtect form at and Include digital signature
check boxes were selected

Steps:

316 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. On the toolbar, click the Verify Signatures button. The Manual verification window appears. Here you
can see the devices selected for the export.

2. Click Verify to start the verification process. The system checks the authenticity of the recording
signature and the export signature.

3. To verify that you can rely on the verification of the recording signature:

1. In the Recording signatures column, click the Verified link. The Certificates dialog appears.

2. Compare the value of the public_key and signature with the corresponding values in the
PublicKey.xm l file (C:\ Program Files\ Milestone\ Managem ent Server\ Tools\ CertificateIssuer).
If the values differ, the recording has been modified.

4. To verify that you can rely on the verification of the export signature:

1. In the Export signatures column, click the Verified link. The Certificates dialog appears.

2. Compare the value of the public_key and signature with the corresponding values in the Public
Key Certificate.xm l file (<export destination folder>\ <export nam e>\ Client
Files\ Data\ Mediadata\ <cam era nam e>\ <cam era nam e>\ Export signatures). If the values
differ, the export material has been modified.

A database can be verified, partially verified (if some of the files have not had signatures
attached), or not signed.

317 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

View database or previously exported evidence

The Open Database wizard lets you open a database from an archive or previously exported material and add it
to your project. The Open Database wizard also repairs corrupted databases automatically.

Steps:

1. Click the Setup button in the upper-right corner. The panes on the left-hand side turn orange.

2. Expand the Overview pane.

3. Click . The Open Database wizard appears.

Do not attempt to open a live database or live archive because it can damage your
system.

4. Select the folder containing the relevant files. When you select a database, the name of the device
appears next to the Cam era, Microphone, or Speaker field.

If the system cannot identify a camera, for example, if you open archived
recordings, the name will be Unknown and all three types of devices will be added
as Unknown devices (even if they don't exist) with the database file name
assigned. If there is no device, the field contains N / A.

5. If the database you are trying to open is corrupted, the wizard can repair it.

6. After adding the database, you can see whether or not the database contains digital signatures. Then you
can verify the authenticity of the recordings. See Digital signatures (explained) on page 129.

XProtect Access (usage)

If one or more access control systems have been integrated with your VMS system through the XProtect Access
add-on, you can monitor doors, control door states, investigate access control events, respond to access
requests, and manage cardholder information.

Access control on the Live tab (explained)

On the Live tab, you can view live video from the cameras associated with access control sources, together with
the list of events on the right-hand side of the video.

When you click any of the events in the list, the live video automatically pauses and changes to independent
playback of the event. To go back to viewing live video, either click the event again or click the Independent
playback icon on the camera toolbar (see View recorded video independently of timeline on page 198).

318 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

If the system and the event hold cardholder information, you can click the search icon next to the cardholder
name on a selected event to jump to the Access Control tab and view all events associated with this person.

M onitor doors via maps

If you use the map functionality to support your surveillance and access control tasks, you can add access
control units to a map:

1. On the Live tab, in setup mode, expand the System Overview pane.

2. Select Map from the list and drag it to a view item.

3. Locate the map file and click OK.

4. From the map toolbox that appears, click Add Access Control.

5. In the list that appears, drag the relevant access control unit, for example a door, onto the map. A door
icon appears on the map.

6. Click Setup to change to live viewing.

7. When a person requests access, the door unlocks. The door unlocks because someone grants access via
a command button on the access request notification or even on the map itself. Once the access is
granted, the door icon turns green and appear as an open door.

8. When the door is locked again, automatically or manually, the door icon turns red and appear as a closed
door.

9. You can right-click the door icon to, for example, trigger commands.

Since the state of the access control units are always visible, a map used in this way is a quick way to get
a graphical overview of the states of the access control units for the area or building you are monitoring.

Investigating access control events

Search an d filt er access con t rol even t s

There are several ways you can filter the event list, so it displays the data that you are interested in.

1. On the Access Control tab, select Events list.

2. Click any of the filters at the top of the list and specify the criteria.

3. Alternatively you can right-click a specific time, event, source or cardholder within the list and filter using
that value.

Any filters you apply are immediately reflected in the list.

You can filter on:

319 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Events list Description

Select one of the available periods to see data for that particular period. For example,
click Today to see only events that took place today or use the custom interval to specify
a particular period.
Tim e
If you select Live update, the list of events is updated instantly if new events occur that
meet the filter criterion. The list displays maximum 100 events. You cannot search for
cardholders when you work in live update mode.

Select one or more of the available event types directly from the list of event categories
Event
and uncategorized events or select between specific access control events.

Select one or more of the available sources directly from the list of doors or select
Source between other sources (for example access points or controllers from the access control
system) to view only events for those units.

Access Control If your XProtect system integrates with multiple access control systems, select from
System which access control system you want to view events.

Cardholder Select one or more of the available cardholders.

Even t s list (exp lain ed )

On the Access Control tab, when you select an event, the preview on the right lets you view the related video
sequence for the event. The preview camera title bar shows the camera related to the unit that triggered the
event.

l If you have multiple cameras associated with a door, they all appear in the preview

l Standard playback options are available from the toolbar

l Related cardholder information appears below the video preview together with details about the selected
event

l Click to view live video or play back recorded video in a floating window

Exp ort an access rep ort

On the Access Control tab, you can create and export a report of the event list to a PDF file when you are not in
live update mode.

320 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Filter or search for the events you want in the report.

If the event count is very high, you will receive a recommendation to refine the search and thereby
reduce the number of search results.

2. Click the Access Report button.

3. Fill out the fields. The report contains:

l Report name

l Report destination

l A list of the applied filters

l A comment field

l An option to include snapshots

4. Click OK and await that the report is completed.

5. In the top right corner, click Details and in the dialog box that appears, click Open.

The report opens in PDF format.

Sw it ch t o or from live u p d at e m od e of t h e Even t s list

Instead of viewing live video of access control events on the Live tab, you work in live update mode on the
Access Control tab. The list of events is updated instantly if new events occur that meet the filter criterion.

1. On the Access Control tab, select Events list.

2. In the dropdown list of the filter where you usually select a period, select Live Update.

Next to the search field, you see that you have changed mode and the list is updated instantly when an
event that meets the filter criterion occurs.

When you work in live update mode, you cannot search for cardholders and you
cannot create an access report.

3. To switch back from the live update mode, filter on a new period.

Mon it or an d con t rol d oor st at es

The Doors list provides a list of the doors, access points and other access control units in each access control
system, and their current state. This is useful if you, for example, need to know the state of a specific door.

There are several ways you can filter the doors list, so it displays the data that you are interested in.

321 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. On the Access Control tab, select Doors list.

2. Click any of the filters at the top of the list and specify the criteria.

3. You can combine the filters or enter your criteria in the search field to search for doors.

4. Alternatively you can right-click a door or a state within the list and filter using that value.

Any filters you apply are immediately reflected in the list.

What can you filter on?

Doors list Description

Select one or more of the available doors, access points and uncategorized types or select
N am e
between other access control units to view only states of those selected.

Access
If your XProtect system integrates with multiple access control systems, select from which
Control
access control system you want to view doors.
System

Select one or more of the available states directly from the list of state categories and
State
uncategorized states or select between specific access control states.

Another way that you can monitor the door states for your surveillance area is by adding doors to a map (see
Monitor doors via maps on page 319).

Doors list (exp lain ed )

On the Access Control tab, when you select a door in the Doors list, the associated camera shows live video on
the right-hand side of the screen together with detailed information.

l If you have multiple cameras associated with a door, they all appear in the preview

l Standard independent playback options are available from the toolbar

l Action buttons allow you to perform certain commands related to that door, for example lock/unlock
door. Available commands depend on your system configuration

l Information related to the selected door appears below the live video preview

l Click to view live video or play back recorded video in a floating window

322 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

In vest ig at e card h old ers

The Cardholders list provides a list of the cardholders in each access control system and their details. This is
useful if you, for example, need detailed information about a specific person.

There are several ways you can filter the cardholders list, so it displays the data that you are interested in.

1. On the Access Control tab, select Cardholders list.

2. Click the filter at the top of the list to specify the access control system from which you want to investigate
cardholders. You can only work with one access control system at a time.

3. You can combine the filters or enter your criteria in the search field to search for cardholders.

4. Alternatively you can right-click a cardholder or a type within the list and filter using that value.

Any filters you apply are immediately reflected in the list.

What can you filter on?

Cardholders list Description

N am e Select one of the available cardholders to view detailed information about this person.

Type Select one of the available cardholder types to view the list of cardholders with this type.

When you select a cardholder, the detailed information about this person appears on the right-hand side of the
screen. Depending on your system this may include a picture or a link to manage the cardholder record in the
access control system (see Manage cardholder information on page 131).

Access request notifications (explained)

Your organization may have chosen that only security personnel must open the doors, when people want to
enter your building. If such conditions apply, you may, for example, receive access request notifications when a
person wants to enter one or more areas. All conditions that trigger an access request notification have to be
specified in the video management system. The notification displays live video related to the access request,
allowing you to see the person who is requesting access. The name of the door that should open is shown as a
headline, indicating, for example, Access Request - Front door. The door state (for example open, closed or
forced open) also appears. If you have multiple cameras associated with a door, they appear below each other.

Access request notifications are temporary. When you close an access request notification, the notification is no
longer present in your system. If you close XProtect Smart Client while an access request notification is shown,
the notification is not restored when you restart.

323 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

M anaging access request notifications (explained)

Provided that XProtect Smart Client is running, access request notifications pop up on your screen even when
you work in other applications.

Click if you want to view the live video in a floating window.

Access requests stack up on each other in the access request notification window so that you can handle all
incoming access request notifications from the same notification window. You can drag a notification to the
other side of the screen or even to another screen if connected.

If needed, you can minimize the access request notification window to allow the functionality to continue in the
background. The XProtect Smart Client icon blinks in the taskbar when you have new notifications.

Respond to access requests

Provided that your VMS system supports two-way audio and if a speaker and microphone is attached to the
relevant camera that shows the access request notification, access request notifications allow you to speak and
listen to the person who wants to enter:

1. To listen to what the person requesting access is saying, click the button.

2. To speak to the person requesting access, for example to give instructions on how to proceed or behave

in the area, click and hold the button.

3. To carry out other actions, use the command buttons to the right of the microphone and speaker buttons.
The most typical action is to unlock a door for a person requesting access, but could also be to turn on the
lights in the area close to the relevant entry.

Cardholder information may be available if your access control system provides such
information to the XProtect system. Examples of cardholder information: Cardholder's ID
number, name, department, phone number, and authority level. Depending on your
system configuration, you may be able to manage cardholder information (see Manage
cardholder information on page 131).

XProtect LPR (usage)

LPR on the Live tab (explained)

On the Live tab, you can view live video from the cameras that have been configured for license plate
recognition (LPR). You can view video from several LPR cameras in a view at the same time. On the right side of
the view item, the LPR events appear whenever there is a match. In setup mode, you can change the settings
that define how the list of license plate numbers displays.

324 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

When you click a license plate in the LPR event list, the live video automatically pauses and changes to
independent playback. To go back to viewing live video, either click the license plate again or click the
Independent playback icon on the camera toolbar.

LPR on the Search tab (explained)

On the Search tab, you can search for video recordings associated with vehicles.

LPR tab (explained)

On the LPR tab, you can investigate LPR events from all your LPR cameras, and view the associated video
recordings and license plate recognition data. Keep match lists updated and create reports.

The tab includes an LPR event list, and an LPR camera preview for previewing video associated with individual
LPR events. Below the preview, information about the license plate appears together with details from the
license plate match list it is associated with.

You can filter the event list according to the period, country module, LPR camera, or license plate match list. Use
the Search field to search for a particular license plate number. By default, this list shows LPR events from the
last hour.

You can specify and export a report of relevant events as PDF.

You can make updates to the existing match lists by using the License Plate Match List function.

LPR event list (explained)

The LPR event list displays all LPR events. By default the list displays LPR events from the last hour and with the
newest at the top, but your system administrator can change this.

When you select an LPR event from the list, you can see a preview to the right with the related video sequence
for the event. The title bar of the preview shows the name of the LPR camera that the LPR event was triggered
from. You also see the license number, country module, time of the event and the match list that triggered the
event.

You can change how the LPR event list displays events; you can sort the columns and you can drag them to
different positions. You can use the filters at the top of the list to filter LPR events or use the Search field to
search.

The LPR event list only displays LPR events from the time of your search or filter. If you
want to see the latest LPR events, click the Refresh button.

325 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Filtering LPR events (explained)

There are several ways you can filter the LPR event list, so it displays just the LPR events that you are interested
in; you can click any of the filters at the top of the list to see only LPR events associated with that filter. Any filters
you apply are immediately reflected in the list.

l Period: Select one of the available periods to see LPR events within that particular time

l Country m odule: Clear or select country modules to view only LPR events linked to a license plate from a
particular country, state or region

l LPR cam era: Select one or more of the available LPR cameras to view only LPR events for those cameras

l License plate m atch list: Select one or more license plate lists to view only LPR events generated by
those lists

You can combine the filters, for example, for a particular country module on a certain date.

You can also use the Search field to search for a particular license plate. Enter a combination of characters to
find results with combinations of those characters. For example, if you enter the characters XY 12 you will get
license plates that have both XY and 12 in their number. If you enter XY12 you will only get license plates that
have XY12 in their number.

Edit license plate match lists

You can add and delete license plates from license plate match lists.

1. On the LPR tab, at the top right of the window, click License Plate Match Lists to open the License Plate
Match Lists dialog box.

2. In Select license plate m atch list, select the list you want to edit.

3. To add a license plate, click Add. Enter relevant information and click OK.

4. To edit an existing license plate, you can use the search function to find the relevant license plate.

5. Double-click a single row to edit or select multiple rows and click Edit.

6. In the dialog box, enter information and click OK. If the match list contains muliple columns, you can edit
the information in all fields.

7. To remove a license plate, you can use the search function to find the relevant license plate.

8. Select multiple rows if needed and click Delete.

9. Click Close.

326 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Alternatively, you can add a license plate to a license plate match list by right-clicking an
unlisted LPR event and select Add to list. You can also remove a license plate by selecting
the relevant LPR event, and on the right, below the preview, click the Rem ove from list
icon.

Import or export license plate match lists

You can import a file with a list of license plates that you want to use in a license plate match list. You have the
following import options:

l Add license plates to the existing list

l Replace the existing list

This is useful if, for example, the lists are managed from a central location. Then they can keep all local
installations updated by distributing a file.

Similarly you can export the complete list of license plates from a match list to an external location.

1. To import a license plate match list:

1. On the LPR tab, at the top right of the window, click License Plate Match Lists to open the License
Plate Match Lists dialog box.

2. Select the relevant list.

3. To import a file, click Im port.

4. In the dialog box, specify the location of the import file and the import type. Click N ext.

5. Await the confirmation and click Close.

2. To export a license plate match list:

1. Click Export.

2. In the dialog box, specify the location of the export file and click N ext.

3. Click Close.

4. You can open and edit the exported file in, for example, Microsoft Excel.

Supported formats are .txt or .csv.

Export LPR events as a report

You can export a report of LPR events to a PDF file.

327 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. On the LPR tab, filter or search for the events you want to include in the report.

If the number of found events is very high, you will receive a recommendation to refine the search and
thereby reduce the number of search results.

2. Click the LPR Report button.

3. Specify the following values and click OK:

l Report name

l Report destination

l A comment field

l An option to include snapshots

A progress bar appears at the top right of the XProtect Smart Client window.

4. Click Details to view the report.

If you want to change the paper format or font, open the Settings window, select
Advanced, and change the PDF report form at or PDF report font settings.

LPR on the Alarm M anager tab

On the Alarm Manager tab, you can view and investigate alarms related to LPR. Some customization is required
before you can view the information:

l Enable LPR-specific elements on page 133

l Alarms list must be in Event mode (see View LPR recognitions on page 328)

In general, read the sections about alarm management for more details on XProtect Smart Client functionality.

View LPR recognitions

You can view LPR recognitions in the alarm list. If you select events as the data source, all recognitions are
displayed. If you select alarms as the data source, only the recognitions associated with an alarm are displayed.

Requirements

To use the Type field referred to in the steps below, the field must be enabled in Management Client or
Management Application by your system administrator.

Steps:

328 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. Go to the Alarm Manager tab.

2. Click the Setup button to enter setup mode.

3. To view recognitions associated with an alarm:

1. In the Data Source list, select Alarm .

2. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved. The recognitions are displayed in
the alarm list.

3. To view incoming LPR alarms, enter LPR in the Type field.

4. To view all recognitions:

1. In the Data Source list, select Event.

2. Click Setup again to exit setup mode. Your changes are saved. The recognitions are displayed in
the alarm list.

3. To view all incoming LPR events, enter LPR in the Type field.

The alarm list will display the filtered results only when you leave the field you modified.

XProtect Transact (usage)

If XProtect Transact has been configured in your system, you can observe live transactions, investigate
transactions in several ways, and print transactions.

XProt ect Transact (overview)

This topic gives you an overview of what you can do with XProtect Transact in XProtect Smart Client. The features
are described according to the tabs.

Tab Description

On the Live tab, you can observe live transactions and surveillance video from the cameras
Live monitoring the transactions. The view can contain several transaction view items, where
transactions are displayed as receipts that roll over the screen in sync with the video

329 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Tab Description

stream from up to two cameras.

You create and modify the transaction views in setup mode.

On the Playback tab, you can browse past transactions and surveillance video from the
cameras monitoring the transactions. The view can contain several transaction view items,
Playback where transactions are displayed as receipts that roll over the screen in sync with the video
stream from up to two cameras.

You create and modify the transaction views in setup mode.

On the Alarm Manager tab, you can view and investigate events and alarms related to
Alarm transactions. The events are displayed in the event list. To group transaction events, you
Manager need to filter for events of the type transaction. When you click a line in the event list, the
video associated with the event is displayed in a preview.

On the Transact tab, you can investigate transactions by performing free text searches and
applying filters. The transaction lines appear in a list that you can sort by time, transaction
Transact
source, and line name. When clicking a line, the associated video still frames from the
associated cameras are displayed. Below the preview area, the receipt is displayed.

Observe live transactions

You can observe real time transactions in combination with live video surveillance from the cameras recording
the transactions. For example, you may want to observe a cash register, the sales clerk, and the ongoing
transactions.

Requirements

You have set up a view to display transactions. For more information, see Set up views for transactions on page 136.

Steps:

330 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

1. On the Live tab, expand the Views pane.

2. Select a view set up for transactions. Receipts roll over the screen if there are ongoing transactions, and
the live video from the associated cameras are displayed.

If the transaction view item is narrower than the receipt, a horizontal scroll bar allows you
to view the part of the receipt that is hidden. If you try to access the scroll bar, the view
item toolbar appears covering the scroll bar. To access the scroll bar, press and hold
down Ctrl while moving the cursor into the view item area.

Select to change the font size of receipts.

Investigating transactions

In vest ig at e t ran sact ion s in a view

The simplest method of investigating transactions is to view transactions in a view, where the receipts roll over
the screen in sync with the video recordings.

Requirements

331 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

You have set up a view to display transactions. For more information, see Set up views for transactions on page 136.

Steps:

1. Click the Playback tab.

2. In the Views pane, select the transaction view. Depending on how the view has been configured, one or
more receipts appear together with the cameras associated with the transaction source.

3. To browse the video sequences in backward mode, drag the time line to the right.

4. To browse the video sequences in forward mode, drag the time line to the left.

5. Use the or buttons to play the video in backward or forward play mode.

If the transaction view item is narrower than the receipt, a horizontal scroll bar allows you
to view the part of the receipt that is hidden. If you try to access the scroll bar, the view
item toolbar appears covering the scroll bar. To access the scroll bar, press and hold
down Ctrl while moving the cursor into the view item area.

Select to change the font size of receipts.

332 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

In vest ig at e t ran sact ion s u sin g search an d filt ers

You can investigate transactions and the associated video recordings by using filters and search words. The
filters help you narrow down your search, for example transactions from the last seven days, or a specific cash
register. Search words help you identify specific data from the transactions, for example the name of the sales
clerk or unauthorized discounts.

1. Click the Transact tab.

2. In the Today drop-down list, select a time interval.

3. In the Source drop-down list, select the transaction sources you want to investigate. Disabled sources are
marked with "()", for example "(CashRegister_)".

4. Enter your search words. The search results are displayed as transaction lines below the filters, and in
the receipt, the search item is highlighted.

5. To update the list, click .

6. Click a transaction line to view the associated video still frame. Use the or buttons to start the
video in backward play or forward play mode.

By default, transaction data is stored for 30 days, but depending on the configuration,
data can be stored up to 1000 days.

333 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

In vest ig at e t ran sact ion s from a d isab led sou rce

Even if a transaction source has been disabled by your system administrator, you can still view past transactions
from that source in combination with the associated video recordings.

Steps:

1. Click the Transact tab.

2. In the All sources drop-down list, select a disabled transaction source. Parentheses indicate that the
source is disabled, for example "(CashRegister_1)".

3. Select a time interval, for example Last 7 days, or set a custom interval.

4. Click to view the transaction lines for the specified time interval.

5. Select a transaction line to view the associated video still frame from that exact point in time.

6. Use the or button to play the video in backward or forward play mode.

By default, stored transaction data is deleted after 30 days. However, your system
administrator may have changed the retention period to anything between 1 and 1000
days.

In vest ig at e t ran sact ion even t s

You can investigate transaction events, for example by identifying transactions where a specific item has been
purchased. Investigating a transaction event involves viewing the details about the event in the alarm list and the
associated video recordings.

334 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Requirements

To filter by transaction events, the Type field must be added to XProtect Smart Client. This can only be done by
your system administrator.

Steps:

1. Click the Alarm Manager tab.

2. Click Setup in the upper right corner to enter the setup mode.

3. Expand the Properties pane.

4. In the Data Source list, select Event and click Setup again to exit the setup mode. All events are
displayed in a list with the most recent at the top.

5. To view only the transaction events, expand the Filter section and enter transaction event in the Type
field. Automatically the filter is applied, and only transaction events appear in the list.

6. If you want to view a specific event defined by your system administrator, open the Message list and
select the event.

7. To view the video recordings associated with an event, click the event in the list. The video starts playing
in the preview area.

In vest ig at e t ran sact ion alarm s

You can investigate alarms that have been triggered by transaction events. The alarms appear in the alarm list,
where you can view the details about the alarm and the associated video recordings.

Requirements

To filter by transaction events, the Type field must be added to XProtect Smart Client. This can only be done by
your system administrator.

Steps:

1. Click the Alarm Manager tab.

2. Click the Setup button in the upper right corner to enter the setup mode.

3. Expand the Properties pane.

4. In the Data Source list, select Alarm and click Setup again to exit the setup mode. The most recent
alarms are displayed at the top.

335 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

5. To view only the alarms triggered by transaction events, expand the Filter section and enter transaction
event in the Type field. Automatically the filter is applied to the list.

6. To view alarms triggered by a specific event, open the Message list and select the event.

7. To view the video recordings associated with an alarm, click the alarm in the list. The video starts playing
in the preview area.

Print transactions
When you are viewing transactions in the Transact workspace, you can print the transactions, one at a time. The
printout displays the receipt and still images from the associated cameras at the time matching the transaction
line.

Steps:

1. Click the Transact tab.

2. Find the transaction you want to print as described in Investigating transactions on page 331.

3. Click Print below the transaction to print it. A Windows dialog box appears.

4. Select the required printer and click OK.

336 | Operation
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Maintenance

Check the status of your server connection

In the Status window, you can check the status of your server connection, for example, to see if the connection is
secure or not. If multiple sites are connected through Milestone Federated Architecture, you can also check the
connected sites.

Connection statuses

l HTTPS

l HTTP

l Not connected

Steps:

1. In the application toolbar, click the Status button. A window appears.

2. On the Login Inform ation tab, check the status of your connection.

See also Status window (explained) on page 337.

Status window (explained)

ToopentheStatuswindow,clicktheStatusbuttonintheapplicationtoolbar:

In the Status window, you can find information about:

l The status of the XProtect VMS servers that your XProtect Smart Client is connected to through Milestone
Federated Architecture. See also Status window - Login information on page 338.

l The jobs created for retrieving data from interconnected hardware devices or cameras that support edge
storage. See also Status window - Jobs on page 338.

l The existing evidence locks that you have user rights to. See also Status window - Evidence lock list on
page 338.

337 | Maintenance
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

If the button appears with a red circle , one of more servers are unavailable. When
you have viewed the status, the button will stop flashing red even if the server(s) are still
unavailable.

Status window - Login information

Here you can view the status of the XProtect VMS servers that your XProtect Smart Client is connected to. The
window is useful if you are connected to an XProtect VMS system that is configured to use Milestone Federated
Architecture. Milestone Federated Architecture is a way of connecting related but physically separate XProtect
VMS systems. Such a setup can be relevant for, for example, chains of shops.

If servers are available, they will be displayed in gray:

If servers are not available at the time you log in, you cannot use cameras or features belonging to those
servers. Unavailable servers are displayed in red:

The number of servers you see reflects the number of servers retrievable from the XProtect VMS system at the
time you logged in. Particularly if you connect to large hierarchies of servers, more servers may occasionally
become available after you log in. The server list is a static representation of server status. If a server is
unavailable, it will display a reason in the Status field when you click it. To connect to the server, click the Load
Server button. The server status for that server will then be updated. If a server continues to be unavailable for
longer periods of time, contact your system administrator for advice.

Status window - Jobs

If your XProtect Smart Client is part of a Milestone Interconnect™system and you have sufficient rights to
retrieve data from interconnected hardware devices or cameras that support edge storage, you can view the
jobs created for each data retrieval request for these devices.

Each camera where retrieval has been requested is displayed as a separate job. You can view the progress of
the running jobs and you can stop the jobs from here. Related audio will automatically be retrieved, but these
jobs will not show up anywhere. Once a job has completed, the timeline for the device is automatically updated.

If you would like to only see the jobs you have requested, select the Only show m y jobs filter.

Status window - Evidence lock list

You can sort, filter and search the evidence locks list and see additional information about them. You can only
see evidence locks with devices that you have user rights to. For more information see View evidence locks on
page 212.

338 | Maintenance
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Troubleshooting

Installation (troubleshooting)

Error messages and warnings

You cannot install Milestone XProtect Smart Client (64-bit) on this operating system. The OS is not supported.

You have tried to install a version of XProtect Smart Client that does not support the current version of your
computer's Windows operating system. To resolve the problem, install an older version of XProtect Smart Client
or upgrade your operating system.

For information about system requirements, see https://www.milestonesys.com/systemrequirements/.

Logging in (troubleshooting)

Error messages and warnings

Your user rights do not allow you to log in at this point in time. User rights may vary depending on time of day,
day of week, and so on.

You have tried to log in at a time when your user rights do not allow you to log in. To resolve this issue:

Wait until you are permitted to log in. Contact your system administrator if in doubt about your user rights.

You do not have access to any part of the application. Contact the system administrator.

You currently have no access rights to any part of the XProtect Smart Client, and therefore you cannot log in. To
resolve this issue:

Contact your system administrator, who will be able to change your access rights if required.

Application is not able to start, because two (or more) cameras are using the same name or ID...

This error message only appears in a very rare scenario, where a backed-up configuration from one XProtect
VMS system is mistakenly used without any modification on another XProtect VMS system. This can cause
different cameras to "fight" over the same identity, and that can in turn block your access to the XProtect VMS
system. If you see such a message, contact your system administrator.

Authorization failed: You cannot authorize yourself.

You have entered your own credentials in the Authorized by field. You cannot authorize yourself. To resolve this
issue:

You must contact the person who has authorization rights. This could be your supervisor or your system
administrator. This person must enter his or her credentials to authorize your login.

Authorization failed: You do not have permission to authorize.

You have tried to authorize a user but you do not have the rights to do so. To resolve this issue:

339 | Troubleshooting
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Ask your system administrator to check that you have the necessary rights to authorize other users or ask
someone else with sufficient rights to authorize the user.

Failed to connect. Check the server address.

It was not possible to connect to the XProtect VMS server at the specified server address. To resolve this issue:

Verify that you have entered the correct server address. The http:// or https:// prefix and port number are
required as part of the server address (example: https://123.123.123.123:80, where :80 indicates the port
number). Contact your system administrator if in doubt.

Failed to connect. Check the user name and password.

It was not possible to log in with the specified user name and/or password. To resolve this issue:

Verify that you have entered your user name correctly, then enter your password again to ensure it does not
contain errors. User names and passwords are case sensitive. For example, there may be a difference between
entering Am anda and am anda.

Failed to connect. Maximum number of clients are already connected.

The maximum number of clients allowed to connect to the surveillance system server simultaneously has been
reached. To resolve this issue:

Wait for a while before connecting again. If access to the surveillance system is urgent, contact your system
administrator, who may be able to extend the number of simultaneously connected clients.

Failed to connect. Please download XProtect Smart Client

You have tried to connect to XProtect Corporate, XProtect Expert, XProtect Professional+, XProtect Express+, or
XProtect Essential+ with XProtect Smart Client for XProtect Express and XProtect Professional, which is suitable
for these products:

l XProtect Professional

l XProtect Express

You must download XProtect Smart Client from this web page: https://www.milestonesys.com/downloads/. Then
try to log in again.

Connection using an old security model. You cannot connect to the web page using the newest security model.

Occurs if you try to log in to a server that does not have a certificate installed. To resolve the issue, contact your
system administrator, or click the Allow button to log in using HTTP, a network protocol that operates without the
use of a certificate.

You no longer have permission to do this

Occurs if your time-dependent user rights no longer allow you to do something that you have previously been
able to do. This is because, when connected to certain types of surveillance system (see Surveillance system
differences on page 29), your user rights may vary depending on time of day, day of week, etc. Therefore, you
may well be able to perform the action again at a later stage.

Due to system settings, your XProtect Smart Client session will expire within the next [...]

340 | Troubleshooting
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Occurs if your current XProtect Smart Client session is about to end. When connected to certain types of
surveillance system (see Surveillance system differences on page 29), your rights to use the XProtect Smart
Client may depend on time of day, day of week, etc.

When that is the case, you will typically see this message a number of minutes or seconds before your session
will be closed; the exact number of minutes or seconds is defined on the surveillance system server.

No user activity detected recently, your XProtect Smart Client session will expire within the next [...]

Occurs if you have not used your XProtect Smart Client for a while (the exact time is defined on the surveillance
system server), in which case your XProtect Smart Client session will be closed for security reasons.

When that is the case, this message will typically be presented a number of minutes or seconds before your
session will be closed; the exact number of minutes/seconds is defined on the surveillance system server.

M ilest one Federat ed Archit ect ure

Failed to connect to this site. Please download the latest version of XProtect Smart Client and try again.

Occurs in the Status dialog if a child site uses an XProtect VMS system version 2019 R2 or later, and you are
using XProtect Smart Client for XProtect Express and XProtect Professional.

To resolve the issue, go to the Milestone website and download XProtect Smart Client 2019 R2 or later:
https://www.milestonesys.com/downloads/. Then log in to your parent site again and open the Status dialog.

You cannot view information about this site. Please download the latest version of XProtect Smart Client and try
again.

Occurs on the System Monitor tab if a child site uses an XProtect VMS system version 2019 R2 or later, and you
are using XProtect Smart Client for XProtect Express and XProtect Professional.

To resolve the issue, go to the Milestone website and download XProtect Smart Client 2019 R2 or later:
https://www.milestonesys.com/downloads/. Then log in to your parent site again and click the System Monitor
tab. Now, you should be able to select the child site that, previously, was unavailable.

Exporting (troubleshooting)
I have received an export, but I cannot run the SmartClient-Player.exe or Exported Project.scp file

The export may have been created on a computer with a 64 bit Windows operating system, and you are using a
32 bit operating system.

To resolve the issue, try one or more of the following:

341 | Troubleshooting
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l Open the Sm artClient-Player.exe file on a 64-bit Windows computer.

l Open the export with a 32-bit version of XProtect Smart Client. To do this, follow these steps:

1. Open this link: https://www.milestonesys.com/downloads/.

2. Select Product, for example XProtect Corporate, Version, and Language.

3. Click XProtect Sm art Client 32-bit to download the application.

4. When installed, go to the export folder and open the Client Files folder.

5. Double-click the Exported Project.scp file. The XProtect Smart Client – Player should open, and
you can play back the video.

l Ask the person who provided the export to create a new export using a 32-bit XProtect Smart Client.

l Ask the person who provided the export to create a new export using a different export format, for
example AVI or MKV.

You may also experience this issue if the export was created using a different encryption
algorithm than the one used in the current version of your XProtect Smart Client. See also
At least one database file is using an unsupported encryption algorithm on page 342.

Error messages and warnings

At least one database file is using an unsupported encryption algorithm

Your current XProtect VMS system uses AES-256 for encrypting exported video data to comply with the FIPS 140-
2 security standard. However, the system which was used to create the export uses a different encryption
standard.

To resolve the issue, do one of the following:

l Re-export the video data using an upgraded version of XProtect Smart Client. The version must be equal
to or newer than your current version

l Though Milestone recommends always using the latest version of XProtect Smart Client, you can open
the export using an older version of XProtect Smart Client in offline mode

l Open the export on a computer where FIPS mode is disabled. See also https://docs.microsoft.com/en-
us/windows/security/threat-protection/fips-140-validation# using-windows-in-a-fips-140-2-approved-
mode-of-operation

Milestone recommends that you password-protect your data. To do this, select the
Encrypt with password check box in the Export window.

Could not validate the integrity of this project...

342 | Troubleshooting
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

No tampering key is included in the video export. Either the tampering key was removed or the video export was
created using a stand-alone third-party application based on the MIP SDK 2020 R2 or older. If the tampering key
is missing, there is no way of verifying the authenticity of the video project file.

To resolve the issue, do one or more of the following:

l Request a new video export and make sure the tampering key is included

l Re-export the video data using a third-party application which is based on MIP SDK 2020 R3 or later

Searching (troubleshooting)

Error messages and warnings

Unable to create report

You have tried to create a surveillance report based on one or more search results, but the report could not be
created. There may be different reasons:

l You have already created a report with the same name in the same location, and the report is currently
open. To resolve the issue, close the report, and try again.

l You do not have the user rights to save reports in the report destination. To resolve the issue, specify a
different path in the Create report window.

You cannot open this search, because certain data sources are not available to you

These are some of the possible reasons why you cannot open the search:

l The person who created the search used one or more search categories that are not available to you. To
resolve the issue, create a new search.

l The search that you are trying to open uses search categories that are not available in the version of
XProtect Smart Client that you are using. To resolve the issue, download a newer version of XProtect
Smart Client.

l The search categories that are not available to you may require additional licenses. Please contact your
system administrator.

This device has not been placed on the smart map

You have selected a search result, but the associated device is not displayed on the smart map in the preview
area. The reason is that the device has not been geographically positioned. To resolve this issue, do one of the
following:

l Go to your smart map and add the device. See Add devices to smart map on page 97

l Ask your system administrator to specify the geo coordinates in the device properties in XProtect
Management Client

Smart map (troubleshooting)

My device does not appear on the smart map

343 | Troubleshooting
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

If there are one or more devices that should, but do not appear on the smart map, then likely the devices have
not been geographically positioned. To resolve this issue, do one of the following:

l Drag the devices onto the smart map from the device hierarchy. This requires that editing of devices is
enabled on your user profile

l Ask your system administrator to specify the geo coordinates in the device properties in XProtect
Management Client

Error messages and warnings

Cannot save the map. Cannot perform the operation.

You are trying to add devices to a smart map manually in XProtect Smart Client. A probable cause is that you are
running XProtect Smart Client 2017 R1 against an XProtect Corporate 2017 R2 installation. XProtect Smart Client
looks for the position of the device on the event server, but in version 2017 R2 or newer of XProtect Corporate
the geo coordinates are stored on the management server.

To resolve the issue, upgrade XProtect Smart Client to version 2017 R2 or newer.

This device has not been placed on the smart map

You have selected a search result, but the associated device is not displayed on the smart map in the preview
area. The reason is that the device has not been geographically positioned. To resolve this issue, do one of the
following:

l Go to your smart map and add the device. See Add devices to smart map on page 97

l Ask your system administrator to specify the geo coordinates in the device properties in XProtect
Management Client

Web pages (troubleshooting)

I am getting a script error when adding a web page to a view

The web page uses scripts that are not supported by the browser used to render the web page. It may resolve
the issue to change the Display m ode in the web page properties.

I am getting a script error when loading a view that contains a web page

The web page uses scripts that are not supported by the browser used to render the web page. It may resolve
the issue to change the Display m ode in the web page properties.

I have used scripting to add navigation buttons or clickable images to my HTML page, but the HTML page does
not work as intended. Consider the following:

l Have you set Display m ode to Com patibility? Only Com patibility mode supports scripting.

l Have you used the correct syntax in your HTML code?

l Is HTML scripting enabled in XProtect Management Client or in the Client.exe.config file?

l Does the intended audience have the user rights to access certain cameras, views, features, or tabs in
XProtect Smart Client?

344 | Troubleshooting
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

XProtect Smart Wall (troubleshooting)

My monitors do not display the layout that I specified for my Smart Wall

Typically, this occurs because your system administrator did not activate the preset for the monitor. Ask your
system administrator to verify that the preset is active in Management Client.

My camera is not part of a preset. Why isn't it removed when I activate the preset?

This can be because the Em pty preset item setting is not selected for the preset. Ask your system
administrator to verify the setting for the preset in Management Client.

I cannot drag an item, for example a camera, to a view. When I click the item, nothing happens

This is a known issue in Microsoft Windows that can also occur in XProtect Smart Wall. The workaround is press
ESC one time, and the drag functionality should work again.

When I drag an image from a view to my Smart Wall, it isn't displayed.

You probably did not embed the image in the view, and the computer that is running the Smart Wall cannot
access the image file. To ensure that everyone can see an image, it's a good idea to embed it in the view. For
more information, see Displaying content on Smart Wall on page 301.

My Smart Wall monitors are displayed on top of each other

When your system administrator added monitors to your Smart Wall, he or she did not define the layout of the
monitors. When your administrator adds monitors, the system automatically stacks them in the layout in the
order in which they were added. Your administrator must then arrange them according to your needs.

I cannot drag an image from Windows Explorer to my Smart Wall monitor. The cursor does not change to the
Allow Drop icon

This occurs when your Smart Client is not running under the same user profile as Windows Explorer. For
example, you are running Smart Client under the Local administrator user profile, but you are running Windows
Explorer as a Standard user. To resolve this issue, ensure that both programs are running under the same user
profile.

I have added the Alarm List to a view item, but I cannot use the scroll bar to view details

This is a known issue in XProtect Smart Wall. To use the scroll bar, position the pointer outside the view item, and
then press and hold the CTRL key. This prevents the view item's toolbar from covering the scroll bar. You can
now move the pointer into the view item and use the scroll bar.

XProtect Transact (troubleshooting)

Error messages and warnings

Failed to retrieve transaction data from the event server.

The event server is not running or not responding, or the connection to the server has been lost.

345 | Troubleshooting
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

There is an internal error on the event server or in the associated database. This may include issues with the
connection to the database. To resolve this issue, please contact your system administrator.

Your search timed out before completion. Try narrowing your search by shortening the search period.

There is an internal error on the event server or in the associated database. This may include issues with the
connection to the database. To resolve this issue, please contact your system administrator.

346 | Troubleshooting
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Upgrade

Upgrading XProtect Smart Client

During log-in, if you are using an older version of XProtect Smart Client compared to the server that you are
connecting to, a message informs you that a new version of the XProtect Smart Client is available, including
where to download the new version of the software. Milestone recommends that you download the new version.

If XProtect Smart Client is newer than the server that you are connecting to, certain features may not be
available.

View version and plug-in information

Knowing the exact version of your XProtect Smart Client can be important if you require support or want to
upgrade. In such cases, you also need to know which plug-ins your XProtect Smart Client is using.

The version of XProtect Smart Client may also affect which XProtect server version it is compatible with.

Steps:

1. Open XProtect Smart Client.

2. In the toolbar, click Help > About. A window appears.

347 | Upgrade
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

FAQ

FAQ: alarms
I see an alarm desktop notification, but it disappears before I can respond. How do I find it again?

Go to the Alarm Manager tab and look in the alarm list. If you do not see the alarm, it may have been filtered
out. Try changing the filter settings.

If the alarm list is configured to show events instead of alarms, click the Setup button. In
the Properties pane on your left-hand side, select Alarm in the Data Source list and click
Setup again.

FAQ: audio
Why is the Speakers list not available?

Some surveillance systems do not support two-way audio.

For information about the features available in your XProtect VMS, see Surveillance system differences on page 29.

Can I adjust the recording volume of a microphone connected to a camera?

This feature does not exist in the XProtect Smart Client. However, you may be able to adjust the recording
volume either on the microphone or through the configuration interface of the camera device that has the
microphone attached. Contact your system administrator if in doubt.

Can I adjust the output volume of speakers connected to a camera?

This feature does not exist in the XProtect Smart Client. However, the Level Meter in the Audio pane gives an
indication of the input level which, in turn, gives an idea of the output level.

You may be able to adjust the output volume either on the speakers or through the configuration interface of the
camera device that has the speakers attached. You can also adjust your audio settings in Windows. Contact your
system administrator if in doubt.

Will other XProtect Smart Client users be able to hear what I say through speakers?

As a rule, other XProtect Smart Client users cannot hear what you say. However, if microphones are located
near the speakers you are talking through, it may be possible to hear you.

Can I talk through multiple speakers at the same time?

Yes, if your surveillance system has speakers attached to multiple cameras (and you have the necessary rights
to access them), you can talk through all the speakers at once. In the Audio pane, in the Speakers list, select All
speakers, then click and hold the Talk button when you talk.

If you have selected List only devices from current view in the Audio pane, you will not see all speakers.

Will audio from microphones attached to cameras be recorded?

Incoming audio, from microphones attached to cameras, is recorded, even when no video is being recorded.

348 | FAQ
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Will what I say through speakers be recorded?

The surveillance system can record incoming audio from microphones, even when no video is being recorded.
However, outgoing audio transmitted through speakers can only be recorded, played back, and exported on
some surveillance systems. For information about the features available in your XProtect VMS, see Surveillance
system differences on page 29.

Depending on your surveillance system, recordings can be used, for example, to prove that a XProtect Smart
Client operator gave an audience specific instructions through speakers.

Do I get an indication of my voice level when I talk through speakers?

Yes, in the Audio pane, the Level Meter indicates the level of your voice. If the level is very low, you may need to
move closer to the microphone. If the Level Meter shows no level at all, verify that the microphone is connected
and correctly set up.

FAQ: bookmarks
How do I find bookmarked incidents?

Go to the Search tab, set a timespan, select the cameras that may have recorded the incident, and then click
Search for > Bookm arks.

I cannot find a particular bookmark. Why?

There may be several reasons why you cannot find the bookmark:

l Your user rights do not allow you to view it.

l The bookmark has been deleted by users with sufficient rights to delete bookmarks.

l The bookmarked video no longer exists in the database.

Can I bookmark my search results?

Yes. When you have performed a search that returns a list of search results, you can bookmark any of these
search results. See Bookmark search results on page 241.

FAQ: cameras
What is jitter?

Jitter is small variations in the video which the viewer can perceive as irregular movement, for example when
viewing a person walking.

Will I receive lots of sound notifications?

If you select Always on, the number of motion-related sound notifications will depend on the motion detection
sensitivity of the camera. If motion detection for the camera is highly sensitive, you may receive very frequent
sound notifications. The camera's motion detection sensitivity is configured on the surveillance system server. If
you select sound notifications for more than one camera, you may also hear more notifications—again
depending on the cameras' motion detection sensitivity.

Can I change the notification sound?

349 | FAQ
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

By default, the XProtect Smart Client uses a simple sound file for its sound notifications. The sound file, called
N otification.wav, is located in the XProtect Smart Client installation folder, typically C:\ Program
Files\ Milestone\ XProtect Sm art Client. If you want to use another .wav file as your notification sound, simply
name the file N otification.wav and place it in the XProtect Smart Client installation folder instead of the original
file. The file N otification.wav is used for event-detection and motion-detection notifications. You cannot use
different sound files for different cameras or to distinguish between event- and motion-detection notifications.

Why is the server connection to the camera lost?

Cameras may stop working for various reasons, for example, if it has been configured only to be available during
certain hours of the day, or because of camera or network maintenance, or a change in configuration on the
VMS server.

What do the camera indicators mean?

The camera indicators show you the status of the video that is displayed in the camera view items. See Camera
indicators (explained) on page 189.

FAQ: digital zoom

What is the difference between optical and digital zoom?

With optical zoom, a camera's lens physically moves to provide the required angle of view without loss of image
quality. With digital zoom, the required portion of an image is enlarged by cropping the image and then resizing
it back to the pixel size of the original image—a process called interpolation. Digital zoom simulates optical
zoom, but the digitally zoomed portion will have a lower quality than the original image.

Is digital zoom relevant for PTZ cameras?

When viewing live video from a pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) camera, you can use the PTZ camera's own optical zoom
features, so digital zoom is not highly relevant for PTZ cameras. You can, however, use the digital zoom feature
if, for example, your user rights do not allow you to use the PTZ camera's own optical zoom features.

Why can't I see any navigation buttons?

If the camera you are viewing video for is not a PTZ camera, you will only be able to zoom in on an area of the
image and you will only see the zoom buttons. Once you have zoomed in on an area of the image, you will have
access to the PTZ navigation buttons, which let you navigate within this zoomed area.

FAQ: displays and windows

How many secondary displays can I use?

In the XProtect Smart Client there is no limitation. However, the number of secondary displays you can use
depends on your hardware (display adapters, etc.) and your Windows version.

I want to close a view sent to Prim ary Display or a Secondary Display; where is the Close button?

In order to allow the maximum possible viewing area, the title bar of a view sent to primary display or a
secondary display is hidden. To show the title bar, and get access to the Close button, move your mouse pointer
to the top of the view.

350 | FAQ
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

I watch the same carousel in two different windows; why are they out of sync?

A carousel changes cameras at a specific interval, configured in setup mode. Example: With an interval of 10
seconds, the carousel will show Camera 1 for 10 seconds, then Camera 2 for 10 seconds, etc. The timing begins
when you start watching a view containing the carousel. When you later begin watching the same carousel in
another view, perhaps even in another window or another display, the timing for that instance of the carousel
begins. This is why the carousel appears to be out of sync: in reality, you are watching two separate instances of
the carousel. For more information, see Carousel settings on page 76.

FAQ: exporting
Can I export audio too?

When exporting in the media player and XProtect formats, you can—if your surveillance system supports this—
include recorded audio in the export. Export in the database format is only available if connected to selected
surveillance systems. When exporting in the JPEG (still image) format, you cannot include audio.

For information about the features available in your XProtect VMS, see Surveillance
system differences on page 29.

If I export a bookmark video clip, what is included in the export?

The entire bookmark video clip (see Bookmarks (explained) on page 250) is included, from the specified clip start
time to the specified clip end time.

If I export a sequence, what is included in the export?

The entire sequence, from the first image of the sequence to the last image of the sequence is included.

If I export an evidence lock, what is included in the export?

All data protected from deletion is included: all the cameras and data from devices related to the cameras, from
the first images of the selected interval to the last images of the selected interval.

Can I export fisheye lens recordings?

Yes, provided your surveillance system supports the use of 360° lens cameras (i.e. cameras using a special
technology for recording 360° images).

Why can't I specify an export path?

You can usually specify your own path, but if you are connected to certain types of surveillance systems (see
Surveillance system differences on page 29), the surveillance system server may control the export path setting
and you cannot specify your own path.

Why have digital signatures been removed in my exported video?

There are two scenarios where digital signatures are excluded during the export process:

351 | FAQ
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l If there are areas with privacy masks, digital signatures for the recording server will be removed in the
export.

l If the data you are exporting is very close to the current date and time, the digital signature for the
recording server might not be included for the whole sequence. In this case, only part of the export will
have digital signatures added.

The export process will complete, but when you verify the signatures, you will see that the digital signatures for
the recording server were removed or partially OK.

Can I protect the evidence I export from being tampered with or ending in the wrong hands?

Yes. When you export in the XProtect format, you can prevent your recipients from re-exporting the material,
protect the exported evidence with a password, and add a signature to the exported material. See XProtect
format settings on page 208.

FAQ: maps
Which image file formats and sizes can I use for maps?

You can use bmp, gif, jpg, jpeg, png, tif, tiff, and wmp file formats for maps.

Image file size and resolution should preferably be kept under 10 MB and 10 megapixels. If you use larger
image files, this can cause low performance in the XProtect Smart Client. You cannot use images larger than 20
MB and/or 20 megapixels.

Maps are displayed in the XProtect Smart Client on the basis of the graphic file's properties, and adhering to
Microsoft standards. If a map appears small, you can zoom in.

Can I change the background of a map but keep the cameras in their relative positions?

Yes. If you need to update the map but want to keep all the information on it, you can just replace the map
background (if you have the necessary map edit rights). This allows you to keep all your cameras, and other
elements in their relative positions on a new map. Select Change m ap background, by right-clicking the map or
in the Properties pane.

FAQ: notifications
Why do I not receive any desktop notifications when new alarms occur in my XProtectVMS system?

Desktop notifications for alarms must be enabled by your system administrator in XProtect Management Client.
Otherwise, you will not receive any.

I see an alarm desktop notification, but it disappears before I can respond. How do I find it again?

Go to the Alarm Manager tab and look in the alarm list. If you do not see the alarm, it may have been filtered
out. Try changing the filter settings.

352 | FAQ
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

If the alarm list is configured to show events instead of alarms, click the Setup button. In
the Properties pane on your left-hand side, in the Data Source list, select Alarm and click
Setup again.

Will I receive multiple desktop notifications if multiple alarms occur within a few seconds?

A desktop notification stays on the screen for 15 seconds. If multiple alarms occur consecutively within a few
seconds, you will still only see one desktop notification. When you click the desktop notification, the most recent
alarm opens in the alarm window. To view the previous alarms, go to the alarm list.

FAQ: searching
Can I start search from individual cameras?

Yes. When you are looking at a specific camera on the Live or Playback tab, you can send the camera to a new

Search window. To start search, click in the camera toolbar.

Can I start search from all cameras in a view?

Yes. When you are looking at cameras in a view on the Live or Playback tab, you can send these cameras to a

new Search window. To start search, click above the view.

I am running a search, but even after a while XProtect Smart Client still seems to be searching. Why is that?

If the Duration covers a wide timespan, for example two weeks, or you have selected many cameras, there may
be thousands of search results, and it may take a while for XProtect Smart Client to find all the search results.

Milestone recommends that you refine your search to narrow down the search results.

How do filters work with search?

353 | FAQ
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

When you apply multiple filters, for example both Priority and State, you filter for results that match all the
applied filters.

When you select multiple values within one filter, for example High, Medium , and Low within the Priority filter,
you filter for results that match at least one of those values.

Why are some of the thumbnail images grayed out?

A grayed out thumbnail image in the list of search results means that currently no recordings are available for
the camera at trigger time. There may be multiple reasons, for example that the recording server is down.

Why is the action that I need not available in the action bar?

After selecting a search result, certain actions may not be available in the blue action bar.

This happens if you select a search result that matches more than one search category at the same time, and
the action that you are trying to perform does not support one of those search categories.

354 | FAQ
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Example: You search for Bookm arks and Motion, and one of the search results contain both motion and a
bookmark. In this case, editing or deleting the bookmark is not possible.

The scenario described in this section may also apply to actions pertaining to third-party
software that is integrated with your XProtect VMS system.

Why is the action that I need only applicable to some of my search results?

If you are trying to use one of the actions in the blue action bar on multiple search results, you may see a tool tip
informing you that the action can only be applied on a subset of the search results.

This happens when at least one of the selected search results is not supported by the action that you are trying
to perform.

The scenario described in this section may also apply to actions pertaining to third-party
software that is integrated with your XProtect VMS system.

The thumbnail images in the search results are too small. How do I make them bigger?

You can increase the size of the thumbnails by dragging the slider in the image to the right.

I am trying to save a new search. Why is the Private search check box disabled?

If the Private search check box is grayed out and preselected, you do not have the permissions to Create public
searches. The search that you are about to save is only available to you.

I am trying to open or find a search. Why is the Only show m y private searches check box disabled?

If the Only show m y private searches check box is grayed out and preselected in the Open search or Manage
searches window, you do not have the permissions to Read public searches. You can only view your own private
searches.

I have changed a search. Why can I not save the changes?

If you change how an existing search is configured, for example if you have added a camera, and the Save
button is disabled, you do not have the permission to Edit public searches. Also, you will not be able to change
the details of the search, for example the name and description.

355 | FAQ
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Why can I not delete a search?

If the Delete button is disabled in the Manage searches window, you do not have the permission to Delete
public searches.

What is the difference between start time and event time?

When you search for video recordings on the Search tab, each search result has a start time, end time, and
event time. The start time and end time indicate the beginning and end of an event, respectively. The event time
is the most interesting or important part of the video sequence. For example, if you are searching for motion, the
event time is when the motion starts. Or, if you are identifying objects, the event time is the time of the most
reliable identification.

I am searching for bookmarks. Will the search find bookmarks where the start time or end time falls outside of
the search timespan?

Yes. As long is there is an overlap in time, bookmarks will be found. Here is an example: If the search timespan is
today between 1:00 pm and 3:00 pm, and there is a bookmark where the start time is today 11:00 am and the
end time is today 2:00 pm, then the bookmark will be found.

What is a relative timespan?

When you save a search where you have selected a predefined timespan, for example Last 6 hours, you will be
notified that the timespan is relative. It means that the last six hours are relative to your current time.
Regardless of when you run the search, it will always return search results from the last six hours.

FAQ: smart map

Can I see what is inside the clusters?

The cluster icons on the smart map appear when there are multiple devices within an area. Simply click the
cluster to see the types of devices and how many devices are inside the cluster.

356 | FAQ
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Can I remove devices from my smart map?

Yes. For more information, see Remove devices from smart map on page 102.

Can I show the same device on multiple levels in a building?

Yes, you start by placing the device on one level. Next, right-click the device, select [device] visible on levels and
then specify additional levels that you want the device to be associated with.

Can I adjust the building outline to match a round building?

On the smart map, building outlines are square. Milestone recommends that you use the corner handles to
adjust the shape of the building to cover the actual building.

What files types can I use as floorplans in a building?

You can use any of the supported custom overlays:

l Shapefiles

l CAD drawings

l Images

For more information, see Adding, deleting, or editing custom overlays on page 92.

What is the maximum size of custom overlays?

The maximum size of custom overlays are as follows:

357 | FAQ
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

l CAD drawings: 100 MB

l Images: 50 MB

l Shapefiles: 80 MB

The maximum size can adjusted by changing the values in the client.exe.config file.
Please contact your system demonstrator for more information.

Can I add multiple floorplans to the same level?

Yes, you can add any number of floorplans to the same level, for example one for the north-wing and one for the
south-wing.

What if a device in a building is not associated with any levels?

In that case, the device is visible an all levels.

Dissociating a device from the levels in a building is relevant, for example, if the device is located inside an
elevator. When you add a device to a building, automatically the device is associated with the selected level. To
dissociate the device, in setup mode, right-click the device, select [device] visible on levels, and make sure that
no levels are selected.

If I move a building with a floorplan, will the floorplan move with it?

No, the floorplan stays in its original, geographic location and is visible only in setup mode. You must manually
reposition the floorplan.

If I reorder a level within a building, will the devices stay with the level?

Yes, the devices stay with the level.

What happens to floorplans and devices when I delete a building?

The floorplans are deleted, but the devices remain.

FAQ: views
Can I view video immediately without setting up views?

Yes. Many XProtect Smart Client users can view video in their XProtect Smart Client immediately, without the
need to set up views first.

Private views: If connected to certain types of surveillance system (see Surveillance system differences on page
29)—primarily small surveillance systems with few cameras—the surveillance system server can automatically
generate a single private view with all the system's cameras. Such a view is called a default view. If you have
access to a default view, you can begin viewing video in your XProtect Smart Client immediately because the
default view will automatically be displayed the first time you log in to your XProtect Smart Client.

358 | FAQ
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Shared views: Shared views may already have been created by the system administrator or by some of your
colleagues. If shared views already exist, and you have access to them and the cameras they contain, you can
begin viewing video in your XProtect Smart Client immediately.

Why do I need to recreate my views?

From time to time your system administrator may make changes to camera or user properties on the
surveillance system. Such changes take effect in the XProtect Smart Client when you log in for the first time after
the changes were made, and they may occasionally require you to re-create your views.

What if I cannot create private or shared views?

Typically only a few people in an organization are able to create and edit shared views. Your system
administrator may create and maintain a number of shared views. When you log in, the shared views will
automatically be available to you, so you will not need to create further views.

How can I see which views I have access to?

Typically, your system administrator will have told you if you have access to shared views. If not, you can quickly
determine if any shared views are available to you.

On the Live or Playback tab, the Views pane will always contain a top-level folder called Private. The Private top-
level folder is for accessing private views, and its content depends upon which views—if any—you have created
for yourself.

Any other top-level folders in the Views pane are for accessing shared views. The names of these top-level
folders depend on what has been configured.

The fact that the Views pane contains one or more top-level folders for accessing shared views does not in itself
guarantee that shared views are actually available. To verify if any shared views are available under the top-
level folders, expand the folders.

How can I see which views I can edit?

If a folder has a padlock icon, it is protected and you cannot create new views or edit existing views to it.

Can I see my views on different computers?

Your user settings, including information about your views, are stored centrally on the surveillance system
server. This means that you can use your views, private as well as shared, on any computer that has a XProtect
Smart Client installed, provided you log in to the XProtect Smart Client with your own user name and password.

Can I add an overlay button for an action if I do not have rights to perform the action myself?

Yes. This enables you to make buttons available on shared views, where colleagues with the necessary rights will
be able to use the buttons, even if you do not have rights to use them yourself.

When you add a button for an action you do not have rights for, the button will appear dimmed in setup mode
and will not appear when you use the Live tab. Colleagues with the necessary rights will be able to use the
button on the Live tab.

What if my rights change after I have added an overlay button?

359 | FAQ
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Changes to your rights will affect the way you can use any buttons and they will either appear dimmed or
available depending on whether or not you have user rights for those actions. For example, if you add a button
for an action you do not have rights to perform and then your user rights change so that you do have the
necessary rights, the button will change to available.

How do I delete an overlay button?

In setup mode, right-click the button, and select Delete.

Will overlay buttons appear in exported video?

No, if you export video, overlay buttons are not included in the export.

360 | FAQ
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

Glossary C
cam era navigator
A feature that allows you to see all your cameras in
A relation to each other, for example, as they are laid

access control out according to a floor plan. Using the Camera

A security system that controls the entering of Navigator, you can navigate from one camera to the
persons, vehicles, or others into a building or area. next from a single view.

adaptive stream ing cardholder

A feature that improves the video decoding A person that possesses a card that is recognizable
capability and thereby the general performance of to an access control system and gives access to one
the computer running XProtect Smart Client or or more areas, buildings or similar. See also access
another video viewing client. control.

alarm carousel
Incident defined on surveillance system to trigger an A particular position for viewing video from several
alarm in XProtect Smart Client. If your organization cameras, one after the other, in a view in XProtect

uses the feature, triggered alarms are displayed in Smart Client.

views that contain alarm lists or maps.
cluster
archiving a grouping of devices or plug-in elements – or a
The automatic transfer of recordings from a combination - on the smart map displayed visually
camera’s default database to another location. This as a circular icon with a number. Clusters appear on
way, the amount of recordings you are able to store certain zoom levels indicating the number of devices
will not be limited by the size of the camera’s default or plug-in elements within a particular geographical
database. Archiving also makes it possible to back area.

up your recordings on backup media of your choice.

codec
aspect ratio A technology for compressing and decompressing
Height/width relationship of an image. audio and video data, for example in an exported
AVI file.
AVI
A popular file format for video. Files in this format CPU
carry the .avi file extension. Short for "central processing unit", the component in
a computer that runs the operating system and
applications.
B
bookm ark custom overlay
An important point in a video recording, marked and A user-defined, graphic element that users can add
optionally annotated so that you and your to a smart map, for example to illustrate a floorplan
colleagues will easily be able to find it later. in a building, or to mark borders between regions. A
custom overlay can be an image, a CAD drawing, or
a shapefile.

361 | Glossary
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

D encryption before selling the software or hardware

deadzone to U.S. government agencies.
A deadzone determines how much a joystick handle
fisheye lens
should be allowed to move before information is
A lens that allows the creation and viewing of 360°
sent to the system. Ideally, a joystick handle should
panoramic images.
be completely vertical when not used, but many
joystick handles lean at a slight angle. When FPS
joysticks are used for controlling PTZ cameras, even Frames Per Second, a measure indicating the
a slightly slanting joystick handle could cause PTZ amount of information contained in video. Each
cameras to move when it is not required. Being able frame represents a still image, but when frames are
to configure deadzones is therefore often desirable. displayed in succession the illusion of motion is
created. The higher the FPS, the smoother the
DirectX
motion will appear. Note, however, that a high FPS
A Windows extension providing advanced
may also lead to a large file size when video is
multimedia capabilities.
saved.

E fram e rate
event A measure indicating the amount of information
A predefined incident occurring on the surveillance contained in motion video. Typically measured in
system; used by the surveillance system for FPS (Frames Per second).
triggering actions. Depending on surveillance
system configuration, events may be caused by G
input from external sensors, by detected motion, by GOP
data received from other applications, or manually Group Of Pictures; individual frames grouped
through user input. The occurrence of an event together, forming a video motion sequence.
could, for example, be used for making a camera
record with a particular frame rate, for activating GPU
outputs, for sending e-mails, or for a combination Short for "graphics processing unit", which is a
thereof. processor designed to handle graphics operations.

evidence lock
A video sequence that is protected, so it cannot be H
deleted. H.264/ H.265
A compression standard for digital video. Like
MPEG, the standard uses lossy compression.
F
FI PS hotspot
Short for "Federal Information Processing A particular position for viewing magnified and/or
Standards". high quality camera images in XProtect Smart Client
views.
FI PS 140-2
A U.S. government standard that defines the critical
security parameters that vendors must use for

362 | Glossary
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

I M
i-fram e MAC address
Short name for intraframe. Used in the MPEG Media Access Control address, a 12-character
standard for digital video compression, an I-frame is hexadecimal number uniquely identifying each
a single frame stored at specified intervals. The I- device on a network.
frame records the entire view of the camera,
whereas the following frames (P-frames) record m ap
only the pixels that change. This helps greatly 1) XProtect Smart Client feature for using maps,
reduce the size of MPEG files. An I-frame is similar floor plans, photos, etc. for navigation and status
to a keyframe. visualization. 2) The actual map, floor plan, photo,
etc. used in a view.

J Matrix
JPEG A product integrated into some surveillance
An image compression method, also known as JPG systems, which enables the control of live camera
or Joint Photographic Experts Group. The method is views on remote computers for distributed viewing.
a so-called lossy compression, meaning that some Computers on which you can view Matrix-triggered
image detail will be lost during compression. Images video are known as Matrix-recipients.
compressed this way have become generically
known as JPGs or JPEGs. Matrix-recipient
Computer on which you can view Matrix-triggered
JPG video.
See JPEG.
MI P
Short for "Milestone Integration Platform".
K
keyfram e MI P elem ent
Used in the standard for digital video compression, A plug-in element added through the MIP SDK.
such as MPEG, a keyframe is a single frame stored
at specified intervals. The keyframe records the MI P SDK
Short for "Milestone Integration Platform software
entire view of the camera, whereas the following
development kit".
frames record only the pixels that change. This
helps greatly reduce the size of MPEG files. A
MKV
keyframe is similar to an i-frame.
Short for "Matroska Video". An MKV file is a video
file saved in the Matroska multimedia container
L format. It supports several types of audio and video
layer codecs.
The geographic background on a smart map, a
MPEG
custom overlay, or a system element, for example a
A group of compression standards and file formats
camera. Layers are all the graphic elements that
for digital video, developed by the Moving Pictures
exist on the smart map.
Experts Group (MPEG). MPEG standards use so-
LPR called lossy compression as they store only the
Short for "license plate recognition". changes between keyframes, removing often

363 | Glossary
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

considerable amounts of redundant information: video on the Live tab or recorded video on the
Keyframes stored at specified intervals record the Playback tab.
entire view of the camera, whereas the following
frames record only pixels that change. This helps patrolling profile
greatly reduce the size of MPEG files. The exact definition of how patrolling with a PTZ
camera is carried out, including the sequence for
moving between preset positions, timing settings,
O etc. Also known as a "patrol scheme".
operator
A professional user of an XProtect client application. port
A logical endpoint for data traffic. Networks use
output different ports for different types of data traffic.
Data going out of a computer. On IP surveillance Therefore it is sometimes, but not always, necessary
systems, output is frequently used for activating to specify which port to use for particular data
devices such as gates, sirens, strobe lights, and communication. Most ports are used automatically
more. based on the types of data included in the
communication. On TCP/IP networks, port numbers
overlay button
range from 0 to 65536, but only ports 0 to 1024 are
A button appearing as a layer on top of the video
reserved for particular purposes. For example, port
when you move your mouse cursor over individual
80 is used for HTTP traffic which is used when
camera positions in views on the Live tab. Use
viewing web pages.
overlay buttons to activate speakers, events, output,
move PTZ cameras, start recording, clear signals PoS
from cameras. Short for "Point of Sale" and typically refers to a
cash register or cashier counter in a retail shop or
P store.

P-fram e
POS
Short name for predictive frame. The MPEG
Short for "Point of sale"
standard for digital video compression uses P-
frames together with I-frames. An I-frame, also preset
known as a keyframe, is a single frame stored at A predefined layout for an individual monitor in
specified intervals. The I-frame records the entire XProtect Smart Client. Presets contain predefined
view of the camera, whereas the following frames settings that determine which cameras are
(the P-frames) record only the pixels that change. displayed, and how content is structured on each
This helps greatly reduce the size of MPEG files. monitor on the video wall.

pane privacy m ask

Small groups of buttons, fields and more located in A blurred or solid color that covers an area of the
the left side of the XProtect Smart Client window. video in the camera view. The defined areas are
Panes give you access to the majority of the blurred or covered in live, playback, hotspot,
XProtect Smart Client features. Exactly which panes carousel, smart map, smart search, and export
you see depends on your configuration and on your modes in the clients.
task, for example on whether you are viewing live

364 | Glossary
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

PTZ S
Pan-tilt-zoom; a highly movable and flexible type of SCS
camera. File extension (.scs) for a script type targeted at
controlling XProtect Smart Client.
PTZ patrolling
The automatic turning of a PTZ camera between a Sequence Explorer
number of preset positions. The Sequence Explorer lists thumbnail images
representing recorded sequences from an individual
PTZ preset
camera or all cameras in a view. The fact that you
Can be used for making the PTZ camera
can compare the thumbnail images side-by-side,
automatically go to particular preset positions when
while navigating in time simply by dragging the
particular events occur, and for specifying PTZ
thumbnail view, enables you to very quickly assess
patrolling profiles.
large numbers of sequences and identify the most
relevant sequence, which you can then immediately
Q play back.
QVGA
A video resolution of 320×240 pixels. QVGA stands sm art m ap
for "Quarter Video Graphics Array" and is named as A map functionality that uses a geographic
such because the resolution 320×240 pixels is a information system to visualize devices (for
quarter of the size of the standard VGA resolution example, cameras and microphones), structures,
which is 640×480 pixels. and topographical elements of a surveillance
system in geographically accurate, real-world
imagery. Maps that use elements of this
R functionality are called smart maps.
recording
In IP video surveillance systems, the term recording sm art search
means saving video and, if applicable, audio from a A search feature that lets you find video with motion
camera in a database on the surveillance system. In in one or more selected areas of recordings from
many IP surveillance systems, all of the video/audio one or more cameras.
received from cameras is not necessarily saved.
Saving of video and audio in is in many cases started Sm art Wall overview
only when there is a reason to do so, for example A graphical representation of a Smart Wall that

when motion is detected, when a particular event allows you to control what is displayed on the

occurs, or when a specific period of time begins. different monitors.

Recording is then stopped after a specified amount

snapshot
of time, when motion is no longer detected, when
An instant capture of a frame of video at a given
another event occurs or similar. The term recording
time.
originates from the analog world, where video/audio
was not taped until the record button was pressed. still im age
A single static image.

365 | Glossary
User manual | XProtect® Smart Client 2021 R1

T
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol; a protocol (i.e.
standard) used for sending data packets across
networks. TCP is often combined with another
protocol, IP (Internet Protocol). The combination,
known as TCP/IP, allows data packets to be sent
back and forth between two points on a network for
longer periods of time, and is used when connecting
computers and other devices on the Internet.

TCP/ I P
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol; a
combination of protocols (i.e. standards) used when
connecting computers and other devices on
networks, including the Internet.

V
view
A collection of video from one or more cameras,
presented together in XProtect Smart Client. A view
may include other content than video from cameras,
such as HTML pages and static images. A view can
be private (only visible by the user who created it) or
shared with other users.

VMD
Video Motion Detection. In IP video surveillance
systems, recording of video is often started by
detected motion. This can be a great way of avoiding
unnecessary recordings. Recording of video can of
course also be started by other events, and/or by
time schedules.

VMS
Short for "Video Management Software".

X
XProtect Transact
Product available as an add-on to surveillance
systems. With XProtect Transact, you can combine
video with time-linked Point of Sale (PoS) or ATM
transaction data.

366 | Glossary
 helpfeedback@m ilest one.dk

About Milestone

Milestone Systems is a leading provider of open platform video management software; technology that helps
the world see how to ensure safety, protect assets and increase business efficiency. Milestone Systems
enables an open platform community that drives collaboration and innovation in the development and use of
network video technology, with reliable and scalable solutions that are proven in more than 150,000 sites
worldwide. Founded in 1998, Milestone Systems is a stand-alone company in the Canon Group. For more
information, visit https://www.milestonesys.com/.